Konica Minolta bizhub C220 Anglais English - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Support :

bizhub C220

Title
bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides
Type of Manual
User's Guide
Applicable for
bizhub C220, bizhub C280, bizhub C360
Languages
English
Version
3-2-0
Release Date
2009-08-28
ID
DLEU0912957EN00

Files:

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25

User’s Guide bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-3 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-4 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-7 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-7 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-7 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-8 Account track authentication ............................................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration............................................................................................................ 2-9 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 2-9 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 2-9 Polling TX User Box ........................................................................................................................... 2-9 Memory RX User Box ........................................................................................................................ 2-9 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-10 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-11 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-11 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-11 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-12 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-4 Contents-2 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-5 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-7 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-12 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-12 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-12 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-13 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-13 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-14 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-15 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-15 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-16 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.3 Save Document window .................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-3 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-6 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-8 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................... 7-9 7.3.1 Copies................................................................................................................................................ 7-9 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided................................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.3.3 Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-10 7.3.4 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-11 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Contents-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.3.5 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.6 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.7 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-29 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-30 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-31 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-31 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-32 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-33 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-33 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-34 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-34 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-36 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-36 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-37 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-37 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-39 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-40 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-40 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-40 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-5 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-42 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-42 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-42 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-43 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-44 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-45 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-46 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-46 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-47 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-47 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-47 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-47 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-48 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-49 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-49 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-51 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-51 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-52 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-52 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-53 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-53 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-54 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-54 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-54 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-55 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-55 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-55 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-55 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Contents-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-57 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-57 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-57 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-57 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-58 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-58 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-59 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-59 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-60 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-60 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-61 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-61 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-61 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-62 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-63 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-63 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-63 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-64 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-65 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-65 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-66 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-66 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-67 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-68 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-68 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-68 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-69 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-70 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-70 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-73 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-75 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-75 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-77 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-79 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-80 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-81 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-81 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-81 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-81 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-81 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-82 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-82 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-82 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-82 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-83 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-83 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-83 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-83 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-7 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-84 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-84 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-84 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-84 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-86 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-86 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-88 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-88 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.10 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect ........................................................... 7-88 7.13.11 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard............................................................. 7-88 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-88 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-88 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-89 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-89 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-89 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-89 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-89 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-89 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-89 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-90 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-90 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-90 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-90 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-90 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-91 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-92 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-92 Contents-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.14 Re-Transmission User Box (System User Box).......................................................................... 7-93 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-93 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-93 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-93 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-94 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-95 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-95 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-95 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-95 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-96 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-96 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) .......................................................................................... 7-98 7.17.1 External memory device .................................................................................................................. 7-98 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................... 7-98 Connecting the external memory device ......................................................................................... 7-98 7.17.2 External memory screen .................................................................................................................. 7-99 Entering a file path ........................................................................................................................... 7-99 Selecting a file.................................................................................................................................. 7-99 Printing encrypted PDF data............................................................................................................ 7-99 Moving to the parent folder.............................................................................................................. 7-99 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-100 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-100 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Color .............................................................................................................................................. 7-100 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-100 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-101 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-101 7.17.4 Print - Application .......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-101 7.17.5 Filing Settings - Save in User Box ................................................................................................. 7-102 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-103 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-104 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-104 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-104 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-105 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-105 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-9 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-6 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-6 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-7 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-7 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-9 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-14 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-15 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-15 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-15 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-16 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-16 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-19 Max. No. of User Boxes................................................................................................................... 8-19 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19 8.3.8 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-20 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-20 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-20 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-21 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-21 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-22 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-22 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-23 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-23 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-24 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-24 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-25 8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-26 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-26 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-26 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-26 8.3.11 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-27 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-27 Contents-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3.12 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-27 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-28 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-29 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-30 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.13 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled............................................................. 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-14 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-15 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-16 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-20 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-21 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-22 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-23 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-23 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-23 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-24 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-25 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-28 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-31 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-34 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-35 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-37 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-37 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-38 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-40 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-42 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-43 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) Contents-11 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-44 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-45 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-46 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list ......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 Contents-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1 Introduction bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Welcome 1-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1.1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact your service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1.2 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of a user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names on the control panel, part names, product names and option names are indicated in bold text. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1-7 1.3 To check the function you want to use 1 1.3 To check the function you want to use This manual contains details on setting up the functions. Understanding Operation Flow This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more detail. Using Menu Tree Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages, there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more details. 1 To check the function you want to use 1-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 1.3 2 User Box Function Overview bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-3 2.1 User Box functions 2 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by E-mail, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer. 2.1.1 Available User Box functions Saving documents Data can be saved to the following boxes. *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 6-3 Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image of the date/time or an annotation number to documents saved in Scan mode. p. 6-3 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. • You can save all scanned documents directly in an external memory connected to this machine. • You can save a document stored in a User Box in an external memory. • You can save a file stored in an external memory in a User Box. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-105 2 User Box functions 2-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.1 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Computer 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Original 6 External Memory Using documents Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows: 2 4 5 6 1 3 User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 7-9 Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. p. 7-81 Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print documents sent via polling. p. 7-82 Secure Document User Box (*3) Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for printing. p. 7-83 Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can confirm and print the fax document received though the memory RX setting. p. 7-86 Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 7-87 Fax Retransmit User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or print it for confirmation. p. 7-93 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (*4) Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password is required for printing. p. 7-95 ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. You can log in as a user and print a document sent for print jobs from the printer driver. p. 7-96 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. You can print documents saved in an external memory connected to this machine. p. 7-98 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-5 2.1 User Box functions 2 *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. *3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the PageScope Direct Print manual or the direct print in the PageScope Web Connection online help. 1 Fax 2 Computer 3 E-mail, etc. 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Cellular phone or PDA 6 External memory 7 Printout Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-104 User Box Description Reference 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 2 User Box functions 2-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.1 Organizing documents Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 External Memory User Box Delete Edit Name Move Copy Save in User Box Save in USB memory (when external memory is connected) Document Details Public/Personal/Group User Boxes o o o o − o o Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − − Polling TX User Box o − − − − − − Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o Annotation User Box o o − − − − o Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o Password Encrypted PDF User Box o − − − − − o ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o External Memory, Mobile/ PDA − − − − o − o 2 1 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-7 2.1 User Box functions 2 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured. Registering a User Box Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel or by using PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. Reference - The following User Boxes are configurable. – Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-6) – Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-7) – Annotation User Box (p. 8-17) When using this machine as a relay device If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-9) To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations. The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory reception settings. dReference For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 2 Information 2-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.2 2.2 Information This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions. 2.2.1 User authentication To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator. MFP authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. External server authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-9 2.2 Information 2 Account track authentication Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. Reference - When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed. For details, refer to page 2-11. - If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. - When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] for the login procedure. 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration Public/Personal/Group User Boxes The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account. The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes: - Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data. - Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. Bulletin Board User Box Reference - Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box. Polling TX User Box Only one document can be saved in a single User Box. Memory RX User Box Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box. 2 Information 2-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.2 Relay User Box Reference - Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box. 2.2.3 Restriction of file name Name document data to be saved. Reference - The names can contain up to 30 characters. - You can edit the names after the documents have been saved. - Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data. The following elements are combined to create a name. The following describes elements of an example document name "CKMBT_C36011102315230". Item Description C This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan, User Box P: Print R: Received fax KMBT_C360 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is "KMBT_(product name)". You can change this name in [Device Name] in [Administrator/ Machine Settings] in Administrator Settings. Use up to 10 characters. 11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file names. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes. - User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes. - Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings. 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes. Create and access Public User Box User 1 User 2 Access allowed Personal User Box of user 2 Personal User Box of user 1 Public User Box User Box administrator 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.3 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs to. - If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods, all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts that they do not belong to. Account B Public User Box Account A Access allowed Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B Account A Account B User 1 User 2 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2-13 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. User 1 User 2 Account A Account B Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Personal User Box of user 2 Group User Box of account B Access allowed User Box administrator 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 2.3 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different account by as a member of the account. Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password of the account when logging in. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. Account A Account B User 1 User 1 Access allowed Access permitted through entry of account name and password User Box administrator Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3 Control panel 3-2 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.1 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the control panel. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy conservation state. 4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power Save key again. 5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/scan program. 6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel and touch panel. 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-3 3.1 Control panel 3 7 CAUTION - Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying. • This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the User Box key. • To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be started. Press this key to restart a stopped job. 12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various other settings. 15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations. 16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available. 17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. 18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well. 19 Brightness adjustment dial Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green. 21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. No. Name Description 3 Touch panel 3-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 3.2 Touch panel 3.2.1 Screen component Icons that appear in the touch panel Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be displayed. No. Name Description 1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures. 2 Functions/settings display area Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings. 3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine, and shortcut keys. 4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to page 3-5. 5 Toner supply indicators Show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). 4 5 1 2 3 Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to display the warning screen again. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-5 3.2 Touch panel 3 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, pressing this icon displays the setting screen for the Image Controller IC-412 v1.1. Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled. Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Description No. Name Description 1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job log. 2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various settings of the scan, print and transmission functions. 3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document. 1 2 3 3 Touch panel 3-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 Job List A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed. Job List - Delete Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job. No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-7 3.2 Touch panel 3 Job List - Job Details Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following four types of jobs: Item Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. [Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs. [Receive] Lists fax reception jobs. [Save] Lists jobs with documents being saved in User Boxes. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/deleting). Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job. • If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict", you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs. • If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job given priority is finished. [Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages and number of copies for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. 3 Touch panel 3-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages and number of copies for the selected job. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial/deleting). Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete]. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two fax kits are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-9 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for broadcasting. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: The number of original pages that were received. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by entering directly. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, and number of original pages for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. [Received Image] Select the job to display the received image. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-11 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving, saving to memory, deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, User Box, stored time, and number of original pages for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination User Box, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Saved Image] Select the job to display the saved image. 3 Touch panel 3-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 - To view saved images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. User Box information Displays the User Box information when you select a User Box. Use/File - Detail Press [Detail] on the lower left of the Use Document screen to check the time stored, user name, document name, the number of pages, and job number of the selected document. Reference - When you select multiple documents, use [ ][ ] to switch pages. dReference For checking preview image, refer to page 3-14. Use/File - Check Job Settings Select [Send] or [Bind TX] in the Send tab to display the address entry screen. [Check Job Settings] is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Reference - Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings. – Destination Settings – Document Setting Contents – Communication Settings (Not displayed when Combine is enabled.) – Check E-Mail Settings bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-13 3.2 Touch panel 3 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine. Reference - To add a directly entered destination to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Address]. - To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details]. - To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents View the list of resolution, file type, and color settings. 3 Touch panel 3-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings Check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages. Preview Check the preview image of the selected document when using or filing documents. Press [Preview] to select one document. The image of the first page is displayed in the left panel. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-15 3.2 Touch panel 3 Preview Press [Detail] to enlarge the preview image. Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. Preview (Print/Combine) Preview the page image of printing result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Print] or [Combine]. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, images of all pages can be viewed. Item Description [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [View Finishing] Displays the specified settings as icons and text in the preview image. Cancel [View Finishing] to erase the icons and text so that only the image appears in the screen. 3 Touch panel 3-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 Preview (Send/Bind TX) Preview the page image of sending result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Send] or [Bind TX]. Item Description [Scan] Displays the preview for E-mail TX/PC (FTP)/File TX (SMB)/File TX (WebDAV) operations. [Fax] Press this button to display the preview for G3 fax, IP address fax, or Internet fax operations. [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] When [Scan] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees anti-clockwise to show the image. : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees clockwise to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°], [Right 90°], or [180°] as the rotation angle. When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at 180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected in [Rotation Angle] and at 0 degrees if [Right 90°] is selected. If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read a long original, the rotation mode may not be specified. When [Fax] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [Delete Page] Displayed when the saved document contains multiple pages while [Send] is selected. You can select multiple images in the page to be deleted. [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. All pages cannot be deleted. [View Finishing] View the finishing image with the configured settings, including printing the data, applied. When you cancel [View Finishing], only the image appears in the screen. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3-17 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - If you select [Bind TX], the Delete Page function becomes unavailable. - If you select [Send] for multiple documents, the rotate page and delete page functions become unavailable. 3 Touch panel 3-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 3.2 4 User Box Operation Flow bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-3 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes 4 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes This section describes the steps for saving documents in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Save Document] Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) 4 Saving documents in User Boxes 4-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.1 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-5 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Print] tab Select documents 4 Printing documents from a User Box 4-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.2 If you have selected a single document, press [Print] (p. 7-6) When selecting multiple documents and printing them using added functions, press [Combine] (p. 7-7) Configure the printing order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-15) bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-7 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.3 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for sending documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Send] tab Select documents bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-9 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box 4 If you have selected a single document, press [Send]. (p. 7-33) When selecting multiple documents and specifying the file type or stamp, press [Bind TX] (p. 7-33) Configure the sending order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Specify the destination Address Book Direct Input Job History (The job history of fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax is not displayed when Bind TX is selected. ) Address Search Also specify a scan/fax program. For details on scan/fax programs, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.3 Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-47) Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-47) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-16) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-11 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory 4 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory This section describes the steps for saving scanned images in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document to External Memory.] Press [Save Document] Press [User Box] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [OK] 4 Saving a document in an external memory 4-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.4 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-13 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in the external memory to a User Box. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document from External Memory to a User Box.] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [Use/File] Press the [Filing Settings] tab Select a document, and then press [Save to User Box] 4 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.5 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Specify the User Box and document name (p. 7-102) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-15 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory 4 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Print a document from External Memory.] Select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory] Press [Use/File] Select a file, and then press [Print] (p. 7-99) 4 Printing a document from an external memory 4-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.6 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Configure print settings (p. 7-100) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-17 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box 4 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box This section describes the steps for filing documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Filing Settings] tab Select documents, and then select a function (p. 7-63) 4 Filing documents in a User Box 4-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.7 dReference To delete the documents, refer to page 7-64. To rename the documents, refer to page 7-64. To move the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-64. To copy the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-65. To save a document in the external memory, refer to page 7-65. To check information of the documents or preview the documents, refer to page 7-68. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-19 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA This section describes the steps to print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Print List] To check printing preferences, press [Check Print Settings] 4 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4-20 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.8 dReference To configure print settings from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 8-12. Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-103) bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-21 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box This section describes the steps to save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA to a User Box. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Save in User Box] Select the desired User Box, and then press [OK] 4 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4-22 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.9 Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-104) bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-23 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode This section describes the configuration and settings for the functions available in the User Box mode. 4.10.1 Save Document Public, Personal, or Group User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Top] [Left] [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-24 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 System User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Annotation User Box] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-25 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [External Memory] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Save in User Box] (p. 7-103) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-26 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 4.10.2 Use/File Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the menu tree for using or filing documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes, and configuring print settings. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] (p. 7-11) [Group] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-11) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-27 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Front Cover] [Back Cover] [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Insert Paper] [Insert Type] [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Chapter Paper] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Insert Sheet Setting] (p. 7-23) [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Text Color] [Print Position] [Copy Security] [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-28 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 [Combine] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-11) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Continuous Print] (p. 7-15) [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Text Color] [Print Position] [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) First level Second level Third level Fourth level bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-29 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Send menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Send] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [Fax] (p. 7-40) [Fax Number] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [Internet Fax] (p. 7-41) [RX Ability (Destination)] (p. 7-41) [IP Address Fax] (p. 7-42) [Address] [Port Number] [Destination Machine Type] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-30 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-47) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Encryption] (p. 7-49) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-51) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-51) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-52) [Color] (p. 7-52) [Use Existing Color Setting] [Full Color] [Gray Scale] [Black] [Communication Settings] [Line Settings] (p. 7-53) [Overseas TX] (p. 7-53) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-54) [V.34 OFF] (p. 7-54) [Check Dest. & Send] (p. 7-54) [Select Line] (p. 7-54) [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [Document Name] (p. 7-55) [Subject] (p. 7-55) [From] (p. 7-56) [Body] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] First level Second level Third level Fourth level bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-31 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Communication Method Settings] (p. 7-58) [Timer TX] (p. 7-58) [Password TX] (p. 7-59) [F-Code TX] (p. 7-59) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Fax Header Settings] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] (p. 7-62) [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Bind TX] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-32 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Filing Settings menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. [Document Settings] [File Type] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Encryption] (p. 7-49) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-51) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-51) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-52) [Communication Settings] [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [Document Name] (p. 7-55) [Subject] (p. 7-55) [From] (p. 7-56) [Body] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-33 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the File/Use - Application menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Delete] (p. 7-64) [Edit Name] (p. 7-64) [Move] (p. 7-64) [Copy] (p. 7-65) [Save to External Memory.] (p. 7-65) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Edit Document] [Delete Page] (p. 7-70) [Rotate Page] (p. 7-71) [Move Page] (p. 7-73) [Preview] (p. 7-75) [Preview /Set Range] (p. 7-75) [Register Overlay] (p. 7-77) [Overlay Image] [Edit] [New] (p. 7-78) [Overwrite] (p. 7-79) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-80) [Density] [Color] [Document Details] [Preview] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-34 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 System User Box The following shows the Use/File menu tree for System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 7-81) [Polling TX User Box] (p. 7-82) [Secure Document User Box] [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-84) [Print] (p. 7-84) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] (p. 7-17) [Cover Sheet] [Insert Sheet] [Chapters] bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-35 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] [Page Number] [Stamp] [Copy Security] [Stamp Repeat] [Header/Footer] [Registered Overlay] [Filing Settings] (p. 7-85) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-86) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-86) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [Annotation User Box] [Print-Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-36 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Send-Send] [Address Book] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [FTP] (p. 7-43) [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-47) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Color] (p. 7-52) [Communication Settings] [E-mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Send & Print] (p. 7-62) [Stamp Element] (p. 7-90) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-92) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Application] [Register Overlay] (p. 7-77) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4-37 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Re-Transmission User Box] [Print] [Proof Print] (p. 7-93) [Send] [Fax] (p. 7-93) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-94) [Document Details] [Preview] (X-XX) [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] [Print/Save] [Print/Save] (p. 7-95) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-95) [Document Details] [ID & Print User Box] [Print] [Print] (p. 7-97) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-97) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [External Memory] [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-100) [Color] (p. 7-100) [Full Color] [Black] [Print] (p. 7-100) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Binding Position] (p. 7-100) [Top] [Left] [Right] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] [Paper] (p. 7-101) [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Filing Settings] [Save to User Box] [User Box] [Document Name] [Document Details] [Mobile/PDA] [Print List] [Check Print Settings] (p. 7-104) [Save in User Box] (p. 7-105) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-38 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 4.10 5 Accessing the User Box mode bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 5-3 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode 5 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode Before starting this procedure, turn this machine on. When this machine is ready to copy data, the basic settings screen appears. To access the User Box mode, press the User Box key in the control panel. The User Box mode window appears. Lightly press the desired button in the window to display menus or functions. Then select the target one. 5 User Box Operation Menu 5-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 5.2 5.2 User Box Operation Menu Accessing the User Box mode enables you to select the operation menus below. 5.2.1 Save Document Scan the original loaded on this machine and save it in a User Box. You can specify the name or image quality of an original when saving it. dReference For details on the Save Document function, refer to page 6-4. For details on the Save Document menu structure, refer to page 4-23. 5.2.2 Use/File Print or send a document saved in a User Box. When printing a document, you can specify the number of sets or page margins. When sending a document, you can specify the file type. If necessary, you can rename or move a document saved in a User Box, or copy a document to another User Box. dReference For details on the Use/File function, refer to page 7-3. For details on the Use/File menu structure, refer to page 4-26. 6 Save Document bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-3 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview 6.1.1 Functions Save Document enables you to directly specify a destination User Box when saving a document in the User Box mode. Using Save Document, document are saved in the same way as when scanned data is saved. Public/Personal/Group User Boxes You can save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings limit users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. Annotation User Box If you want to print or send a document with the date and time or filing number image, save the document in the Annotation User Box. To use this box, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [Annotation User Box]. External Memory You can directly save a scanned document in the external memory connected to this machine. To use this function, check that the external memory is connected to the USB connector of this machine, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory]. Otherwise, on the screen that is displayed when the external memory device has been connected to the USB connector, press [Save a document to External Memory.]. Reference - A function to save a document to the external memory or to save a document stored in the external memory to a User Box is set to OFF (cannot be saved) in the factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. dReference For information on the available external memory, refer to page 7-98. 6 Save Document Overview 6-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.1 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document Public/Personal/Group User Boxes Select the [Public], [Personal], or [Group] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. System User Box Select the [System User Box] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. Reference - If [Annotation User Box] is selected, further specify the desired User Box. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-5 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6.1.3 Save Document window The available setting items in the Save Document screen are as follows. Reference - For the external memory, you cannot change the destination User Box. - To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Item Description [User Box] For Public, Personal, Group and Annotation User Boxes, you can change the destination User Box for saving a document. To change the User Box, press [User Box] and select a User Box. • If there is no User Box with the specified number, a new Public User Box is automatically created. [Document Name] Press this button to display a keyboard to enter a document name. Enter the document name in the control panel. [Scan Settings] Configure detailed settings for scanning the document. For details, refer to page 6-6. [Original Settings] Configure the detailed settings for the original type and original direction. For details, refer to page 6-19. 6 Scan Settings 6-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2 Scan Settings Press [Scan Settings] in the Save Document tab to configure the detailed scan settings. 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type Select the original type based on the original contents. The available original types are as follows. If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type. Item Description [Text] Original that consists of only text. [Text/Photo] Original that consists of both text and photos (halftone). [Photo] Original that consists of only photos (halftone). [Dot Matrix Original] Original with faint-printing in whole. [Copied Paper] Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer. Item Description [Photo Paper] Select this setting for a photo printed on printing paper. [Printed Photo] Select this setting for printed photos such as in books or magazines. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-7 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one or both sides of the original. 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. Reference - The amount of data increases depending on the selected resolution, and you may not be able to save data in an external memory. If you cannot save data, reduce the resolution and retry saving it. Item Description [1-Sided] Scans one side of the original. [2-Sided] Scans both sides of the original. [Cover + 2-Sided] Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also scans the remaining pages in the double-sided mode. 6 Scan Settings 6-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2.4 Basic - File Type Select the file type to save scanned data. File Type The available file types are as follows. dReference You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. You cannot specify some file formats depending on the Color settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Reference - Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file type when downloading the data of the document. - If you select [JPEG], [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. This format is useful when saving a scanned full color data. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-9 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Reference - You cannot check the contents of an encrypted document in the preview screen. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified on the Encryption screen. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. [Password] Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 6 Scan Settings 6-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-11 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Outline PDF Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Scan Setting Specify whether to save all pages of a document to one file, or to save each page to one file. Reference - If you select [Page Separation] when saving a document in a User Box, the selection of Page Separation is stored, and then the document is saved as a [Multi Page] file. - The selection of Page Separation is enabled when sending data to an E-Mail, PC (SMB), or FTP destination. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with [JPEG]. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. 6 Scan Settings 6-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2.5 Basic - Density Adjust the density for the scanned document. 6.2.6 Basic - Color Specify whether to scan original in color or black-and-white. Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Item Description [Auto Color] Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting. [Full Color] Scans the original in full color. [Gray Scale] Select this setting for originals with high-level halftone such as black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as line drawings. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-13 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.7 Scan Size Select the paper size of the original to be scanned. Standard size Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. To scan the original with a predetermined paper size, select that size. Custom Size Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes. Reference - X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 7 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm). - Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11-11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm). Photo Size Select the 3 e 5 or 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 (13 e 18, 10 e 15 or 9 e 13) size for photographs. 6 Scan Settings 6-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2.8 Image Adjustment Adjust the background density or sharpness for the scanned document. Background Removal Adjust the background density of the scanned original. When scanning a colored-paper original, the background color may be scanned resulting in the entire image becoming dark. To avoid this, you can adjust the background density. Select the background removal method, and specify the level. To automatically adjust the density, press [Auto]. Reference - To prevent the dark part in the back side from being scanned as shade, select [Bleed Removal]. - To scan an original with the colored background such as a map, select [Paper Discoloration Adj]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-15 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Sharpness This settings allows you to sharpen character edges or other borders for the scanned document. 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase setting of the Book Copy function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. 6 Scan Settings 6-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. Settings include scanning method, binding positions and erasing unwanted areas. For paper size of the original, select the size of the spread. Book copy method Select the scanning method. Book Erase - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] setting of the Book Copy function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. Item Description [Book Spread] Scans a two-page spread as a single page. [Separation] Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right). [Front Cover] Scans the first page as a front cover. [Front + Back Covers] Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third and subsequent pages as a body. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-17 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Book Erase - Center Erase Configure settings to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original. Reference - Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and 30.0 mm). Binding Position If you have selected Separation, Front Cover, or Front + Back Covers, press [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 6 Scan Settings 6-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.2 6.2.11 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when singlesided originals and double-sided originals are mixed. Press [Separate Scan] to highlight the display. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6-19 6.3 Original Settings 6 6.3 Original Settings Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals. Under Original Settings, you can select two or more items at the same time. 6.3.1 Special Original The available setting items are as follows. 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Item Contents [Mixed Original] Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF. The scanning speed will be lowered because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. [Z-Folded Original] Select this setting to detect the size of a Z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF. [Long Original] Select this setting for originals that are longer than the standard size. 6 Original Settings 6-20 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 6.3 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. When a double-sized original is scanned, the binding position is corrected on the back side. 6.3.4 Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon the scanned image when loading an original in the ADF. Reference - Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed. - If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Auto] Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise. [Top] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. [Left] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the left. 7 Use/File bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-3 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File Printing a document You can print a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Fax reception mode. You can add finishing settings such as the number of copies or 2-sided print settings when printing the document. In addition, you can specify Combine to print two or more documents at the same time. Sending You can distribute a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Receive mode, for example, by E-mail or fax. You can add finishing or transmission settings when distributing the document. You can also specify Bind TX to select two or more documents and distribute them at the same time. Filing You can perform various document filing operations such as moving or copying documents between User Boxes. You can also save a document stored in a User Box in the external memory. Application settings You can move or rotate pages in saved documents, or register overlay images. 7 Overview of the Use/File operations 7-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.1 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen Select the User Box where you want to print and distribute documents. The following screen is displayed. This section describes the setting items, pointing to the Public User Box as an example. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. (p. 7-6) 2 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. (p. 7-33) 3 [Filing Settings] Rename, move, or copy the selected documents. (p. 7-63) 4 [Application] Edit the selected document on a page-basis or register overlay images. (p. 7-69) 5 [Save Document] Select this tab to display the Save Document screen. The Use/File settings you have configured are canceled. 6 − Displays the number and name of the specified User Box. 7 − Displays a list of the documents saved in the User Box. 8 [ ][ ] If the specified User Box contains seven or more documents, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up or down the list. 9 [Select All] Press this button to select all documents in the specified User Box. 10 [Reset] Press this button to reset all documents in the User Box. 11 [Detail View]/[Thumbnail View] Press this button to switch the display format of saved documents. [Thumbnail View]: A reduced image of the first page, number of pages, and document name of each document are displayed. [Detail View]: The time stored, user name, and document name of each document are displayed. Every time you press the [Time Stored] column header, the documents are sorted in ascending or descending order of the time stored alternately. 12 Print Settings/Transmission Settings/ Filing Settings/ Application Settings Configurable items for the selected tab are displayed. 13 [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the document. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-5 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box If a password is specified for a User Box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password, and press [OK]. 7 Print 7-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.2 7.2 Print 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab Description of the Print tab Select the [Print] tab to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Print] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Print Press [Print] to display the following screen. In the Print screen, the two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, the document print setting function is not available. (p. 7-7) 2 [Combine] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-8) 2 1 No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 1 2 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-7 7.2 Print 7 Combine Press [Combine], and then configure Combine settings to display the following screen. In the Combine screen, two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. 7.2.2 Print In the Print - Print Details screen, configure or change the following functions. Reference - Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed. - The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. No. Name Description No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Color] Configure color settings to print documents. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or Fold/Bind. [Combine] Configure settings to print multiple (2, 4, or 8) pages on one page when printing a multi-page document. Specify the number of sheets per page and the combination order. [Zoom] Configure settings to enlarge or reduce an image when printing documents. Select the magnification. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] Configure settings to insert a cover sheet, insert sheets between selected pages, or insert sheets for separating chapters. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. 7 Print 7-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.2 7.2.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Combine] to display the document order selection screen. Documents will be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. If a document has a watermark at the head, the same watermark is also printed for the second and subsequent documents. If a document does not have a watermark at the head, no watermark is printed even when it is specified for some of the second and subsequent documents. Configurable items to combine and print documents In the Combine - Print Details screen, configure or change the settings for the following functions. Reference - Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed. - The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher. - When combining and printing document, you cannot select the Sort, or Group function. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Color] Configure color settings to print documents. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or Fold/Bind. [Continuous Print] Configure this item when [2-Sided] is selected in [Print]. Specify whether, after printing an odd-page document, to print the first page of the next document on the back side of the last page of the first document. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.3.1 Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable range is 1 to 9999. Reference - To reset the setting to 1, press the [C] key on the control panel. 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether to print one side or both sides of sheets of paper. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.3 7.3.3 Color Configure color settings to print documents. Reference - [Full Color]: Prints a document in full color. – You can print documents saved in this machine in full color even if they are saved in black and white. - [Black]: Prints a document in black and white. - [Use Existing Color Setting]: Prints a document with the color settings used when it was saved. 7.3.4 Finishing Configure sorting, grouping, finishing and other settings. dReference When the finisher is installed, you can change the ejection method in Administrator Settings. For the Offset function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-11 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Sort/Group Selecting Sort feeds copies by set. Selecting Group feeds copies by page. Offset Select Yes to sort sheets by set or page so that the user knows where the document is separated. When the finisher is installed, the printed sheets are fed while shifting them for each separation. When the finisher is not installed, the printed sheets are fed while alternately sorting them. Staple Printed sheets are stapled at a corner or two points. Staple - Position Setting If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. The following screen shows an example of [2 Position]. Punch Printed sheets are punched for filing. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.3 Punch - Position Setting Specify hole positions. Fold/Bind Configure the following settings when a finisher is installed. Item Description [Half-Fold] Folds printed sheets of paper before being fed. [Center Staple & Fold] Staples printed sheets of paper at two center points and folds them in two before being fed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-13 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Select the desired function. 7.3.5 Combine A multi-page original is combined and printed on one page. Item Description [2in1] Combines a 2-page original into one page. [4in1] Combines a 4-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. [8in1] Combines An 8-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.3 7.3.6 Zoom The images can be enlarged or reduced when they are printed. Specify the magnification. Reference - Regardless of the Use Existing Color Setting or Original Type setting, you can print documents saved in A4 v size in enlarged A3 w size. To rotate and enlarge the image as shown in the example, you must previously set [Enlargement Rotation] to [Allow] in the Utility menu. For details on the enlargement rotation, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Existing Setting] Prints A document with the magnification that was specified when it was saved. [Manual] Specify the magnification between 25.0% and 400.0% on a 0.1% basis. Use the keypad to directly enter the magnification. [Full Size] Prints a document with the size specified when it was saved, without being enlarged or reduced. [Minimal] Reduces a document slightly to leave margin around the image. [+][-] Press this button to adjust the zoom ratio of the image on a 0.1% basis. [Fixed Zoom] Specify the fixed magnification that is preset in this machine. This setting is useful when enlarging or reducing documents to a standard size. [User Preset Zoom] In addition to fixed magnifications, preset frequently used magnifications in advance and use them later. • You can preset up to three magnifications. dReference For details on presetting magnifications, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-15 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3.7 Continuous Print You can select this setting if you have selected 2-Sided printing when combining and printing documents. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined and printed. When printing in 2-Sided mode, select whether, if printing a document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. Reference - [Yes]: The next document is printed continuously from the back side of the last page of the previous document. - [No]: The next document is printed from the front side of a new sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.4.1 Page Margin The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. It can assure a punching or stapling space. Page Margin Image Shift When a page margin is created, the image can be shifted according the position of the margin. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. Item Description [Margin Position] Select the margin position. [Auto Zoom]: A page margin position along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or less. A page margin is created along the short side of the paper if the original length exceeds 11-11/16 inches (297 mm). [Top]: Select this setting to position a margin on the top. [Left]: Select this setting to position a margin on the left. [Right]: Select this setting to position a margin on the right. [Adjust Value] Specify the width of a page margin between 1/16 and 3/4 inches (0.1 and 20.0 mm). To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [None]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-17 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Image Shift - Change Back Shift To create a page margin in 2-Sided printing mode, press [Change Back Shift] to specify the image shift length on the back side. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert You can configure the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet, or Chapters function. Item Description [Cover Sheet] Prints documents with front and back covers. [Insert Sheet] Inserts colored sheets or other type of paper before the specified pages when documents are printed. [Chapters] Configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet Documents are printed with front and back covers. The available setting items are as follows. The following shows the front and back cover settings. Item Description [Front Cover]/ [Back Cover] Configure settings for front and back covers. For details, refer to the table below. [Paper] Select a paper tray in the following cases. • When [Front (Copy)] or [Front (Blank)] is selected for [Front Cover] • When [Back (Copy)] or [Back (Blank)] is selected for [Back Cover] Item Description Front Cover None A front cover is not attached to a document. Front (Copy) The first page of a document is printed on the front cover sheet. The second page is printed on the back side of the front cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Front (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted before the first page of a document. Back Cover None A back cover is not attached to a document. Back (Copy) The last page of a document is printed on the back cover sheet. The last two pages are printed on the front and back sides of the back cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Back (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted after the last page of a document. ABC COVERABC bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-19 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Load the front and back cover sheets in the tray in advance. - To add cover sheet setting when printing the document that you copied and saved in a User Box, either one of the following conditions must have been satisfied when you saved the document. – A paper tray was specified – Cover Sheets were configured 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet Colored sheets or other type of paper are inserted before the specified pages when documents are printed. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. Select [Copy] or [Blank] in Insert Type. Configure the setting as follows depending on whether you select 1- Sided or 2-Sided printing. Example: When page "6" is specified Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify a page you want to insert a sheet into. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Insert Paper] Select a tray to load the sheets to be inserted. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. [Insert Type] Specify whether to print a document on the inserted sheets (Copy) or leave them blank (Blank). For details, refer to the table below. Item Description [Copy] (when 1- Sided is selected) A sheet is inserted as the sixth sheet and the sixth page of the document is printed on that sheet. [Copy] (when 2- Sided is selected) The back side of the third sheet is left blank. A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet and the sixth and seventh pages of the document are printed on that sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-20 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters You can configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. [Blank] (when 1- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted after the sixth page. [Blank] (when 2- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet. When you specify an odd pages, the back side of the inserted sheet is left blank. Item Description Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify front-sided pages. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Chapter Paper] To copy document data on chapter sheets, select [Copy Insert] and select a chapter paper tray. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-21 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition In Stamp/Composition screen, you can configure the following functions. 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. Item Description [Date/Time] The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. [Page Number] A page number is printed on all pages of a document. [Stamp] A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. [Copy Protect] Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Copy Guard] A stamp is printed on all pages as a copy guard. [Password Copy] A document is printed with an embedded password on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Stamp Repeat] Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. [Header/Footer] A header or footer is printed on pages. • This item is not displayed when the header or footer is not registered. dReference For details on how to register a header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] or [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. [Registered Overlay] A registered image is overlaid on printed pages. • This item is not displayed when no overlay image is registered. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Date Format] Select the format for the date. [Time Format] Specify whether to add the time, and select the format to display the time. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • Text Color: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • Text Size: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • Text Type: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-22 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number The page number is printed on all pages of the document. Settings Item Description [Starting Page Number] Specify the starting page number. [Starting Chapter Number] Specify the starting chapter number. [Page Number Type] Select the format to display a page number. [Insert Sheet Setting] Specify whether to print a page number on an inserted sheet. For the available settings, refer to page 7-23. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-23 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Insert Sheet Setting Specify whether to print a page number on inserted sheets. 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Cover Sheet] [Print on Front and Back Cover] A page number is printed on the front and back covers. [Print on Back Cover only] A page number is not printed on the front cover. [Do not print Page Number] A page number is printed on neither the front cover nor the back cover. [Insert Sheet (Copy)] [Print Page #] A page number is printed on inserted copy sheets. [Do Not Print #] A page number is not printed on inserted copy sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted copy sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. [Insert (Blank)] [Do Not Print #] Page numbers are not printed on inserted blank sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted blank sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. Pages Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-24 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Configure the setting for the copy protect to be applied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Copy Protect screen, you can configure the following settings. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Text Color] Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). Item Description Item Description [Copy Protect Type] Select a type of copy protect to be printed. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify the color, density, and text size of copy protect to be printed. [Position] Press this button to specify the angle and printing order of copy protect to be printed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-25 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Copy Protect Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, background pattern, and other items. Position In the Copy Protect setting screen, press [Position] to specify the print position by angling the selected stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the copy protect within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/-45 degrees) - Inserting a space between copy protects - Reordering printing order of copy protect - Deleting the copy protect or space Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Copy Protect Pattern] Select the pattern and contrast to be applied when the copy is reproduced. Select the patter from Emboss Text or Emboss Background. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from Front (Overwrite) or Back. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select a copy protect to be changed, and then press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete]. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-26 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard To prevent unauthorized copying, this function prints a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper as a copy guard (copy inhibit information) when printing. A page with a copy guard printed on it cannot be copied or saved in a User Box. Configure the setting for the copy guard to be applied. You can apply up to 6 copy guards. For Copy Guard, you can configure the following settings. Copy Guard Type Item Description [Copy Guard Type] Select a type of copy guard. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected copy guard. REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-27 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy To prevent unauthorized copying, this function configures stamp settings for a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper, and prints with an embedded password. When a sheet of paper with an embedded password is copied, scanned, or saved in a User Box, the currently running job is suspended, and the password entry screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password to carry out the desired operation. To enable Password Copy, select [Yes], and press [Password] to specify the password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice in the control panel. If a password is specified, you can configure a stamp. You can apply up to 6 stamps. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Copy Guard Pattern] Specify the contrast of a copy guard. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Type] Select the type of stamps. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected stamp. Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-28 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 Stamp Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. Copy Protect stamps are used to prevent recopying. However, Stamp Repeat stamps can be recopied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Stamp Repeat screen, you can configure the following settings. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Password Copy Pattern] Specify the contrast of a pattern. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Repeat Type] Select a type of stamp repeat to be printed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-29 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Repeat Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, and other items. Position In the Stamp Repeat setting screen, press [Position] to determine the print position of the stamp, for example, by angling the stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the stamp repeat within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/45 degrees) - Inserting a space between stamp repeats - Reordering printing order of stamp repeat - Deleting the stamp repeat or space [Detail Settings] Specify the color, density, and text size of stamp repeat to be printed. [Position] Select the angle or printing order of stamp repeat to be printed. Item Description Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from [Front (Overwrite)], [Transparent], or [Back]. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select Stamp Repeat to be changed, and press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete] to specify. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-30 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer Configure settings to insert the header or footer. To insert the header or footer, you must register their contents in Administrator Settings in advance. Press Check/Change Temporarily to temporarily change and print the contents of the registered header and footer. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Check/Change Temporarily In the Header/Footer setting screen, press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered header or footer. Item Description [Recall Header/ Footer] Select the desired ones from the registered headers and footers. [Check/Change Temporarily] Press this button to check or change the selected header or footer. For details, refer to page 7-30. [Reset] Press this button to cancel the use of the temporarily changed header or footer. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-31 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay Settings A registered image is overlaid and printed on the specified pages. Select [Yes] to use an overlay image. Reference - Overlay images can be registered in Copy mode as well as in User Box mode. An overlay image that was registered in Copy mode can be used for printing a document in the User Box. An overlay image that was registered from an image in the User Box can be used in Copy mode. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Header Settings], [Footer Settings] Specify whether to print the header and footer. Press [Print] to configure the following setting. • [Text]: Specify a header or footer text in the touch panel. • [Date/Time]: Configure the date and time settings for the header or footer. • [Other]: Configure setting to add the distribution control number, job number, or serial number to the header or footer. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. [Pages] Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or the first page only. [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. Item Description [Recall Overlay Image] Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. For details, refer to page 7-32. [Pages] Select whether to print the selected overlay image on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-32 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.4 Overlay Setting Select an overlay image and configure it settings. You can also preview the image. Reference - The following shows three methods for composing an overlay. – [Transparent]: Increases the brightness of the overlay image to be superimposed. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. – [Background Composition (Original)]: Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. – [Back]: Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Item Description [Thumbnail View]/[Display Name] In the thumb-nail view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify how to compose an overlay image. • [Density]: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). • [Color]: Select the color of overlay image from full color, black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Composition]: Select Transparent, Background Composition (Original) or Back to specify how to compose an overlay image. [Image Details] Press this button to check the details of the overlay image including the preview image, size, and color. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-33 7.5 Send 7 7.5 Send 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings You can use the following functions to send a document saved in a User Box. Using these functions enables you to easily send data by only registering destinations in this machine without transferring data via computers. Description of the Send tab Press [Send] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Transmission Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Fax Sends document data by fax. E-mail Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail. Internet Fax Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail via an intranet or Internet. IP Address Fax Sends document data to the destination specified with the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. PC (SMB) Sends document data to the shared folder in the specified computer. FTP Sends document data to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Sends document data to the specified server via network. No. Item Description 1 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, [Document Settings] and [Application] are not available. (p. 7-35) 2 [Bind TX] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-36) 1 2 7 Send 7-34 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.5 Send Press [Send] to display the following screen. You can configure transmission destination and additional functions. Bind TX Press [Bind TX] to display the following screen after specifying the bind order. Some destination types or function are not displayed since multiple documents are sent. No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-35 7.5 Send 7 7.5.2 Transmission Settings Press [Send] to specify destinations and functions that can be added when transmitting documents. Reference - [Direct Input] is not displayed when Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings. No. Item Description 1 [Address Book] Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-registered destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press this button to directly enter unregistered destinations. 3 [Job History] Select the recipients from the transmission log. 4 [Address Search] Press this button to search for the registered address when the LDAP server is used. 5 [Group] Press this button to list the registered group addresses. 6 [Search] Press this button to search the address book for destination. 7 [Document Settings] Press this button to specify the resolution, file type, or color when sending a document. 8 [Communication Settings] Press this button to configure communication settings. 9 [Application] Press this button to specify additional functions such as Stamp or Page Print. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 7 Send 7-36 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.5 7.5.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Bind TX] to display the binding order selection screen. Documents will be sent in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.6.1 Address Book - Search Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered destinations. Address Type Press this button to search for the destination by address type that was specified when the destination is registered. dReference For details on the [Default Address Book] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The [Search] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. No. Item Description 1 [Address Type] Registers addresses by registered type. 1 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-38 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 Index The Index screen appears by index that was specified when they were registered. The [Index] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. Detail Search Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Address], and enter an index. No. Item Description 1 [Index] Displays addresses by registered index. 1 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-39 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Search - Search options In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the additional search conditions, and press [OK]. Reference - To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use [Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.2 Direct Input Directly enter an unregistered destination as a recipient. Reference - When Manual Destination Input is set to Individual Management in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings, Direct Input is not available except for Fax. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-40 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: You are prompted to enter the fax number again after pressing [OK]. Enter the fax number, and press [Start]. Reference - [Next Destination] can be selected on the second input screen. dReference For details on the Confirm Address (TX) function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-41 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Receiver RX Ability Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. You can select multiple receivable settings. Item Description [Compression Type] Select JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH. [Paper Size] Select A3, B4 or A4. [Resolution] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or 200e100 dpi (Standard). 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-42 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax Enter the IP Address Fax destination. 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) Directly enter the PC (SMB) address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Item Description [Address] Enter the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. [Port Number] Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535). [Destination Machine Type] Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing. [Next Destination] Press this button to continuously specify another destination. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-43 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference Check the folder information on the destination computer. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP Directly enter the FTP address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Press [Anonymous] to enter "anonymous". Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [PASV] Specify whether to use the PASV mode. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-44 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV Directly enter the WebDAV destination. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. [SSL Settings] Specify whether to use SSL for sending. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-45 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.10 Job History Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select destinations from this history. 7.6.11 Address Search The [Address Search] tab is displayed when the LDAP server is configured in Administrator Settings. Reference - For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - Enabling LDAP. - The display position of [Address Search] tab varies depending on user settings. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-46 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for the destination address in the specified LDAP server. 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search Specify multiple search conditions to search for the target address. Name Enter the name in the touch panel. E-mail Addr. Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Fax Number Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Last Name Enter the last name in the touch panel. First Name Enter the first name in the touch panel. City Enter the city name in the touch panel. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-47 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Company Name Enter the company name in the touch panel. Department Enter the department in the touch panel. OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH. When not specifying any conditions, press [No]. 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings Configure document settings such as the resolution or file type. 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution for sending faxes. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-48 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type Specify the file type of data being transmitted. File Type The available file types are as follows. Reference - JPEG cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. - If you select JPEG, [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. - You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-49 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in [Encryption]. Item Description [Encryption Level] Select the encryption level. [Password] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-50 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-51 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Composition Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition. Outline PDF Outline PDF can be selected when Compact PDF is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It can also be edited using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Image] Select this setting to insert the text as an image. [Text] Select this setting to insert the text as text. • The date, time, page number, header, or footer is composed as text. • The stamp is composed as an image. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-52 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 Scan Setting Specify a collection of data. 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color Configure color settings to send documents. Data that has been saved using this machine contains the full color data even if it is saved in gray scale or black and white; therefore, it can be changed to full color when it is sent. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. - A document that has been saved in gray scale or black and white using a different machine does not contain the full color data; therefore, it cannot be changed to full color when it is sent. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with the JPEG file type. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. • [Page Separation] cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. Item Description [Use Existing Color Setting] Sends documents with the color setting used when they were saved. [Full Color] Sends documents in full color. [Gray Scale] Sends documents in gray scale. [Black] Sends documents in black and white. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-53 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings Configure communication lines, digital signature, and other communication settings. 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting Description of Line Settings Configure line settings for fax transmission. Overseas TX Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling TX – Polling RX – Bulletin board 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-54 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 ECM OFF The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON. Reference - This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified. - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – V.34 OFF – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception V.34 OFF V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions. In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send data. After sending has been completed, this machine automatically returns to the V34 mode. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception – ECM OFF Check Dest. & Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error. Reference - To use the Check Dest. & Send, you must register the local fax number in the remote machine in advance. Select Line You can specify [Line 1] or [Line 2] for sending data when two optional Fax Kit are installed. Specify the line used for transmission. If you select [Not Set], either Line 1 or Line 2 whichever is not busy is used for transmission. If both lines are idle, Line 1 is used first. Reference - You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings]. For details on the Multi Line Usage function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not Set], a sending failure may occur. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-55 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings E-mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in the [File Document] screen. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can enter up to 30 characters. Subject The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 64 characters. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-56 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 From Displays the E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu. Reference - The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing. - You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings]. For details on the [Change the "From" Address] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Body The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 256 characters. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-57 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting URL Notification Use the URL Notification function to specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job and data location. The URL contains information for linking to a User Box. Click the link in the text to directly move to the User Box screen. Reference - A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified for the destination in URL Notification Setting. - URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails or faxes. - If the authentication mode or User Box password is enabled, the password input screen corresponding to each respective authentication status appears. On completion of all authentication processing, the User Box screen appears. Detail Search You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index. Direct Input Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-58 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings Specify how to send or receive data. Timer transmission (Timer TX) Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time. Reference - It is specified in hours and minutes. - You cannot specify the date. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-59 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Password transmission (Password TX) Use this function to send a document by attaching a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network reception. Reference - You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network reception (with password) function. - Use the keypad to enter the password. F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB address and the password. F-Code TX can be used for the confidential transmission and relay transmission functions. Reference - To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function. Item Description Confidential TX Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box. Relay TX Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the SUB Address box and the password in the Password box. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-60 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this machine. Reference - You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depending on the S/MIME communication settings. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from the sender name list. Reference - To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-61 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings Configure the other settings (Stamp/Composition, and Send & Print) that are available for sending documents. 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-30. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-62 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.6 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also configure print settings. Item Description [Copies:] Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. [Simplex/Duplex] Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. [Staple] Select whether to staple the printed sheets. [Staple - Position Setting] If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings You can rename or delete documents saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box so that the documents in the box are organized. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Filing Settings tab Press [Filing Settings] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Filing Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Delete Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed or sent. Edit Name Renames a saved document. Move Moves the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Copy Copies the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Save in external memory Saves a document from a User Box into the external memory, which is connected to this machine. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Delete] Deletes the selected document. 2 [Edit Name] Renames the selected document. 3 [Move] Configure settings to move the selected document. 4 [Copy] Configure settings to copy the selected document. 5 [Save to External Memory.] Saves the selected document in the external memory. 2 3 4 5 1 Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-64 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.7 7.7.2 Deleting documents You can delete unnecessary files, for example the files you have already printed. You can select multiple files and delete them at the same time. After checking document details, press [Delete]. 7.7.3 Edit Name Renames a saved document. Enter a new name in the touch panel. Reference - The new document name will be used as the file name when it is set. Note that when you rename the document that you plan to send, consider the naming and other conditions forced by the destination server. - If necessary, you can rename the document just before you send it. 7.7.4 Moving documents Move a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-65 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.5 Copy Copy the data of a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public , Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. 7.7.6 Save in external memory You can save a document stored in a User Box to the external memory. Pressing [Document Settings], to configure the settings of a document to be saved. Reference - For information on the external memory, refer to page 7-98. - Multiple documents can be saved collectively. - A document cannot be renamed while it is being saved. Before saving a document, change the file name as appropriate. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-66 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.7 Document Settings You can specify the resolution, file type, and color of the document to be saved. If you select multiple documents, settings are reflected in all documents. Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution of the document to be saved. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-67 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 Document Settings -File Type When specifying the file type, select [Yes]. The available setting items are as follows. Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52. Item Description [File Type] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Encryption] If the PDF or Compact PDF is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. For details, refer to page 7-49. [Outline PDF] Configure this item when you select Compact PDF for the file type. For details, refer to page 7-51. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-68 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.7 7.7.7 Document Details Check the details of a saved document in the touch panel. Displaying detailed information Select a document, and press [Document Details] to check. The following information is displayed. Preview In the Document Details screen, press [Preview] to check the preview image of the saved document. You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. Item Description [Registered Time] Displays the date and time the document was registered. [User Name] Displays the user name or mode (SCAN, COPY, or PRINT) by which the document was registered. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [No. of Pages] Displays the number of pages in the document. [Job No.] Displays the job number when the document was registered. [ ][ ] If multiple documents are selected, use [ ] or [ ] to switch them. [Preview] Press this button to change to the Preview screen. For details, refer to page 7-68. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-69 7.8 Application 7 7.8 Application 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings You can edit a document saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box by changing the order of or delete pages in the document. You can also register the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Application tab Press [Application] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Application Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Edit Document Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. Register Overlay Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Edit Document] Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. 2 [Register Overlay] Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. 1 2 7 Application 7-70 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 7.8.2 Edit Document Select a document and press [Edit Document]. The Edit Document screen is displayed. To view the image of a document page before editing it, press the [Preview /Set Range]. For details, refer to page 7-75. Edit Document - Delete Page You can delete a specific page from a saved document. For example, you can delete blank pages to reduce the amount of data. 0 If you delete the only page of a document, the whole document will be deleted. 0 You will be unable to undo the deletion or restore the deleted pages because they are overwritten when they are deleted. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 1 Select a page to be deleted, and then press [Delete Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. 2 Check that the specified page has been deleted from the screen. % At this time, the specified page is not deleted from document data. % In this example, the specified pages (pages 1, 3, and 4) have been deleted. 3 To completely delete the pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % To cancel the deletion, press [Cancel] to return to the Application screen. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-71 7.8 Application 7 4 Check the information of the displayed screen. To delete the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the deletion, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are deleted and the document is saved. Edit Document - Rotate Page You can rotate the specified pages in a saved document. When a double-sided original has been scanned, the top and bottom may be reversed page by page or the orientation may be different depending on the original orientation. In this case, you can rotate selected pages so that the whole document will be viewed more easily. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are rotated. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 1 Select a page to be rotated, and then press [Rotate Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. The preview images of the selected pages are displayed together with the rotation setting screen. 7 Application 7-72 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 2 While checking the preview image, select the rotation angle. % You can select a rotation angle from left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. % In this example, [Left 90°] is selected. 3 Press [OK]. 4 If you are sure to rotate the selected pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % In the example, the specified pages (pages 1 and 2) have been rotated. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To rotate the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the rotation, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are rotated and the document is saved. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-73 7.8 Application 7 Edit Document - Move Page You can change the order of the pages within a saved document by moving the specified pages. 0 You cannot rotate the only page of a document. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are moved. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 0 You can directly enter the page number you want the selected page move to. This is useful when a document consists of many pages. For details, refer to page 7-75. 1 Select a page to be moved, and then press [Move Page]. % Only one page can be moved at a time. To move two or more pages, repeat the above steps for each of the pages you want to move. % The example demonstrates how to move page 6 to between pages 2 and 3. The destination setting screen is displayed. 2 While checking the screen, select the moving position. % To move the selected page to the beginning of the document, press [Top]. % To move the selected page to the end of the document, press [Last Page]. % To move the selected page to between pages, press between them. 3 Press [OK]. 7 Application 7-74 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 4 If you are sure to move the selected page, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To move the page, select [Save]. % To cancel the movement, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected page is moved and the document is saved. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-75 7.8 Application 7 Preview/Set Range You can specify a range of pages and check preview images when the selected document consists of multiple pages. You can also change the display size. Preview/Specify by Input This item is displayed when [Move Page] is selected. When too many pages are saved, specify the destination page by entering the page number. The following shows a procedure to specify the destination of the move operation. 1 In the Move Page screen, press [Preview]. The Preview/Specify by Input screen is displayed. Item Description [ Prev. Page] Moves to the previous page. [Next Page ] Press this button to move to the next page. [Zoom] You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. [Set Page Range] Specify the range of pages to be checked. Use the keypad to enter a number in [From:] and [To:] respectively. Then press [Display Page] to preview the specified starting or ending page. To set [From:] or [To:] to the page being previewed, select the button and then press [Match Display]. 7 Application 7-76 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 2 Display the previous or next page of the destination. % Press [ Prev. Page] or [Next Page ], or use the keypad to enter a page number and press [View]. % You can use [Zoom] to view the selected pages at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. 3 Specify the insertion position. % To move before the displayed page, press [Before]. % To move after the displayed page, press [After]. 4 Press [OK]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-77 7.8 Application 7 7.8.3 Register Overlay Register a document saved in a User Box as an overlay image. You can overlay the selected image to a printed document using [Stamp/Composition] in the Print tab. This function is useful when you want to print the images (such as company or product logos) that are not provided by this machine (stamps and page numbers are those provided by this machine). Reference - You can register up to 100 overlay images. - When you select a multi-page document, the first page is registered as an overlay image. 7 Application 7-78 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 Register Overlay - New Register a new overlay image. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press an unregistered image button and press [New]. 3 Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered, and press [OK]. % You can enter up to 16 characters. 4 Press [Start]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-79 7.8 Application 7 Register Overlay - Overwrite You can overwrite the registered overlay image with new one. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press the image button to be overwritten, and press [Overwrite]. 3 Check the displayed message, and press [Overwrite]. 4 Press [Start]. The overlay image is overwritten. 7 Application 7-80 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.8 Detail Settings Configure the density or color of the newly registered or overwritten overlay image. % Select the button of a target overlay image, and press [Detail Settings]. After configuring settings, press [OK]. Item Description [Density] Specify the density of the image. Use the keypad to enter the density using a value between 20 and 100%. [Color] Specify the color of the overlay image. [Full Color]: Prints a document in full color. [Black]: Prints a document in black and white. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes The Bulletin Board User Box is used to register a browsing document. A document registered in the Bulletin Board User Box is sent by the polling transmission function when a polling request is issued from the remote machine. 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen Select the [Bulletin Board User Box] in the [System] tab to display registered Bulletin Board User Boxes. Select the Bulletin Board User Box that contains the document registered in this machine. 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box You can save only one document in one Bulletin Board User Box. To register a new document in the Bulletin Board User Box, delete the existing document, and send a new document to the Bulletin Board User Box. To delete the document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. 7 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7-82 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.10 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes The Polling TX User Box is used to save a document to be sent in response to a request from a receiver. The process of saving a specific document in the Polling TX User Box is called polling transmission. 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box You can print a document saved in the Polling TX User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - You can register a document in the Polling TX User Box as an overlay image. For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box You can save only one document in the Polling TX User Box. To register a new document in the Polling TX User Box, delete the existing document, and perform polling transmission of a new document. To delete the document saved in the Polling TX User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. dReference For details on the polling transmission procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box The Secure Document User Box is used to save a document that was printed with the specified ID and password. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. The authentication procedure varies depending on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error setting in Administrator Settings - [Security Settings] - [Security Details]. For details, contact the administrator of this machine. dReference For details on how to save a secure document, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 1] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 2] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. Reference - If [Mode 2] is selected, enter the password for each document even when the ID is the same. This is because you need to select the document first before entering the password. Therefore, the security level in this mode is higher than mode 1. Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document Enter the password of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and configure print settings Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and enter the password of the secure document 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-84 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.11 7.11.4 Print - Printing You can add some functions to a document saved in the Secure Document User Box when printing the document. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Combine For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-13. Zoom For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-17. Stamp/Composition For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-85 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11.5 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Secure Document User Box. Reference - To delete all documents in the Secure Document User Box at a time, select [User Box Settings] - [Delete Secure Print Documents] in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-20. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. 7 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7-86 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.12 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box The Memory RX User Box is used to save a received document in the memory and print it as required. When memory reception is enabled, a received document is automatically saved in the Memory RX User Box. To check a document saved in the Memory RX User Box, select [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and then enter the password that was specified when memory reception was enabled. dReference For details on how to specify the password for memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.12.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. After the specified document has been printed, data is deleted automatically. 7.12.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Memory RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-87 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box Annotation User Boxes are used to automatically assign a number to a saved documents and add the number when printing or sending the document. You can pre-register the number to be assigned when creating the User Box and change it when printing or sending documents. For the functions you can configure when printing or sending documents, refer to page 7-9 and the sections that follow. Select [Annotation User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Annotation User Boxes are displayed. Reference - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. - For the types of numbers that can be printed in Annotation User Boxes, refer to page 7-90. - To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a document in the User Box, set Auto Document Delete Time to [Do Not Keep]. This is useful for managing the numbers that are added to the copied documents. Specify the Auto Document Delete Time when you create an Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. If you open a User Box, you can configure print and transmission settings. 7.13.2 Print - Basic For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-9. 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-88 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.13 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-18. 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-19. 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-20. 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.13.10 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. 7.13.11 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-31. 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-33. 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-40. 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB) For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-42. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-89 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-43. 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-44. 7.13.20 Send - Job History For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-45. 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-48. 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52. 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-55. 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-57. 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60. 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60. 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-90 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.13 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element Secondary Field Add text to a number to be printed. You can enter up to 20 characters. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time to be printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers to be printed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-91 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers to be printed. Print Position Select the printing position. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-92 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.13 7.13.35 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in an Annotation User Box. The available setting items are as follows. 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-93 7.14 Re-Transmission User Box (System User Box) 7 7.14 Re-Transmission User Box (System User Box) 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box The Fax Retransmit User Box is used to save a document, which was unable to be sent after the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter Settings because the remote machine was busy when sending the fax for a predetermined time period. With this User Box, you can print for conformation or resend a saved document later. Select [Re-Transmission User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Before you can save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must enable the Fax Retransmit User Box in the [Fax Settings] of Administrator Settings. For details on settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print Before retransmitting a saved document, you can print the document for conformation. Data is not deleted after being printed. Select a document to be printed, and press [Proof Print]. Check document information, and press [Start]. 7.14.3 Send - Fax Retransmit a saved document. Select a document, select the [Send] tab, and press [Fax]. Reference - You can specify a new destination when retransmitting a document. You can specify the new destination in Address Book, Direct Input, or Job History. - You can configure transmission settings when you retransmit a saved document. You can also configure line and fax header settings. For details, refer to page 7-53 and page 7-60. - After document sending has been completed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Re-Transmission User Box (System User Box) 7-94 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.14 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete Stop retransmission and delete the target document. Select a document, select the [Filing Settings] tab, and press [Delete]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-95 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box When you use PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print to print a PDF file that has been saved with a password configured, or you print an encrypt PDF data that has been saved in the external memory, the data is automatically saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box. Select [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Only password encrypted PDF data saved by the user who is logged in is displayed when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save Select a document to be printed or saved, and press [Print/Save]. When printing or saving a document, enter the password assigned to the PDF file. After printing or saving has been completed, documents in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box are deleted automatically. Reference - Whether to print or save is specified in the direct print instruction issued from your computer. You cannot change a print instruction to a save instruction or vice versa. 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete You can delete a saved document if it does not need to be printed. Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7-96 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.16 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box Viewing documents This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. A document saved in this User Box can be printed by the user of the document when the user is logged in to the machine. When you print a document from a computer over the network to this machine by entering the user name and password, the document is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. % Select [ID & Print User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - When there are documents saved in the ID & Print User Box, the following buttons are displayed in the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and press the desired button. – [Begin Printing]: Press this button to print documents saved in the ID & Print User Box without logging in to this machine. – [Print & Login]: Press this button to login to this machine and print the documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. – [Login]: Press this button to log in to this machine but not print the documents. After you are logged in, you can print or delete documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. - Documents can be saved in the ID & Print User Box even when user authentication is not enabled. In addition, jobs saved by public users can be saved in the ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to page 8-25. - After printing documents has been completed, the data in the ID & Print User Box is deleted automatically. A confirmation screen for confirming if you are sure to delete the data appears depending on the settings in Administrator Settings. dReference For details on how to print a document from a computer to the ID & Print User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7 7.16.2 Print - Print 1 Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. 2 Select whether to delete the document after printing. 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-98 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.17 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7.17.1 External memory device Supported external memory devices Requirements for external memory devices of this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory device that supports the USB (1.1/2.0) interface - FAT32-formatted memory device - Memory capacity of up to 2 GB is recommended. - The security function has not been added or the security function can be turned off. Reference - If the memory capacity exceeds 4 GB, the USB memory may not work when it is connected to this machine. - The USB memory cannot be used if it is recognized as multiple drives on the computer. Connecting the external memory device 0 Use the USB connector on the side that is near the control panel. Do not use the USB connector near the rear side because it is used for optional devices. 0 Do not disconnect the external memory device while saving a document in the external memory device or printing a document saved in the external memory device. 0 Do not use the USB device (hard disk or USB hub) other than the USB flash memory device. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory when the hourglass is being displayed in the control panel while this machine is active. 0 Do not disconnect the USB memory just after connecting it. % Connect the external memory device to the USB connector on the side of this machine. When the external memory device is connected, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen and the following screen is displayed. If you will immediately use the external memory, select the intended purpose. When not using the exert memory, select [Close]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Reference - The intended purpose of the external memory to be displayed varies depending on the administrator settings. 7.17.2 External memory screen When the external memory device is connected, select [External Memory] to display the folder structure. Entering a file path In the touch panel, you can specify the file path to the folder containing the document to be printed. Press [File Path], and enter the file path. Reference - Make sure that the total length of the file path and file name do not exceed 250 characters. If the number of characters exceeds the limit, the file list is not displayed. Selecting a file You can print the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS. Select a document of one of these types from the list. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. - Printing is not possible when printing is restricted by Security Settings of a PDF file. - This machine supports printing of PDF Version 1.6 or earlier. - Only the files of printable file types are displayed in the list. - File access fails when the total length of the file path and file name exceeds 250 characters. - Up to 200 printable files are displayed in the folder of the specified file path. If the folder contains 200 or more files, it may take time to display the file list screen. Printing encrypted PDF data To print the encrypted PDF data saved in the external memory device, select the data in the External Memory screen and print the data. When the print command is issued, the encrypted PDF data in the external memory is saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine. Access the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine, and then print the data. dReference For the Password Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to page 7-95. Moving to the parent folder To move to the parent folder, press [Up]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-100 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.17 Opening a folder To check the contents of a specific folder, press [Open]. Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. The Print Details screen is displayed. Document Details You can check the modification date, file name, and other properties of the selected document. 7.17.3 Print - Basic Press [Print] to display the following screen. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Color Specify whether to print the document in color or black and white. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Binding Position When you select 2-Sided in [Print], select the binding position. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-101 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. Paper Select a tray to load printing paper. 7.17.4 Print - Application Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-102 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.17 7.17.5 Filing Settings - Save in User Box This function saves a document stored in the external memory in a User Box. Specify the User Box and document name, and press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Item Description [User Box] Select the Public, Personal, or Group User Box to save data in. [Document Name] Specify the name of the document to be saved. • If you select multiple files, you cannot specify the document name. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-103 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) This function enables you to print a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA via a Bluetooth communication or to save such a document in a User Box. 7.18.1 Operating environment The cellular phones and PDAs that can be connected to this machine and the printable file must satisfy the following conditions. Reference - To print documents from a cellular phone or PDA, the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 is required. The settings for enabling a Bluetooth communication are also required. Contact your service representative in advance. - If you cannot access the link file when attempting to print an XHTML file, the document will either not be printed or will be printed in a black frame depending on the setting in [User Settings] − [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] − [Link File Error Notification]. - To access the link file for printing an XHTML file, [WebDAV Settings] of this machine is required. - To use a proxy for connection, register a proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Host Address], and set [User Settings] - [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] - [Proxy Server Use] to [ON]. - The communication speed may drop or communication may be interrupted due to obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Protected documents and image data may not be sent depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • For XHTML file types, the machine supports the character code of UTF-8/Shift- JIS/ISO-8859 and the link file extensions of JPEG/JPG/PNG. • This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-104 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print Reference - To save a file stored in a cellular phone or PDA in a User Box, or to print such a file, configure the appropriate setting in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to page 8-25. To use a Bluetooth communication, the Bluetooth setting must be enabled in this machine. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - When user authentication is specified on this machine, even a registered user cannot print a document unless printing from a cellular phone or PDA is allowed in the machine setting. For user authentication, contact the administrator of this machine. Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be printed. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. Check printing preferences You can check the overview of the settings to print the received data. dReference To configure print settings, select [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to page 8-12. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7-105 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be saved in a User Box. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-106 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 7.18 8 User Box Settings bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-3 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings The following shows the menus and items used to configure User Box settings in the Utility menu. 8.1.1 User mode First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-6) 1 [Public/Personal User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-7) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-9) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [User Settings] 2 [Custom Display Settings] 3 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-10) [Default Tab] [Shortcut Key 1] [Shortcut Key 2] [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] [Link File Error Notification] (p. 8-11) [Proxy Server Use] (p. 8-11) [Print] (p. 8-12) [Print] [Color] [Paper] [Finishing] [Page Margin] [Stamp/Composition] 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.1 8.1.2 Administrator Settings First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [System Settings] 0 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-20) 1 [Delete Unused User Box] (p. 8-20) 2 [Delete Secure Print Documents] (p. 8-20) 3 [Auto Delete Secure Document] (p. 8-21) 4 [Encrypted PDF Delete Time] (p. 8-21) 5 [ID & Print Delete Time] (p. 8-22) 6 [Document Hold Setting] (p. 8-22) 7 [External Memory Function Settings] (p. 8-23) [Save Document] [Print Document] [External Memory Document Scan] 8 [Allow/Restrict User Box] (p. 8-23) 9 [ID & Print Delete after Print Setting] (p. 8-24) 0 [Document Delete Time Setting] (p. 8-24) bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-5 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 3 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-16) 1 [Public/Personal User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] [Delete Empty User Box(es)] (p. 8-7) 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-7) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-9) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Annotation User Box] (p. 8-17) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Maximum Number of User Boxes] (p. 8-19) [Max. No. of Use Boxes] [Maximum Number of User Boxes] 4 [User Authentication/ Account Track] 2 [User Authentication Settings] 1 [Administrative Setting] [ID & Print Settings] (p. 8-25) 9 [System Connection] 5 [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] (p. 8-25) 0 [Security Settings] 2 [User Box Administrator Setting] (p. 8-26) 4 [Security Details] [Secure Print Only] (p. 8-27) 6 [HDD Settings] 1 [Check HDD Capacity] (p. 8-27) 2 [Overwrite HDD Data] (p. 8-28) [Overwrite Method] [Encryption Priority] [Overwrite Priority] 3 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-29) 4 [HDD Lock Password] (p. 8-30) 5 [Format HDD] (p. 8-31) 6 [HDD Encryption Setting] (p. 8-31) 8 [Stamp Settings] 1 [Apply Stamps] (p. 8-32) [Printing] [Sending] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 8 User mode settings 8-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.2 8.2 User mode settings 8.2.1 Creating a User Box Public, Personal, or Group User Box Create a Public, Personal, or Group User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Index] Select the index type. [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner screen. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-7 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (2/2) Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) Automatically searches for and deletes an empty User Box if the Public, Personal, or Group User Box is created in Administrator Settings. Press [Delete Empty User Box(es)] in the Create User Box screen. Bulletin Board User Box Create a Bulletin Board User Box. You can create up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • Depending on the settings in Administrator Settings, you may not be able to operate. [Confidential RX] This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Select whether to add the confidential RX function to a User Box. When adding the confidential RX function, enter the confidential RX password. • For confirmation, enter the confidential RX password again. 8 User mode settings 8-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.2 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-9 8.2 User mode settings 8 Relay User Box You can create up to five Relay User Boxes. The creation and editing setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Relay Destination] Select a relay destination to send data from the Relay User Box. Pre-register the relay destination as a group destination. • When registering a group destination as a relay destination, be sure to set Abbreviation Dial in the group destination in advance. [Relay TX Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Relay TX Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). 8 User mode settings 8-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.2 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting You can customize the User Box screen to fit your operating environment. Default Tab Specify the User Box page to be displayed after pressing User Box key on the control panel. Reference - [Public]: Displays the Public User Box page. - [Personal]: Displays the Personal User Box page when User Authentication is enabled. - [System]: Displays the System User Box page. - [Group]: Displays the Group User Box page when Account Track is enabled. Shortcut key This function enables you to add up to two shortcut keys in the area on the lower right of the page. It is available when registering the frequently used System User Box as a shortcut key. Reference - A shortcut key is displayed only in the User Box mode after pressing the [User Box] key. Switching to the Fax/Scan or Copy mode does not display the target User Box shortcut key. - If Shortcut Key 1 is configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-11 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification This function enables you to specify processing to be performed if you cannot access a link file when attempting to print an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [ON]) - [ON]: Prints a link file in a black frame. - [OFF]: Does not print a link file part. 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use This function enables you to specify whether to use a proxy server to access a link file when printing an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [OFF]) - [ON]: Uses a proxy server. - [OFF]: Does not use a proxy server. Reference - To use a proxy server for connection, register the desired proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Proxy Server Address]. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 8 User mode settings 8-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.2 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings When using a cellular phone or PDA to print a document through this machine, configure print settings. Basic - Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Basic - Color Select Full Color or Black. Basic - Paper Select the printing paper size if the sent data does not contain paper size information. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-13 8.2 User mode settings 8 Basic - Finishing Specify Fold/Bind, Staple, or Punch. Application - Margin Select the margin position. Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 8 User mode settings 8-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.2 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-15 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3 Administrator Settings 8.3.1 User Box permissions User types This machine is intended for users of various positions. The User Box function therefore provides [User Box Administrator] in addition to the administrator of this machine. The following shows the users and their available User Box types. Reference - To log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, execute the following steps when setting User Authentication. – Enter "boxadmin" in the User Name box. – Enter the password specified in page 8-26 in the Password box. Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box The following shows the available functions of the (1) Public User Box that can be accessed by all users and the (2) Personal or Group User Box that can be accessed only by specific users. *1 The registered users can handle only the User Boxes that were created by them. *2 The User Box administrator and administrator can handle User Boxes without entering the password even if it is specified for the User Boxes. Item Description Public user When user authentication is disabled, every user is logged in as a public user. Registered user User registered by the administrator when User Authentication is enabled. User Box administrator User who logs in as the User Box administrator when User Authentication is enabled. This user can access all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Administrator User who manages this machine. This user can create, change, or delete all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Function Create User Box Check, download, or delete a document Change User Box setting Delete User Box User Box type Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public user o − o − o − o − Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 User Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 8 Administrator Settings 8-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 8.3.2 Creating a User Box You can register a new User Box. The following describes the types of the User Boxes that can be registered. Reference - Disabling User Authentication or Account Track saves the User Box registered as a Personal or Group User Box as a Public User Box. The User Box name however remains unchanged. - When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, enter the ID and password when logging in to this machine. After this, be sure to press [Login] or the Access key in the control panel to complete authentication processing. If authentication is not completed, you cannot create a Personal or Group User Box. - When the optional Fax Kit is installed, you can configure confidential RX (F-Code TX) settings as the Public, Personal, or Group User Box extension function. For details on the confidential RX function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - When the setting for User Authentication is configured, you can specify a User Box administrator. A User Box administrator can access all Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes. Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box For details, refer to page 8-6. 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box For details, refer to page 8-7. 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box For details, refer to page 8-9. Item Description Public User Box Public User Box that can be accessed by everyone. Personal User Box Personal User Box that can be accessed by only the login user when User Authentication is enabled. Group User Box User Box that can be accessed by only the user in the login account when Account Track is enabled. Bulletin Board User Box User Box used to perform Bulletin Polling TX or RX with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Relay User Box User Box used to save relay data when using this machine as a relay distribution station to perform relay distribution with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Annotation User Box User Box used to print or send a saved document with the date/time or filing number image. Specify the type of the text to be added when using this User Box. When registering this User Box, specify the administrator mode. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-17 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box Create an Annotation User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/3) Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). 8 Administrator Settings 8-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 Page (2/3) Page (3/3) Item Description [Count Up] Select whether to count the annotation number by job or by page. [Secondary Field] Add text to the number to be printed (up to 20 characters). [Date/Time] Select the format to display the date and time to be printed. [Density] Select the density of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Number Type] Select the output format (number of digits) of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Print Position] Select the printing position. [Primary Field] Add any text (up to 40 characters). Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • To use a document to give an annotation only without saving or using it for copying, select [Do Not Keep]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-19 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created for each user. Public, Personal, or Group User Box Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. Max. No. of User Boxes To specify the maximum number of User Boxes, select [ON]. To not specify the limit and allow users to create an infinite number of User Boxes, select [OFF]. Maximum Number of User Boxes The allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes is 0 to 1000. Use the keypad to enter the maximum number of User Boxes, and press [Apply] to determine it. Reference - If the maximum number of User Boxes is set to "0", you cannot create new ones. - When the selected user already sets the number of User Boxes to 3, the allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes changes 3 to 1000. 8 Administrator Settings 8-20 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 8.3.8 User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box Delete a User Box with no document saved, as an unnecessary User Box. To delete a User Box, confirm the message that appears and select [Yes]. Delete Secure Print Documents This function deletes all documents saved in the Secure Document User Box. To delete the User Box, confirm the message and select [Yes]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-21 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Auto Delete Secure Document Specify the period from the date/time when a secure document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. Encrypted PDF Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when an encrypted PDF document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-22 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved from the ID & Print User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. Document Hold Setting Specify whether to save a document in a User Box when sending or printing it. Reference - When deleting a document after printing or sending, select [Yes]. To display a deletion confirmation screen when printing or sending, select [ON] on the deletion selection screen. - To delete a document after printing or sending the document, select [No]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-23 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 External Memory Function Settings Set the function of the external memory connected to this machine to ON or OFF. Reference - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. It is also set to OFF (not saved) in the user function setting when User Authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. Allow/Restrict User Box Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box. Reference - To enable the user to handle those functions, select [Allow]. - When not enabling the user to handle those functions, select [Prohibit]. Only the administrator can then create, edit, or delete a User Box. Item Description [Save Document] Select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) scanned documents or documents stored in a User Box to the external memory. [Print Document] Select whether to print (ON) or not print (OFF) documents saved in the external memory using the [Use/File] function. [External Memory Document Scan] Scan a document in the external memory and select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) it in a User Box. 8 Administrator Settings 8-24 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed. Reference - To check with the user whether to delete the target document, select [Confirm with User]. - To delete the target document without checking with the user after printing, select [Always Delete]. Document Delete Time Setting This function enables the administrator to specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or retrieved from a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically when the user cannot specify the document deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and sec the deletion time. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-25 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Settings Configure settings for ID & Print User Box. Reference - A public user job is printed or saved when public user printing is enabled. - A user-unauthorized job is printed or saved when Print without Authentication is enabled. - For details on printing by public users and Print without Authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Select whether to allow or restrict the function for using a cellular phone or PDA. Item Description [ID & Print] [ON]: Saves all the Normal Print and Authentication & Print jobs, which were requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. [OFF]: Saves the Authentication & Print job, which was requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. The Normal Print job is output without being saved in the User Box. [Public User] [Print Immediately]: Outputs a public user job or user-unauthorized job without saving it in the User Box. [Save]: Saves a public user job or user-unauthorized job in the ID & Print User Box. 8 Administrator Settings 8-26 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting The User Box administrator is available when User Authentication is enabled. If you log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, you can reference the contents of all the created User Boxes regardless of whether the password is specified. Setting User Box administrator To set a User Box administrator, select [Allow], and press [Password Setting] to register the User Box administrator's password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice. - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enable "Password Rules". For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator Enter the following items in the login screen. User name: boxadmin Password: Password determined in the User Box Administrator Setting screen Administrator's available functions The following functions are available when you log in as the User Box administrator. - Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box - Checking, downloading, or deleting documents saved in all User Boxes - Changing all User Box settings - Deleting all User Boxes bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-27 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.11 Security Details Security Print Only Use this setting to specify to enable only Secure Print when issuing the print command from the printer driver. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. 8.3.12 HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the HDD. 8 Administrator Settings 8-28 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 Overwrite HDD Data You can specify how to overwrite and delete HDD data. When image data saved in the HDD becomes unnecessary, this function overwrites meaningless data in all areas that contain the image data to destroy the original data. This function also destroys the non-image data structure to prevent a data leak when the installed HDD has been stolen. The available setting items are as follows. (Default: Mode 1) Reference - When changing Encryption Priority or Overwrite Priority setting, format the HDD after rebooting this machine. However, be careful that data is erased by formatting the HDD. - For the data erased by formatting the HDD, refer to page 8-31. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with letter "A" (0x61) Verified [Encryption Priority] Performs encryption processing at a higher security level. In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed unlike [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. Always specify [Encryption Priority]. [Overwrite Priority] In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed based on [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-29 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Overwrite All Data This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, and press [Delete]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - It takes approximately 40 minutes to execute Mode 1. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified 8 Administrator Settings 8-30 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 HDD Lock Password You can specify the password to lock the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified password carefully so that you will never forget it. Forgetting the password will require a large amount of recovery work. % Specify the password, and reboot this machine. The HDD password is specified. Reference - Enter the HDD password using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - If you have already specified the HDD password, [Change] and [Release] appears. You can change or release the HDD password. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8-31 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Format HDD This function formats the HDD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the PageScope Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the PageScope Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting HDD Encryption Setting You can configure HDD encryption setting. Specifying a 20-character encryption passphrase for the HDD prevents the user from easily reading the data saved in the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified encryption passphrase carefully so that you will never forget it. 0 The encryption passphrase setting must be configured by the administrator of this machine. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % Specify the encryption passphrase, and reboot this machine. The encryption passphrase setting then becomes available. Reference - Enter the encryption passphrase using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - Encryption passphrase setting becomes available after this machine has been rebooted. 8 Administrator Settings 8-32 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 8.3 8.3.13 Stamp Settings Apply Stamps This function applies the predetermined stamp to all documents to be output from this machine, ensuring security. Specify whether to apply a stamp when printing or sending. To apply stamps, select [Apply], and then configure settings for the stamp to be added continuously. Reference - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the printed data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Copy Security (Copy Protect, Copy Guard, Password Copy) – Stamp Repeat – Header/Footer – Registered Overlay - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the transmitted data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Header/Footer dReference For details on the stamp setting, refer to page 7-21. 9 PageScope Web Connection bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-3 9.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 9 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters. 9.1.1 Operating environment 9.1.2 Accessing PageScope Web Connection 0 Start the Web browser to access PageScope Web Connection. 0 If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 9-11. 0 For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 0 PageScope Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 9-9. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter]. http:/// Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20: - http://192.168.1.20/ When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used: - Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 address of the machine]/ Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16: - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - If IPv6 is set to "ON" while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the host name. The main menu or login page appears. Operating environment Network Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications on computer Web browser: • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) Adobe® Flash® Player: • Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format. • Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility (font/macro data management). 9 Using PageScope Web Connection 9-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.1 9.1.3 Web browser cache The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page displayed using PageScope Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser. Reference - Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help for the Web browser. - With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked, and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again. To avoid this problem, disable the cache function. For Internet Explorer 1 Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings]. 3 Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu. 2 In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache]. 3 In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time]. For Mozilla Firefox 1 Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section. 3 Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox] check box under [Settings], and then click [OK]. 9.1.4 Online help function After logging in to PageScope Web Connection, click ; you can display the online help for the currently configured function. Reference - To display the online help, connect your computer to the Internet. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-5 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2 Login and logout 9.2.1 Login and logout flows Accessing with PageScope Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and log in again. When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled You are automatically logged in as a public user. To log in as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.2 Login as an administrator again. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-7 9.2 Login and logout 9 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in. To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-8 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.2 9.2.2 Logout Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears. Click [OK] to return to the login page. Reference - The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine. - When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. - If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if authentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will automatically log out of the mode. - For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 9-39. Log in again. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-9 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2.3 Login PageScope Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or User Box administrator setting. Reference - You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. For details on the User Box administrator setting, permissions, and password, refer to the page 8-26. - Logging in to the user mode as an administrator enables you to perform job deletion processing, which is not available in the administrator. - In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Login options You can select items as required when logging in. Reference - If Flash is selected in View Mode, the following items are displayed using Flash. – Status icons and messages – Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information] – Status of [Job] Item Description Language Select the language to display information in. View Mode Select Flash or HTML. • To use the read-out software, select HTML. • In the IPv6 environment, select HTML. • To select Flash, prepare Flash Player. User Assist Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login. 9 Login and logout 9-10 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.2 Logging in as a public user If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page, select [Public User], and click [Login]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-11 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a registered user Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. % In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login]. Reference - If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password. - To select a user name from a list, click [User List]. - If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no longer be able to use the machine. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - [User List] is available only when User Name List is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 9 Login and logout 9-12 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.2 Logging in to administrator mode To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode. 1 Select [Administrator] and click [Login]. 2 Enter the administrator password in the page that appears, and then click [OK]. % To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. % Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be able to use it. % Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode. % If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. % The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-13 9.2 Login and logout 9 % You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. 9 Login and logout 9-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.2 Display mode in administrator mode In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. In either display mode, the available items are the same. In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display]. In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu. In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box. Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-15 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a User Box administrator You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. % In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login]. % To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter the User Box administrator's password. Reference - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. - You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. – [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. – [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. 9 Page Configuration 9-16 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.3 9.3 Page Configuration Logging in to PageScope Web Connection displays the page that is configured as shown below. This example shows the items in Information - Device Information. Reference - The contents of the PageScope Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or the settings of this machine. No. Item Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Click this logo to jump to the Konica Minolta Web site at the following URL. http://www.konicaminolta.com/ 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Click this logo to display the version information of PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click the user name to display the login user name. 4 Status display Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper Tray, or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable you to check the status. 5 Message display Displays the operating status of this machine. 3 4 5 6 12 7 8 9 1 2 10 11 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-17 9.3 Page Configuration 9 6 [To Login Screen]/ [Logout] Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. 7 [Change Password] Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in as a registered user. 8 Help You can display the online help for the currently configured function. For the specified pages, refer to "Online Assistance" in page 9-18. 9 Refresh Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page. 10 Icon Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons are displayed in the user mode. • Information • Job • User Box • Direct Print • Store Address • Customize 11 Menu Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected. 12 Information and settings Displays the details of the item selected in the menu. No. Item Description 9 User Mode Overview 9-18 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.4 9.4 User Mode Overview Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions. 9.4.1 Information dReference You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the PageScope Web Connection online help or PageScope Web Connection manual included in the application DVD-ROM. For details on the online help, refer to page 9-4. Item Description [Device Information] Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of this machine. [Online Assistance] Enables you to check the online assistance about this product. [Change User Password] Changes the password of the login user. [Function Permission Information] Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account. [Network Setting Information] Enables you to check the network settings of this machine. [Print Setting Information] Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine. [Print Information] Prints font or configuration information. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-19 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.2 Job 9.4.3 User Boxes dReference For details on how to handle User Boxes, refer to page 9-23. Item Description [Current Jobs] Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs. [Job History] Enables you to check the executed jobs. [Communication List] Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs. Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) to enable you to print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change the User Box setting. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. 9 User Mode Overview 9-20 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.4 9.4.4 Direct Print Reference - [Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. [Open System User Box] Displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. This function opens the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Memory RX, or Relay User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. [Create System User Box] Enables you to create a new Bulletin Board or Relay User Box. The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Item Description Item Description [Direct Print] Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary, you can select [Application Setting] to save a document in the specified User Box. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-21 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.5 Store Address [Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails. 9 User Mode Overview 9-22 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.4 9.4.6 Customize Enables you to specify the initial page after logging in. Item Description [Option] Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to this machine. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-23 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box The [Open User Box] menu supports the following functions. - Listing the documents saved in a User Box - Printing a document - Sending a document to another machine - Downloading and saving document data in your computer - Moving or copying a document to another User Box - Deleting a document 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box Logging in displays a list of the User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) created in the accessed MFP. Open User Box Select the target User Box name in the User Box list. Otherwise, enter the User Box number and password, and click [OK]. Reference - Selecting a User Box name with a password displays the password entry page. "Open User Box" is displayed as shown below depending on the User Authentication or Account Track settings. - [Open User Box(Public)]: Displayed when User Authentication is not enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group)]: Displayed when Account Track is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication and Account Track are enabled. Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the number of the User Box to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-24 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 File List Selecting a User Box displays its basic information and also lists the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Search from Index] Displays a list of User Boxes for each index, which was selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. [User Box List] Displays the User Box number, User Box name, User Box type, and creation date and time. A User Box with a password is displayed by a keyshaped icon. Item Description [User Box Settings] Click this button to change the User Box name, index, extension, or password setting. [Delete User Box] Click this button to delete the displayed User Box. • Deleting a User Box erases all the documents saved in the User Box. Thumbnail View To view a thumbnail image for each document, click [ON]. When you do not view thumbnail images, click [OFF]. Specify operation Select the target operation, for example, printing, moving, copying, or deleting a document, sending to another machine, or downloading to your computer. For details, refer to page 9-25. [Changes the display] Select the target operation, and click this button to display the "Select" check box for the document that can be handled by the target function. Select Displays a check box for the document that can be handled by the selected function. Thumbnail Displays the image of the first page when the thumbnail image display function is enabled. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-25 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 Reference - If 11 or more documents are saved, [Page (Display by 10 cases)] is displayed. 9.5.2 Printing a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Print], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for printable documents. Document Name Displays a document name. Number of Originals Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Click this button to rename a document. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-26 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Print Setting]. 3 Configure print settings. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-27 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], Basic Setting and Application Setting will become unavailable. % [Save Print Settings] is not displayed when multiple documents are selected. 4 Click [OK]. Printing starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the printing order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Combine] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function prints the selected documents as one. [Basic Setting] Configure the number of sets, 2-sided printing, color, and finishing settings. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Page Margin or Stamp. When using this function, click [Display]. [Save Print Settings] Select whether to save print setting. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-28 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Send to other device], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for documents that can be sent. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-29 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [TX Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-30 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 3 Configure send settings. Item Description [Specify destination] Click [Search from List] to select the destination in the address book. When checking the destination list, click [Check Destination]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-31 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], File Type, Communication Settings, or Application Setting will become unavailable. 4 Click [OK]. Sending starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Download to PC], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for available documents. [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the sending order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Bind TX] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function sends the selected documents as one. [File Type] Specify the file type and encryption contents for a file to be sent. [Communication Setting] Configure E-mail settings or specify the URL notification destination. When using this function, click [Display]. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Stamp or Send & Print. When using this function, click [Display]. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-32 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Download Setting]. 3 Configure settings. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-33 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 4 Click [OK]. 5 When [Preparation for download has been completed] has appeared, click [Download]. The File Download page appears. 6 Click [Save]. 7 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. 8 Click [Back]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function collects pages in the order in which they are displayed, and prints them as one document. If necessary, you can change that order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [File Format] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Page Range] Download all pages or specify the range of successive pages. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-34 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Move/Copy], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Move/Copy Setting]. % You cannot select multiple documents. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-35 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 3 Configure settings. 4 Click [OK]. This moves or copies the document. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.6 Deleting a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Delete], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. Item Description [User Box Number] Select the User Box to move or copy a document from the User Box List. [Copy] Select this check box to copy a document to the target User Box. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-36 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Delete]. % To select or unselect all documents, select the [Check/Uncheck] check box. 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and click [OK]. % When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. 4 Click [OK]. This deletes a document(s), and returns you to the File List page. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-37 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions. dReference For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. For details, refer to page 9-14. 9.6.1 Maintenance Item Description [Meter Count] Enables you to check the meter count of this machine. [ROM Version] Enables you to check the ROM version. [Import/Export] Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports) it from a file to this machine. [Status Notification Setting] Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has occurred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a registered user of an error. [Total Counter Notification Setting] Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and register the E-mail address of the destination. [Date/Time Setting] Specify the date and time displayed in this machine. [Timer Setting] Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine. [Network Error Code Display Setting] Specify whether to display the network error code. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-38 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.6 9.6.2 System Settings Reference - To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driver software KONICA MINOLTA TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together with this machine. [Reset] Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations. [License Settings] Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code can be issued. [Edit Font/Macro] Adds font or macro. [Job Log] Allows you to create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this machine. Item Description Item Description [Machine Setting] Changes the registration information of this machine. [Register Support Information] Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online Assistance]. [Network TWAIN] Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scanning). If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [Stamp Settings] Register a header or footer. In addition, in [Fax TX Settings], specify whether to cancel the stamp setting for fax transmission. [Blank Page Print Settings] Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on blank pages. [Skip Job Operation Settings] Specify whether to skip a job. [Flash Display Setting] Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display. [System Connection Setting] Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a cellular phone. In [Application Connection Setting], specify whether to cancel a connection from this machine to PageScope My Panel Manager. [Display Setting] Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-39 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.3 Security [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when: - The SSL certificate is not installed - Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON" - [Mode using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device certificate is already registered [Outline PDF Setting] Specify whether to outline text. Item Description Item Description [PKI Settings] Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external certificate settings. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify the items to validate a certificate. [Address Reference Setting] When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group name or access allowed level. [Restrict User Access] Specify the function to restrict user operations. [Copy Security] Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function. [Auto Logout] Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode. [Administrator Password Setting] Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-40 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.6 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track Item Description [General Settings] Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting. [User Authentication Setting] When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure user setting. [Account Track Settings] When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account. [External Server Settings] When enabling external server authentication, register the external server. [Public User Box Setting] Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes. [User/Account Common Setting] Specify whether to print data in single color or two-color mode. [Scan to Home Settings] Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder. [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] Configure settings to restrict manual TX destinations. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-41 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.5 Network Item Description [TCP/IP Setting] Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network. [E-mail Setting] Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax), and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication. [LDAP Setting] Configure the settings to register the LDAP server. [IPP Setting] Configure the IPP print setting. [FTP Setting] Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server. [SNMP Setting] Configure SNMP settings. [SMB Setting] Configure the SMB client, WINS, or SMB print setting. [Web Service Settings] Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services. [Bonjour Setting] Configure Bonjour settings. [NetWare Setting] Configure NetWare settings. [AppleTalk Setting] Configure AppleTalk settings. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings. [WebDAV Settings] Configure the WebDAV settings. [OpenAPI Setting] Configure the OpenAPI settings. [TCP Socket Setting] Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this machine and the application software in your computer. [IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting] Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings. [LLTD Setting] Select whether to enable or disable LLTD. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-42 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.6 9.6.6 User Boxes Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when opening it. [SSDP Settings] Configure the SSDP settings. [Bluetooth Setting] Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth. • To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in advance. Item Description Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User Box) to enable you to change the User Box setting. • Document operations are not available in the administrator mode. • User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for the target User Box. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. [Open System User Box] Open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Create System User Box] Create a new Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box. The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-43 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.7 Printer Settings Item Description [Basic Setting] Specify the default values of the printer. [PCL Setting] Specify the default values in the PCL mode. [PS Setting] Specify the default values in the PS mode. [TIFF Setting] Specify the paper to print TIFF images. [XPS Settings] Configure the XPS print settings. [Interface Setting] Specify the timeout period of the interface. [Direct Print Settings] Configure the settings to enable direct printing using PageScope Web Connection. [Assign Account to Acquire Device Info] Select whether to specify a password to obtain device information through the printer driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-44 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.6 9.6.8 Store Address Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails. [Application Registration] Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected application. • [Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Prefix/Suffix] Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when Emailing. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9-45 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.9 Fax Settings Item Description [Header/Footer Position] Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information. [Line Parameter Setting] Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method. [TX/RX Settings] Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data. [Function Setting] Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax. [PBX Connection Setting] Specify the outside line at PBX connection. [Report Settings] Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when sending or receiving data. [Multi Line Settings] Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line. • This item is displayed when a line is extended. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the setting to use network fax. [Header Information] Registers sender information and fax number when sending data. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-46 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 9.6 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose Configure the settings according to the instructions shown in the window for items requiring multiple settings. The available setting items are as follows. - Configure the settings for sending a scanned document - Configure the network print settings - Restrict users using this machine Reference - As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left. - If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose page after the items that were configured before cancellation have been applied. 10 Appendix bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 10-3 10.1 Error message list 10 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list If an error message appears, perform the corresponding operation described below. dReference For details on the network settings, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Message Cause and remedy Unable to connect to the network. Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make sure that Network Settings in Administrator Settings have been correctly configured. The address for the communication method cannot be selected since the number of addresses has exceeded the maximum allowed for broadcasting. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Document could not be saved in user box due to insufficient HDD capacity. Check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of registered user boxes has reached the max. allowance. The number of registered user boxes has reached the maximum allowed. The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the maximum number possible. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 10 Glossary 10-4 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 10.2 10.2 Glossary Term Description 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. Anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering anonymous as the account name. Authentication & print A function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver during user authentication. Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0". bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous for the larger size Bitmap Font characters. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. Compact PDF A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used for digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation. Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function is activated. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. Density The amount of density of an image. Density Compensation A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors. This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness on the image. DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 10-5 10.2 Glossary 10 DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet A standard for LAN transmission lines. File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network. Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce smoother transition of the shading. Gray scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black and white dots. Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32- bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet. JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, One of the file formats used to save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is generally 1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other natural images. Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network. Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages. OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS. PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission. PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is based on the PostScript format. You can use the free Adobe Reader software to view PDF documents. Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image. Pixel indicates an image pixel, the smallest constitutional unit of an image. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 10.2 Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. It indicates how many pixels are contained per inch. Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced precisely on an image or a print matter. Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image. Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page. SMB The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and printers mainly over the Windows network. SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Thumbnail A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image (image displayed when the file is opened). TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required. Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer. USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. Term Description 11 Index bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-9 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-37 Address search 7-45 Address type 7-37 Administrator settings 8-4, 8-15 Allow/restrict user box 8-23 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-87, 8-17 Application 7-61, 7-69 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-21 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-34 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-56 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-81, 8-7 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-25 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-54 Check HDD capacity 8-27 Check printing preferences 7-104 Check/change temporarily 7-30 City 7-46 Color 7-10, 7-67 Combine 7-7, 7-13 Communication method settings 7-58 Communication settings 7-53 Company name 7-47 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-2 Copies 7-9 Copy 7-65 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-6, 8-16 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-22 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-7 Delete page 7-70 Delete secure print documents 8-20 Delete unused user box 8-20 Deleting documents 7-64 Density 7-90 Department 7-47 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-10 Detail search 7-38, 7-57 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-43, 7-44, 7-80 Digital signature 7-60 Direct input 7-39, 7-57 Direct print 9-20 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-68 Document delete time setting 8-24 Document details 7-68, 7-100 Document hold setting 8-22 Document name 7-55 Download 9-31 E ECM OFF 7-54 Edit document 7-70 Edit name 7-64 E-mail 7-40 E-mail addr. 7-46 E-mail encryption 7-60 E-mail settings 7-55 Encrypted PDF data 7-99 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-21 Encryption 6-9, 7-49 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-49 Entering the PIN code 7-104 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11-4 11.1 Index by item 11 Error message list 10-3 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-98 External memory function settings 8-23 F Fax 7-40 Fax header settings 7-60 Fax number 7-46 Fax settings 9-45 F-code transmission 7-59 File list 9-24 File name 2-10 File path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-99 File type 6-8, 7-48, 7-67 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-63 Finishing 7-10 First name 7-46 Fold/bind 7-12 Format HDD 8-31 From 7-56 FTP 7-43 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-30 HDD settings 8-27 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 I Icons 3-4 ID & print delete after print setting 8-24 ID & print delete time 8-22 ID & print settings 8-25 ID & print user box 7-96 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-38 Information 9-18 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-41 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-19 Job history 7-45 Job list 3-6 Job list - delete 3-6 Job list - job details 3-7 L Last name 7-46 LDAP search - advanced search 7-46 LDAP search - search 7-46 Left panel 3-5 Line setting 7-53 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-37 Maximum number of user boxes 8-19 Memory RX user box 7-86 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-3 Mobile/PDA 7-103 Move page 7-73 Move/copy 9-34 Moving documents 7-64 N Name 7-46 Network 9-41 New 7-78 Next destination 7-43, 7-44 Number type 7-91 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47 Organizing documents 2-6 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-51 Overlay setting 7-32 Overseas TX 7-53 Overwrite 7-79 Overwrite all data 8-29 Overwrite HDD data 8-28 P Page configuration 9-16 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 PageScope Web Connection 9-3 Paper 7-101 Password 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-95 Password transmission 7-59 PC (SMB) 7-42 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-82 Position 7-25, 7-29 Preview 3-14, 3-15, 7-68 Preview/set range 7-75 Preview/specify by Input 7-75 Print 7-6, 7-7, 9-25 Print - application 7-16 11-5 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11 Index by item 11.1 Print - basic 7-9, 7-100 Print position 7-91 Print/save 7-95 Printer settings 9-43 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-11 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-41 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-77 Registered overlay 7-31 Relay user box 8-9 Resolution 7-47, 7-66 Re-Transmission user box 7-93 Rotate page 7-71 S Save in external memory 7-65 Save in user box 7-102 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-3, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-52 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-39 Secondary field 7-90 Secure document user box 7-83 Security 9-39 Security details 8-27 Security print only 8-27 Select line 7-54 Send 7-33, 7-34, 9-28 Send & print 7-62 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-46 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter Insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-51 Stamp element 7-90 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-11 Store address 9-21, 9-44 Subject 7-55 System settings 9-38 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-58 Touch panel 3-4 U URL notification setting 7-57 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-12 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-13 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-13 Use/file - details 3-12 User authentication 2-8 User authentication/account track 9-40 User box administrator setting 8-26 User box setting 8-10, 8-20 User boxes 9-19, 9-42 User name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Using documents 2-4 V V.34 OFF 7-54 W Web browser cache 9-4 WebDAV 7-44 Z Zoom 7-14 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11-6 11.2 Index by button 11 11.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-13 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-13 8in1 7-13 A Address Type 7-37 Advanced Search 7-46 All Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-23 Annotation User Box 7-87, 8-17 Application 7-35 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-21 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-33 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-52 Blank 7-20 Body 7-56 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-81, 8-7 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-12 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-29 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-27 Check Job 3-5 Check Job Set. 3-7, 3-8 Check Job Settings 3-12 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-46 Color 6-12, 7-52, 7-80 Combine 7-6, 7-7, 7-13 Comm. List 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Communication Method Settings 7-58 Communication Settings 7-35 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-48 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-48 Company Name 7-47 Compulsory Memory RX User Box 7-86 Continuous Print 7-8, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-63, 7-65 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-90, 8-18 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 7-63, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92, 7-94, 7-95, 7-97 Delete Page 3-16 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-20 Delete Unused User Box 8-20 Deleted Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Deleting 7-64 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-80, 7-90, 8-18 Department 7-47 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-7, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Detail Search 7-38 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-32, 7-43, 7-44, 7-80 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-60 Display Name 7-32 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-24 Document Details 7-4, 7-63, 7-68, 7-69, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92, 7-100 Document Hold Setting 8-22 Document Name 6-5, 7-55 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-49 Document Settings 7-35 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-54 Edit Document 7-69 Edit Name 7-63, 7-64, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92 E-mail 7-40 E-mail Addr. 7-46 E-mail Encryption 7-60 E-Mail Settings 7-55 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-21 Encryption 6-9, 7-49 Encryption Priority 8-28 Existing Setting 7-14 11-7 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11 Index by button 11.2 External Memory 7-98 External Memory Document Scan 8-23 External Memory Function Settings 8-23 F Fax 3-16, 7-40, 7-93 Fax Header Settings 7-60 Fax Number 7-46 F-Code transmission 7-59 File Path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 File Type 6-8, 7-48 Finished Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Finishing 7-7, 7-8 First Name 7-46 Fold/Bind 7-12 Format HDD 8-31 Forward 3-10 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-56 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-43 Full Color 6-12, 7-52 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-52 Group 7-35 H Half-Fold 7-12 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-30 HDD Settings 8-27 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-24 ID & Print Delete Time 8-22 ID & Print Settings 8-25 ID & Print User Box 7-96 Image 7-51 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-32 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-7 Index 7-38, 8-6 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-41 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-7 Job List 3-5, 3-6 JPEG 6-8, 7-48 L L1 3-8 L2 3-8 Last Name 7-46 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-53 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-19 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-28 Mode 2 8-28 Move 7-63 Moving documents 7-64 Multi Page 6-11, 7-52 N Name 7-46 New 7-78 Next Destination 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Next Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75 Number Type 7-91, 8-18 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-53 Overwrite 7-79 Overwrite All Data 8-29 Overwrite Priority 8-28 P Page Margin 7-7, 7-8, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-52 Paper 7-101 Password 6-9, 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-49, 8-6, 8-8, 8-17 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-95 Password transmission 7-59 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-29 PC (SMB) 7-42 PDF 6-8, 7-48 Photo 6-6 bizhub C360/C280/C220 (Version 3) 11-8 11.2 Index by button 11 Photo Size 6-13 Polling TX User Box 7-82 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29 Position Setting 7-11 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75 Preview 3-5, 3-14, 7-68 Preview/Set Range 7-75 Preview/Specify by Input 7-75 Primary Field 8-18 Print 7-6, 7-97, 7-100 Print Document 8-23 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-91, 8-18 Proof Print 7-93 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-6 R Receiver RX Ability 7-41 Redial 3-8, 3-10 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-69, 7-77, 7-92 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-31 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-9 Relay TX Password 8-9 Relay User Box 8-9 Release Held Job 3-7 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-47 S Save Document 7-4, 8-23 Scan 3-16 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-35, 7-37, 7-46 Secondary Field 7-90, 8-18 Secure Document User Box 7-83 Security Print Only 8-27 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-62 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-7 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-51 Stamp Element 7-90 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-7, 7-8, 7-61 Subject 7-55 T Text 6-6, 7-51 Text Color 7-24, 7-29 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29 Text/Background Color 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-32 TIFF 6-8, 7-48 Timer transmission 7-58 Timer TX Job 3-8 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-57 Use Existing Color Setting 7-52 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-26 User Box Name 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-17 User Box No 8-8, 8-9, 8-17 User Box No. 8-6 User Box Setting 8-20 User Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 V V.34 OFF 7-54 View Finishing 3-15, 3-16 W WebDAV 7-44 X XPS 6-8, 7-48 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Zoom User’s Guide . bizhub 42/36 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2 Document and paper indications....................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Control Panel Keys 2.1 Control Panel and functions .......................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 Utility/Counter ................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.3 Basic operations in Administrator Settings.................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen.................................................................................... 2-6 3 Using PageScope Web Connection 3.1 Connecting to network................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication ......................................................................................... 3-3 [TCP/IP].............................................................................................................................................. 3-3 [Network Speed] ................................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.1.2 Communicating using IPv6 ................................................................................................................ 3-4 [TCP/IP].............................................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.1 [TCP/IP].............................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 [Device Certificate] ............................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 [SSL/TLS Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.3 Logging in to the administrator mode .......................................................................................... 3-6 3.4 Specifying the Automatic Logout Time......................................................................................... 3-8 [Auto Logout] ..................................................................................................................................... 3-8 4 [Admin Settings] 4.1 [Machine Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 [Administrator Registration] .......................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3 [Address Registration].................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.1 [Address Book]................................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.2 [Group] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.3.3 [Program] ........................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4 [Authentication Setting]................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.5 [Ethernet] ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 [TCP/IP]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.5.2 [Netware] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.3 [AppleTalk] ....................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.4 [Network Speed] .............................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.5.5 [IEEE802.1X]..................................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.5.6 [Binary Division]................................................................................................................................ 4-15 Contents-2 bizhub 42/36 4.5.7 [S/MIME Comm. Setting] ................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6 [External Memory Print] ............................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 [Job Timeout] ................................................................................................................................ 4-18 4.8 [Copy Settings].............................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.9 [Print Settings]............................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.9.1 [Startup Page Setting]...................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.9.2 [Auto Continue] ................................................................................................................................ 4-20 4.9.3 [Paper].............................................................................................................................................. 4-21 4.9.4 [Hold Job Timeout]........................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.9.5 [Quality Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.9.6 [Emulation] ....................................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.10 [Maintenance Menu]..................................................................................................................... 4-26 4.10.1 [Print Menu]...................................................................................................................................... 4-26 4.10.2 [Printer Adjustment] ......................................................................................................................... 4-27 [Leading Edge Adjustment].............................................................................................................. 4-29 [Leading Edge Adjustment Tray]...................................................................................................... 4-29 [Side Edge Adjustment] ................................................................................................................... 4-30 [Max. Density Adjustment] ............................................................................................................... 4-31 [Gradation Adjustment] .................................................................................................................... 4-32 4.10.3 [Drum Dry] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-33 4.10.4 [Finisher Settings]............................................................................................................................. 4-33 [Paper Alignment Plate Settings] ..................................................................................................... 4-33 4.11 [Folder Settings]............................................................................................................................ 4-34 4.12 [Security Settings]......................................................................................................................... 4-35 4.12.1 [Administrator Password]................................................................................................................. 4-35 4.12.2 [Security Details] .............................................................................................................................. 4-36 4.12.3 [Enhanced Security Mode]............................................................................................................... 4-37 Required settings ............................................................................................................................. 4-37 Settings to forcibly changed ........................................................................................................... 4-37 4.12.4 [HDD Settings] ................................................................................................................................. 4-38 [Overwrite All Data] .......................................................................................................................... 4-38 4.12.5 [SSD Low-level Format] ................................................................................................................... 4-40 4.13 [Restore Defaults] ......................................................................................................................... 4-41 4.14 [HDD Format] ................................................................................................................................ 4-42 4.15 [Paper Empty]................................................................................................................................ 4-43 4.16 [Restriction Code Settings].......................................................................................................... 4-44 4.17 [Erase Job Log] ............................................................................................................................. 4-45 4.18 [Fax Settings]................................................................................................................................. 4-46 4.18.1 [Sender Settings].............................................................................................................................. 4-46 4.18.2 [Header/Footer Settings].................................................................................................................. 4-47 4.18.3 [Comm. Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 4-49 4.18.4 [Function Settings] ........................................................................................................................... 4-50 4.18.5 [Fax Function Settings] .................................................................................................................... 4-51 4.18.6 [Memory RX] .................................................................................................................................... 4-52 4.18.7 [Closed Network RX Password]....................................................................................................... 4-53 4.18.8 [Forward TX Settings]....................................................................................................................... 4-54 4.18.9 [Remote RX Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 4-55 4.18.10 [PC-Fax RX Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 4-56 4.18.11 [Nighttime RX Settings] .................................................................................................................... 4-57 4.18.12 [PBX Connection Settings]............................................................................................................... 4-58 4.18.13 [Fax Report]...................................................................................................................................... 4-59 4.18.14 [List Print] ......................................................................................................................................... 4-60 4.18.15 [Fax Target] ...................................................................................................................................... 4-60 4.18.16 [Fax Factory Default] ........................................................................................................................ 4-61 4.18.17 [Fax Image Initialized]....................................................................................................................... 4-61 bizhub 42/36 Contents-3 5 Configuring from PageScope Web Connection 5.1 [System] tab..................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.1 [Device Information] ........................................................................................................................... 5-3 [Summary] .......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 [Paper Source] ................................................................................................................................... 5-4 [Output Tray] ...................................................................................................................................... 5-4 [Storage]............................................................................................................................................. 5-5 [Interface Information] ........................................................................................................................ 5-5 [Consumables] ................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.1.2 [Counter] ............................................................................................................................................ 5-6 [Total Counter] ................................................................................................................................... 5-6 [Sheets Printed by Paper Size] .......................................................................................................... 5-7 [Sheets Printed by Paper Type] ......................................................................................................... 5-8 5.1.3 [Online Assistance]............................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.1.4 [Import/Export] ................................................................................................................................... 5-9 [Job Log] ............................................................................................................................................ 5-9 [Authentication] ................................................................................................................................ 5-10 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 5-11 5.1.5 [Date/Time Settings]......................................................................................................................... 5-12 [Manual Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 5-12 [Time Adjustment Settings] .............................................................................................................. 5-13 [Daylight Saving Time Settings] ....................................................................................................... 5-14 5.1.6 [Machine Settings] ........................................................................................................................... 5-15 5.1.7 [ROM Version] .................................................................................................................................. 5-16 5.1.8 [Maintenance]................................................................................................................................... 5-16 [Clear Settings]................................................................................................................................. 5-16 [Reset] .............................................................................................................................................. 5-17 5.1.9 [Notification Settings]....................................................................................................................... 5-17 [Status Notification Settings] ........................................................................................................... 5-17 [Total Counter Notification Settings]................................................................................................ 5-19 5.1.10 [Sender Registration] ....................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.2 [Security] tab ................................................................................................................................. 5-21 5.2.1 [Authentication] ................................................................................................................................ 5-21 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-21 [User List] ......................................................................................................................................... 5-23 [User List] (New Registration/Edit) ................................................................................................... 5-24 [Account Track List] ......................................................................................................................... 5-25 [Account Track List] (New Registration/Edit) ................................................................................... 5-26 [External Server List] ........................................................................................................................ 5-27 [External Server List] (Edit) ............................................................................................................... 5-28 [Default Function Permission] .......................................................................................................... 5-30 [Public User Registration] ................................................................................................................ 5-31 5.2.2 [ID & Print Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 5-32 5.2.3 [Authentication Device Settings] ...................................................................................................... 5-33 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-33 [FeliCa (SSFC) Settings]................................................................................................................... 5-34 5.2.4 [PKI Settings] ................................................................................................................................... 5-35 [Device Certificate] ........................................................................................................................... 5-35 [Device Certificate] (New Registration) ............................................................................................ 5-36 [Device Certificate] (Request a Certificate) ...................................................................................... 5-38 [Device Certificate] (Install a Certificate) .......................................................................................... 5-38 [Device Certificate] (Edit).................................................................................................................. 5-39 [SSL/TLS Settings]........................................................................................................................... 5-40 [Protocol Settings]............................................................................................................................ 5-41 [Protocol Settings] (IEEE802.1X) ...................................................................................................... 5-42 [Protocol Settings] (S/MIME)............................................................................................................ 5-43 [Protocol Settings] (HTTP Server) .................................................................................................... 5-43 [Protocol Settings] (E-mail Send (SMTP)) ........................................................................................ 5-44 [Protocol Settings] (E-mail Receive (POP)) ...................................................................................... 5-45 [Protocol Settings] (TCP Socket) ..................................................................................................... 5-46 [Protocol Settings] (LDAP) ............................................................................................................... 5-47 [Protocol Settings] (WebDAV Client) ................................................................................................ 5-48 Contents-4 bizhub 42/36 [Protocol Settings] (OpenAPI) .......................................................................................................... 5-49 [Protocol Settings] (Web Service) .................................................................................................... 5-50 [External Certificate]......................................................................................................................... 5-51 [External Certificate] (New Registration) .......................................................................................... 5-52 [Validate Certificate] ......................................................................................................................... 5-53 5.2.5 [IPsec] .............................................................................................................................................. 5-54 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-55 [IKE Settings].................................................................................................................................... 5-56 [IPsec SA Settings]........................................................................................................................... 5-56 [IPsec Peer Settings]........................................................................................................................ 5-57 5.2.6 [IP Address Filtering] ........................................................................................................................ 5-58 5.2.7 [IEEE802.1X]..................................................................................................................................... 5-59 5.2.8 [Limiting Access to Destination]....................................................................................................... 5-60 [Restrict User Access]...................................................................................................................... 5-60 5.2.9 [Auto Logout] ................................................................................................................................... 5-61 5.2.10 [Administrator Password]................................................................................................................. 5-62 5.3 [Job] tab......................................................................................................................................... 5-63 5.3.1 [Current Jobs] .................................................................................................................................. 5-63 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 5-63 [Send]............................................................................................................................................... 5-64 [Receive]........................................................................................................................................... 5-65 [Save] ............................................................................................................................................... 5-65 5.3.2 [Job History]..................................................................................................................................... 5-66 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 5-66 [Send]............................................................................................................................................... 5-67 [Receive]........................................................................................................................................... 5-67 [Save] ............................................................................................................................................... 5-68 [Job History] (Detail) ......................................................................................................................... 5-68 5.3.3 [Communication List] ....................................................................................................................... 5-69 [Scan] ............................................................................................................................................... 5-69 [Fax TX] ............................................................................................................................................ 5-70 [Fax RX]............................................................................................................................................ 5-70 [Communication List] (Detail) ........................................................................................................... 5-71 5.4 [Print] tab ....................................................................................................................................... 5-72 5.4.1 [Default Settings].............................................................................................................................. 5-72 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-72 [Paper Source Settings] ................................................................................................................... 5-73 [Tray Mapping Settings] ................................................................................................................... 5-74 [PCL Settings] .................................................................................................................................. 5-75 [PostScript Settings] ........................................................................................................................ 5-75 [XPS Settings] .................................................................................................................................. 5-76 5.4.2 [Font/Form] ...................................................................................................................................... 5-76 [PCL Font] ........................................................................................................................................ 5-76 [PostScript Font] .............................................................................................................................. 5-77 [Form Overlay].................................................................................................................................. 5-77 5.4.3 [Download Font/Form] ..................................................................................................................... 5-78 [PostScript Font] .............................................................................................................................. 5-78 [Form Overlay].................................................................................................................................. 5-79 5.4.4 [Report Types].................................................................................................................................. 5-79 5.4.5 [Direct Print] ..................................................................................................................................... 5-80 5.5 [Storage] tab.................................................................................................................................. 5-81 5.5.1 [Scan to HDD] .................................................................................................................................. 5-81 [Scan to HDD] (View)........................................................................................................................ 5-81 [Scan to HDD] (File Information)....................................................................................................... 5-82 5.5.2 [PC-Fax] ........................................................................................................................................... 5-83 [PC-Fax] (File Information) ............................................................................................................... 5-83 5.6 [Address] tab ................................................................................................................................. 5-84 5.6.1 [Address Book]................................................................................................................................. 5-84 [Address Book List].......................................................................................................................... 5-84 [Address Book List] (New Registration) ........................................................................................... 5-85 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: E-mail)........................................................................ 5-86 bizhub 42/36 Contents-5 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: FTP) ........................................................................... 5-87 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: SMB) .......................................................................... 5-88 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: WebDAV) ................................................................... 5-89 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: Fax) ............................................................................ 5-90 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: I-Fax).......................................................................... 5-91 5.6.2 [Group] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-92 [Group List] ...................................................................................................................................... 5-92 [Group List] (New Registration) ........................................................................................................ 5-93 [Group List] (New Registration/Edit: Scan) ...................................................................................... 5-93 [Group List] (New Registration/Edit: Fax)......................................................................................... 5-94 5.6.3 [Program] ......................................................................................................................................... 5-95 [Program List]................................................................................................................................... 5-95 [Program List] (New Registration: Communication Setting) ............................................................ 5-96 [Program List] (New Registration: Destination Setting).................................................................... 5-97 [Program List] (New Registration: Address Book) ........................................................................... 5-98 [Program List] (New Registration: Group) ........................................................................................ 5-99 [Program List] (Edit)........................................................................................................................ 5-100 5.6.4 [Subject] ......................................................................................................................................... 5-108 [Subject Registration]..................................................................................................................... 5-108 5.6.5 [Text] .............................................................................................................................................. 5-109 [Text Registration] .......................................................................................................................... 5-109 5.7 [Network] tab............................................................................................................................... 5-110 5.7.1 [General Settings]........................................................................................................................... 5-110 [Ethernet Settings].......................................................................................................................... 5-110 [Local Interface Settings] ............................................................................................................... 5-111 5.7.2 [TCP/IP Settings]............................................................................................................................ 5-112 [TCP/IP Settings]............................................................................................................................ 5-112 [IPv4 Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 5-113 [IPv6 Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 5-114 [RAW Port Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 5-115 [DNS Settings]................................................................................................................................ 5-116 5.7.3 [E-mail Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 5-117 [E-mail TX (SMTP)] ......................................................................................................................... 5-117 [E-mail RX (POP)] ........................................................................................................................... 5-119 [S/MIME] ........................................................................................................................................ 5-120 5.7.4 [LDAP Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 5-121 [LDAP Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 5-121 [LDAP Server Registration] ............................................................................................................ 5-122 5.7.5 [HTTP Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 5-123 5.7.6 [IPP Settings].................................................................................................................................. 5-124 5.7.7 [FTP Settings]................................................................................................................................. 5-125 [FTP Server Settings] ..................................................................................................................... 5-125 [FTP TX Settings] ........................................................................................................................... 5-126 5.7.8 [SNMP Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-127 5.7.9 [SMB Settings] ............................................................................................................................... 5-129 [WINS Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 5-129 [SMB Client Settings] ..................................................................................................................... 5-130 [Direct Hosting Settings] ................................................................................................................ 5-131 5.7.10 [Web Service Settings]................................................................................................................... 5-132 [Common Settings] ........................................................................................................................ 5-132 [Printer Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-133 [Scanner Settings].......................................................................................................................... 5-134 5.7.11 [Bonjour Settings]........................................................................................................................... 5-135 5.7.12 [NetWare Settings] ......................................................................................................................... 5-136 [NetWare Settings] ......................................................................................................................... 5-136 In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation.............................................. 5-137 In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation ................................................... 5-137 In NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS).................................................................................. 5-138 In the NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS)........................................................................ 5-138 For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS) .......................................................... 5-139 [NetWare Status] ............................................................................................................................ 5-140 Contents-6 bizhub 42/36 5.7.13 [AppleTalk Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 5-141 5.7.14 [Network Fax Settings]................................................................................................................... 5-142 5.7.15 [WebDAV Settings]......................................................................................................................... 5-143 5.7.16 [OpenAPI Settings]......................................................................................................................... 5-144 5.7.17 [TCP Socket Settings].................................................................................................................... 5-145 5.7.18 [LLTD Settings]............................................................................................................................... 5-146 6 Configuration Depending on Your Needs 6.1 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) ............................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.2 [ID & Print Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 6-4 6.1.3 User Registration ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.4 Account Track Registration ............................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) ................................................................... 6-6 6.2.1 [TCP/IP].............................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.2 External Server Settings..................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.3 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.4 [ID & Print Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 6-7 6.2.5 [Default Function Permission] ............................................................................................................ 6-7 6.2.6 [Date/Time Setting] ............................................................................................................................ 6-7 6.3 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup)......................................... 6-8 6.3.1 [TCP/IP].............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 6.3.2 External Server Settings..................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.3.3 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................... 6-9 6.3.4 [ID & Print Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 6-9 6.3.5 [Default Function Permission] ............................................................................................................ 6-9 6.3.6 [WINS Settings] .................................................................................................................................. 6-9 6.3.7 [Direct Hosting Settings] .................................................................................................................... 6-9 6.4 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX)............................................................. 6-10 6.4.1 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.4.2 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 6-10 6.4.3 [ID & Print Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.4.4 [Default Function Permission] .......................................................................................................... 6-11 6.4.5 [NetWare Settings] ........................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.5 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) ............................................................... 6-12 6.5.1 [TCP/IP]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.5.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.5.3 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 6-13 6.5.4 [ID & Print Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.5.5 [Default Function Permission] .......................................................................................................... 6-13 6.6 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP)................................................................................... 6-14 6.6.1 [TCP/IP]............................................................................................................................................ 6-14 6.6.2 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.6.3 [General Settings]............................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.6.4 [ID & Print Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.6.5 [Default Function Permission] .......................................................................................................... 6-15 6.6.6 LDAP over SSL ................................................................................................................................ 6-16 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 6-16 LDAP Server Registration ................................................................................................................ 6-16 Certificate Verification Settings........................................................................................................ 6-16 bizhub 42/36 Contents-7 7 Authentication unit 7.1 Using authentication unit ............................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.2 Registering a user .............................................................................................................................. 7-5 Registering a user using the Control Panel of this machine .............................................................. 7-5 Registering a user using Data Administrator ..................................................................................... 7-7 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator.................................................................. 7-7 Setup.................................................................................................................................................. 7-7 User registration................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Associating the user with card using authentication device............................................................ 7-13 8 Appendix 8.1 Product specifications (Network functions) ................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Error Message................................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.3 Glossary ........................................................................................................................................... 8-5 9 Index 9.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2 Index by button................................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-8 bizhub 42/36 1 Introduction bizhub 42/36 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this machine and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact your service representative. Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer settings and operations • Printer troubleshooting [User's Guide Scan Operations] This manual describes details on scan functions. • Scan settings and operations • Scan troubleshooting [User's Guide Fax Operations] This manual describes details on fax functions. • Fax settings and operations • Fax troubleshooting [User's Guide Administrator Operations] This manual describes the functions or settings that the administrator of the machine uses. • Settings using the Control Panel • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-4 bizhub 42/36 1.2 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. bizhub 42/36 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 Key symbols [ ] Key names on the Touch Panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names on the Control Panel, part names, product names and option names are indicated in bold text. 1.2.2 Document and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub 42/36 1.2 2 Control Panel Keys bizhub 42/36 2-3 2.1 Control Panel and functions 2 2 Control Panel Keys This section describes the functions of the keys on the Control Panel. 2.1 Control Panel and functions Press the keys on the Control Panel to use the Copy, Folder, E-mail, Fax, or other functions. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. You can configure various settings by directly pressing the Touch Panel. 2 Power Save Press to enter Sleep Mode. While the machine is in Sleep Mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Sleep Mode, press the Power Save key again. 3 Fax Press this key to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the Fax key lights up in green. Allows you to use this function if the Fax Kit FK-509 is installed and the fax function is available. For details on the fax function, refer to the [User's Guide Fax Operations]. 4 E-mail Press this key to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the E-mail key lights up in green. For details on the Scan to E-mail function, refer to the [User's Guide Scan Operations]. 5 Folder Press this key to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the Folder key lights up in green. For details on the Scan to Folder function, refer to the [User's Guide Scan Operations]. 6 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details on the copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 7 Reset Press this key to reset settings (except programmed settings) entered using the Control Panel and Touch Panel. 2 Control Panel and functions 2-4 bizhub 42/36 2.1 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing this key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 10 Start Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. 11 Keypad Allows you to specify the number of copies. Allows you to enter the magnification. Allows you to enter various settings. 12 C (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the Keypad. 13 Error Indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred. Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called. 14 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. 15 Utility/Counter Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen. From the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings], and [Admin Settings] screens. 16 Mode Memory Allows you to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. 17 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the Access key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. While logged on, press the Access key to log off. No. Name Description bizhub 42/36 2-5 2.2 Utility/Counter 2 2.2 Utility/Counter Press the Utility/Counter key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check its use status in the Utility menu screen. % Press the Utility/Counter key. Settings [Accessibility] Provides items on machine settings. For details on [Accessibility], refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Meter Count] Provides data on the operations made on the machine according to type of operation. For details on [Meter Count], refer to the [Quick Guide]. [Address Registration] Provides items on registration and deletion of addresses used on the machine. For details on [Address Registration], refer to the [User's Guide Scan Operations] and [User's Guide Fax Operations]. [User Settings] Provides setting items that can be operated by the user. [Admin Settings] Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the machine. 2 Basic operations in Administrator Settings 2-6 bizhub 42/36 2.3 2.3 Basic operations in Administrator Settings 2.3.1 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen 1 Press the Utility/Counter key. 2 Press [ ]. 3 Press [Admin Settings]. bizhub 42/36 2-7 2.3 Basic operations in Administrator Settings 2 4 Enter the password, and then press [OK]. % For details on setting or changing the password, refer to page 4-35. The Administrator Settings screen appears. % To finish configuring the Utility mode settings, press the Utility/Counter key. % To return through the hierarchy of the Utility menu, press [Close] until the desired screen appears. 2 Basic operations in Administrator Settings 2-8 bizhub 42/36 2.3 3 Using PageScope Web Connection bizhub 42/36 3-3 3.1 Connecting to network 3 3 Using PageScope Web Connection 3.1 Connecting to network 3.1.1 Basic settings for TCP/IP communication Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. These settings are required before using this machine via the network. [TCP/IP] In [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, select [Ethernet] ö [TCP/IP]. dReference For details on the menu structure of the [Ethernet] in the Control Panel, refer to page 4-11. For details on how to use this machine in the IPv6 environment, refer to page 3-4. [Network Speed] In [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, select [Ethernet] ö [Network Speed]. dReference For details on the menu structure of the [Network Speed] in the Control Panel, refer to page 4-14. 3 Connecting to network 3-4 bizhub 42/36 3.1 3.1.2 Communicating using IPv6 Reference - If the IPv6 environment does not operate normally, the machine cannot be connected to the IPv4 network. In this case, disable settings for IPv6. Configure settings for IPv6 communication. These settings are required if you want use this machine with an IPv6 address assigned. You can use IPv6 together with IPv4, but you cannot use IPv6 alone. When you use this machine in an IPv6 environment, the following restrictions apply. - No scanned data can be sent with SMB (but it is allowed for the Direct Hosting service). - NTLM authentication is not supported (but it is allowed for the Direct Hosting service). - You cannot use the IP filtering function. - You cannot use the installer of the printer driver (available for Windows Vista/7/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2). dReference For details on the Direct Hosting service, refer to the sections listed below. [Direct Hosting Settings] (p. 5-131) [TCP/IP] In [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, select [Ethernet] ö [TCP/IP]. For details on the menu structure of the [Ethernet] in the Control Panel, refer to page 4-11. bizhub 42/36 3-5 3.2 Using PageScope Web Connection 3 3.2 Using PageScope Web Connection Configure settings to use PageScope Web Connection. PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built into this machine. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the status of the machine. You can also handle some settings, which are to be configured on the Control Panel of this machine, through your computer. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. 3.2.1 [TCP/IP] Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. For details, refer to page 3-3. 3.2.2 [Device Certificate] Configure device certificate settings for encrypting communication from a computer to this machine using SSL. For details, refer to page 5-35. 3.2.3 [SSL/TLS Settings] Select whether or not to use SSL in communication from a computer to the machine. For details, refer to page 5-40. [TCP/IP] Do you use SSL communication? Yes No [Device Certificate] [SSL/TLS Settings] Finish 3 Logging in to the administrator mode 3-6 bizhub 42/36 3.3 3.3 Logging in to the administrator mode To configure this machine with PageScope Web Connection, log in to the administrator mode. The following shows a procedure to log in to the administrator mode. Reference - As many as 8 sessions (users and administrators) can log on to PageScope Web Connection at the same time. These can be logged on as Administrator. 1 In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Log in]. % If necessary, select the [Language]. 2 Enter the administrator password of this machine. % If an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it will no longer be possible to log in to the administrator mode. To turn the Power Switch off and on, first turn the power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. bizhub 42/36 3-7 3.3 Logging in to the administrator mode 3 3 Click [OK]. The administrator mode window appears. 3 Specifying the Automatic Logout Time 3-8 bizhub 42/36 3.4 3.4 Specifying the Automatic Logout Time Configure time before auto logout from the administrator or user mode of PageScope Web Connection. If no operation is performed for a predefined length of time, the user will automatically be logged out. [Auto Logout] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Auto Logout] ö [Auto Logout]. Item Description [Admin Mode Logout Time] Specify the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when no operations have been performed in the administrator mode. [User Mode Logout Time] Specify the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when no operations have been performed in the user mode. 4 [Admin Settings] bizhub 42/36 4-3 4 4 [Admin Settings] [Admin Settings] are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator Settings requires the administrator password. Settings [Machine Settings] Configure the basic functions of this machine. [Administrator Registration] Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. [Address Registration] The destination lists for [Address Book], [Group] and [Program] can be printed. [Authentication Setting] Configure authentication settings. [Ethernet] Configure network settings. [External Memory Print] Configure external memory print settings. [Job Timeout] Configure job timeout settings. [Copy Settings] Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. [Print Settings] Configure settings for the print operations. [Maintenance Menu] Configure machine maintenance settings. [Folder Settings] Configure settings on data stored on the machine HDD. [Security Settings] Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing secret data. [Restore Defaults] Configure settings applied when restoring default on the machine. [HDD Format] Configure HDD format settings. [Paper Empty] Configure indication settings applied when paper runs out in a tray. [Restriction Code Settings] Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. [Erase Job Log] Configure job log deletion settings. [Fax Settings] Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations. 4 [Machine Settings] 4-4 bizhub 42/36 4.1 4.1 [Machine Settings] Configure the basic functions of this machine. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Machine Settings]. Settings [Sleep Time Setting] Set a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine is not being operated. The following items can be set; [1 min.], [2 min.], [5 min.], [6 min.], [7 min.], [8 min.], [9 min.], [10 min.], [11 min.], [12 min.], [13 min.], [14 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [45 min.], [1 Hour], or [3 Hours]. Sleep mode refers to a power saving state into which the machine automatically enters and in which the touch panel goes off if the machine is not used over a period of time. [Auto Power OFF Setting] Select whether or not to automatically turn the machine off. [Auto Power OFF Time] Configure the time from 00:00 to 23:59 to automatically turn this machine off. This item is not displayed if [Auto Power OFF Setting] is set to [OFF]. [Date & Time Settings] [Date (xx.xx.xx)] Specify the current date. The default setting is set in the order month, day, then year (MM.DD.YY) for 120V model, month, then year (DD.MM.YY) for 220V model (Europe), and year, month, then day (YY.MM.DD) for 220V model (Asia and China). [Time] Specify the current time. [Time Zone] Specify the time difference from UTC (Coordinate Universal Time). [Daylight Saving Time] [Enable] Specify whether to apply daylight saving time in the time display on this machine. [Offset] If [ON] is selected, this item displays the time that is ahead of the current time by the specified number of minutes. This item is not displayed if the [Daylight Saving Time] setting is disabled. [List/Counter] [Job Settings List] The machine settings can be printed. [Report Input Tray] Select the paper tray loaded with the paper used to print reports. bizhub 42/36 4-5 4.1 [Machine Settings] 4 [Auto Reset Settings] [Enable] Select whether or not to exit the current screen and return to the home screen if the machine is not used over a period of time. dReference If user authentication or enhanced security mode is enabled, the administrator settings mode or user authentication mode is logged off according to the setting for System Auto Reset Time. [Auto Reset] Specify the period of time before the auto reset function starts working. [Priority Mode] Configure a screen to be displayed in the system auto reset mode. [Shift Output Each Job] Select whether to shift the output paper for each job. This item is displayed if the Finisher FS-529 is installed. [Low Power Mode Setting] Set whether or not exchanged to low power mode. Low power mode refers to a power saving state into which the machine automatically enters and in which the touch panel goes off if the machine is not used over a period of time. [LowPowerMode Time Setting] Set a time period before switching to the low power mode when this machine is not being operated. The following items can be set; [1 min.], [2 min.], [3 min.], [4 min.], [5 min.], [6 min.], [7 min.], [8 min.], [9 min.], [10 min.], [11 min.], [12 min.], [13 min.], [14 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [45 min.], [1 Hour], or [3 Hours]. The low power switching time is always as long as the sleeping time. If the switching time is longer, the sleep mode may come before the low power mode. This item is not displayed if [Low Power Mode Setting] is set to [OFF]. Factory default [Sleep Time Setting] bizhub 42 [1 Hour] bizhub 36 [45 min.] [Auto Power OFF Setting] This value varies depending on the area. [Time Zone] [00:00] [Daylight Saving Time] [OFF] [Report Input Tray] [Tray 2] [Auto Reset Settings] [Enable]: [ON] [Auto Reset]: [1] [Priority Mode]: [Home] [Shift Output Each Job] [ON] [Low Power Mode Setting] [ON] [LowPowerMode Time Setting] [15 min.] Settings 4 [Administrator Registration] 4-6 bizhub 42/36 4.2 4.2 [Administrator Registration] Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. 0 The device name entered under the Machine Settings may not be supported by your operating system. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Administrator Registration]. Settings [Administrator Registration] Register the name of the administrator, extension number(s), E-mail address of the administrator. The E-mail address of the administrator can be used as From address in E-mails and Internet Fax sent from the machine. Notification on the status of the machine is sent from the administrator's E-mail address. [Machine Settings] Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine. The E-mail address is set as the From address for E-mail transmission and Internet Fax by default. Factory default [Device Name] The default abbreviation is input for the device name. If necessary, it can be changed freely. bizhub 42/36 4-7 4.3 [Address Registration] 4 4.3 [Address Registration] Print the lists of addresses registered in Address Book, Groups, and Programs. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Fax Operations] and [User's Guide Scan Operations]. 4.3.1 [Address Book] Output the addresses registered in Address Book according to type of transmission. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Address Registration] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book]. Settings [E-mail] Individual lists of addresses registered in Address Book are printed according to type of transmission. [Start Number]: Select this button to specify the start number of the destination numbers you wish to output to the list. [Number of Addresses]: Select this button to specify the number of addresses to be output to the list. [List Output]: Select this button to output the list of address book destinations defined by [Start Number] and [Number of Addresses]. [Fax] and [Internet Fax] are displayed when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. [FTP] [WebDAV] [SMB] [Fax] [Internet Fax] Factory default [Start Number] [1] [Number of Addresses] [100] [List Output] [Print] 4 [Address Registration] 4-8 bizhub 42/36 4.3 4.3.2 [Group] Output the addresses registered in Groups. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Address Registration] ö [Address Book] ö [Group]. Settings [Start Number] Select this button to specify the start number of the destination numbers you wish to output to the list. [Number of Addresses] Select this button to specify the number of addresses to be output to the list. [List Output] Select this button to output the list of group destinations defined by [Start Number] and [Number of Addresses]. Factory default [Start Number] [1] [Number of Addresses] [20] [List Output] [Print] bizhub 42/36 4-9 4.3 [Address Registration] 4 4.3.3 [Program] Output the addresses registered in Programs. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Address Registration] ö [Address Book] ö [Program]. Settings [E-mail] Individual lists of addresses registered in Programs are printed according to type of transmission. [Start Number]: Select this button to specify the start number of the destination numbers you wish to output to the list. [Number of Addresses]: Select this button to specify the number of addresses to be output to the list. [List Output]: Select this button to output the list of program destinations defined by [Start Number] and [Number of Addresses]. [Fax] and [Internet Fax] are displayed when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. [FTP] [WebDAV] [SMB] [Address Book] [Group Address] [Fax] [Internet Fax] Factory default [Start Number] [1] [Number of Addresses] [50] [List Output] [Print] 4 [Authentication Setting] 4-10 bizhub 42/36 4.4 4.4 [Authentication Setting] Configure the authentication settings to control the use of this machine. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Authentication Setting]. Settings [User List Display Setting] Select this button to specify whether or not to make the key that displays the list of registered users grayed out. This item is enabled when the enhanced security settings are disabled. [Logout Confirmation Display] Configure whether to display the logout confirmation screen when you press the Access key to log out. [Card Authentication] Select this button to configure the relationship between users and IC cards if IC card authentication is enabled. This item is displayed when the Authentication Unit AU-201 is installed. [All]: Select this button to display registered users. [Search]: Select this button to search registered users. For the relationship between users and IC cards, refer to page 7-5. Factory default [User List Display Setting] [OFF] [Logout Confirmation Display] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-11 4.5 [Ethernet] 4 4.5 [Ethernet] Configure network settings. These settings are required before using this machine via the network. 4.5.1 [TCP/IP] Specify network settings for the machine. If you change the setting items below and exit the Ethernet menu, the machine is rebooted. - [Enable] - [DHCP] - [BOOTP] - [ARP/PING] - [SLP] - [SNMP] - [IPv6]-[Enable] - [Auto Setting] % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [TCP/IP]. Settings [Enable] Select the TCP/IP setting. [ON]: Enables the TCP/IP setting. [OFF]: Disables the TCP/IP setting. Items except for this one are not displayed. [IP Address] To directly specify the IP address, enter the IP address of this machine. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the IP address is specified here, the following items are set to [OFF]. • DHCP • BOOTP • ARP/PING [Subnet Mask] When directly entering the IP address, configure the subnet mask of the network to be connected. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Gateway] When directly entering the IP address, specify the default gateway of the network to be connected. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [DHCP] If there is a DHCP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the DHCP server. If the IP address is manually specified, [DHCP] is automatically set to [OFF]. [BOOTP] If there is a BOOTP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the BOOTP server. If the IP address is manually specified, [BOOTP] is automatically set to [OFF]. 4 [Ethernet] 4-12 bizhub 42/36 4.5 [ARP/PING] Select whether or not the ARP/PING command is used when the IP address is assigned. If the IP address is manually specified, [ARP/PING] is automatically set to [OFF]. [HTTP] Select whether or not to enable HTTP. [FTP] Select whether or not to enable the FTP server. [Telnet] Select whether or not to enable Telnet transmissions. [Bonjour] To display the machine as a connected device via Bonjour, select [Enable]. [Dynamic DNS] Select [Enable] when automatically registering the host name with the DNS server that supports the Dynamic DNS function. [IPP] To use IPP print, select [Enable]. [RAW Port] [Enable] To use RAW port (Port 9100) print, select [Yes]. [Bidirectional] Select whether or not to enable RAW port bidirectional communication. If the RAW port setting is disabled, this item is not displayed. [SLP] Select whether or not to enable SLP. [SMTP] Select whether or not to enable E-mail transmission operations for this machine. [SNMP] Select whether or not to enable SNMP. [WSD Print] Select whether or not to enable WSD printing. [IPSec] Select whether or not to enable IPsec. [IP Address Filter] [Permit Access] Select [Enable] to allow access from certain IP addresses. [Deny Access] Select [Enable] to deny access from certain IP addresses. [IPv6] [Enable] [ON]: Enable the IPv6 Setting. [OFF]: Disable the IPv6 Setting. Buttons except for this one are not displayed. [Auto Setting] To obtain the IPv6 address automatically, select [Enable]. [Link Local] Displays the link-local address generated from the MAC address. [Global Address] Displays the global address. [Gateway Address] Displays the gateway address. Factory default [Enable] [ON] [IP Address] [0.0.0.0] [Subnet Mask] [0.0.0.0] [Gateway] [0.0.0.0] [DHCP] [ON] [BOOTP] [OFF] [ARP/PING] [OFF] [HTTP] [Enable] [FTP] [Enable] [Telnet] [Enable] [Bonjour] [Enable] [Dynamic DNS] [Disable] Settings bizhub 42/36 4-13 4.5 [Ethernet] 4 4.5.2 [Netware] Specify Netware setting. If you change this setting and exit the Ethernet menu, the machine is rebooted. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [Netware]. [IPP] [Enable] [RAW Port] [Enable]: [Yes] [Bidirectional]: [OFF] [SLP] [Enable] [SMTP] [Enable] [SNMP] [Enable] [WSD Print] [Enable] [IPSec] [Disable] [IP Address Filter] [Permit Access]: [Disable] [Deny Access]: [Disable] [IPv6] [Enable]: [ON] [Auto Setting]: [Enable] Factory default Settings [Enable] Select whether or not to enable NetWare. [Disable] Factory default [Netware] [Disable] 4 [Ethernet] 4-14 bizhub 42/36 4.5 4.5.3 [AppleTalk] Specify AppleTalk setting. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [AppleTalk]. 4.5.4 [Network Speed] Specify Network speed setting. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [Network Speed]. Settings [Enable] Select whether or not to enable AppleTalk. [Disable] Factory default [AppleTalk] [Enable] Settings [Auto] Select whether or not to enable network speed. [10Mbps Full Duplex] [10Mbps Half Duplex] [100Mbps Full Duplex] [100Mbps Half Duplex] [1Gbps Full Duplex] Factory default [Network Speed] [Auto] bizhub 42/36 4-15 4.5 [Ethernet] 4 4.5.5 [IEEE802.1X] If you use this machine in a wired LAN environment having the IEEE802.1x authentication system, you must configure the supplicant (authentication client) function of this machine. If you change this setting and exit the Ethernet menu, the machine is rebooted. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [IEEE802.1X]. 4.5.6 [Binary Division] Select whether or not transmission data is divided. If the E-mail software that received an E-mail does not have a restoration function, you may not be able to read the E-mail. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [Binary Division]. Settings [Enable] Select whether or not to enable IEEE802.1X. [Disable] Factory default [IEEE802.1X] [Disable] Settings [ON] Select whether or not to enable binary division. [OFF] Factory default [Binary Division] [OFF] 4 [Ethernet] 4-16 bizhub 42/36 4.5 4.5.7 [S/MIME Comm. Setting] Select whether or not to use S/MINE communication when sending E-mails from the machine. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Ethernet] ö [S/MIME Comm. Setting]. Settings [S/MIME Enabled] Select the S/MIME communication setting. [Enable]: Enable the S/MIME setting. [Disable]: Disable the S/MIME setting. Items except for this one are grayed out. [Digital Signature] Select whether or not to attach a digital signature in S/MIME communication. [Encryption Method] Specify the E-mail text encryption format. Factory default [S/MIME Enabled] [Disable] [Digital Signature] [Do not add signature] [Encryption Method] [3DES] bizhub 42/36 4-17 4.6 [External Memory Print] 4 4.6 [External Memory Print] Use the setting to print data stored in the external memory. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [External Memory Print]. dReference For details on how to print data from the external memory, refer to [User's Guide Printer Operations]. Settings [Enable] Select whether or not to enable the External Memory Print function. [Disable] Factory default [External Memory Print] [Enable] 4 [Job Timeout] 4-18 bizhub 42/36 4.7 4.7 [Job Timeout] Specify the amount of time applied to job timeout. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Job Timeout]. Settings [Job Timeout] Specify the amount of time applied to any single job sent from the machine. Factory default [Job Timeout] [15] bizhub 42/36 4-19 4.8 [Copy Settings] 4 4.8 [Copy Settings] Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Copy Settings]. Settings [Specify Tray When APS OFF] Configure which paper tray to be selected when the APS (Auto Paper) setting is canceled. [Tray Before APS ON] Uses the paper tray specified before the APS was selected. [Default Tray] Uses Tray 2. [Paper Priority] Specify the paper tray that is normally used. Factory default [Specify Tray When APS OFF] [Tray Before APS ON] [Paper Priority] [Tray 2] 4 [Print Settings] 4-20 bizhub 42/36 4.9 4.9 [Print Settings] Configure printer settings. 4.9.1 [Startup Page Setting] Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the machine is turned on. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Startup Page Setting]. 4.9.2 [Auto Continue] Select whether or not to continue printing if the size and type of paper is different from the one specified by the print job. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Auto Continue]. Settings [ON] Select [ON] to print a startup page (Configuration page) when the power of the machine is turned on. [OFF] Factory default [Startup Page Setting] [OFF] Settings [ON] Select whether or not to continue printing if the size and type of paper of a print job is different from the one loaded in the specified paper feed tray. [OFF] Factory default [Auto Continue] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-21 4.9 [Print Settings] 4 4.9.3 [Paper] Specify the paper to be used unless you specify an alternative. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Paper]. Settings [Default Paper] [Paper Size] Select the paper size. [Custom Size] Specify odd size paper. [Width]: Specifies the paper width. (3.55 to 11.69 inches (90 to 297mm)) [Length]: Specifies the paper length. (5.50 to 14.00 inches (140 to 356 mm)) These settings can be specified if [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Paper Type] Select the paper type. [Measurement Unit Setting] Select the measurement units. Factory default [Paper Size] [Letter] ([A4]) [Custom Size] This value varies depending on the area. [Paper Type] [Plain Paper] [Measurement Unit Setting] This value varies depending on the area. 4 [Print Settings] 4-22 bizhub 42/36 4.9 4.9.4 [Hold Job Timeout] Specify the period of time before jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Hold Job Timeout]. Settings [Disable] Specify the length of time until print jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted. [1 Hour] [4 Hours] [1 Day] [1 Week] Factory default [Hold Job Timeout] [Disable] bizhub 42/36 4-23 4.9 [Print Settings] 4 4.9.5 [Quality Settings] Configure image quality settings. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Quality Settings]. Settings [Brightness] The brightness of the printed image can be adjusted. [Contrast] Adjust the copy density balance. [Halftone] [Image Printing] Select how halftones in images, text and graphics are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness. [Text Printing] [Graphics Printing] [Edge Enhancement] [Image Printing] Edges of characters, graphics, and images are emphasized so that small characters are made [Text Printing] more visible. [Graphics Printing] [Edge Strength] Select the desired amount that edges are emphasized. [Economy Print] Select whether to print graphics with a adjusted density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. [Gradation Adjustment] [Tone Calibration] Select whether or not to enable image quality adjustment. [Density] Adjusts the density of Highlight, Middle, and Shadow. Factory default [Brightness] [0] [Contrast] [0] [Halftone] [Image Printing]: [Detail] [Text Printing]: [Line Art] [Graphics Printing]: [Detail] [Edge Enhancement] [Image Printing]: [OFF] [Text Printing]: [ON] [Graphics Printing]: [ON] [Edge Strength] [Middle] [Economy Print] [OFF] [Tone Calibration] [ON] [Density] [Highlight]: [0] [Middle]: [0] [Shadow]: [0] 4 [Print Settings] 4-24 bizhub 42/36 4.9 4.9.6 [Emulation] Configure default of printer languages and fonts. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Print Settings] ö [Emulation]. Settings [Default Emulation] Select the machine emulation language. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects the machine emulation language from the data stream. [PS] [Wait Timeout] Specify the time until an error is determined to be a PostScript error. If [0] is selected, no timeout is performed. [Print PS Errors] Select whether or not an error page is printed when a Postscript error occurs. [PS Protocol] Select the protocol for data transmissions with a PostScript data stream. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects an applicable protocol from the data stream. [PCL] [CR/LF Mapping] Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. [Line/Page] Specify the number of lines per page in the PCL language. [Font Setting] • [Font Number]: Specify the default font in the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. • [Pitch Size]: Specify the font size in the PCL language. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for a bitmap font, [Pitch Size] appears. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for an outline font, [Point Size] appears. • [Symbol Set]: Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language. [XPS] [Digital Signature] Select whether or not to enable XPS digital signatures. [Print XPS Errors] Select whether or not an error report is printed after an XPS error has occurred. Factory default [Default Emulation] [Auto] [Wait Timeout] [0] [Print PS Errors] [OFF] [PS Protocol] [Auto] [CR/LF Mapping] [CR=CR LF=LF] bizhub 42/36 4-25 4.9 [Print Settings] 4 [Line/Page] This value varies depending on the area. [Font Setting] [Font Number]: [000] [Symbol Set]: [PC8] [Digital Signature] [Disable] [Print XPS Errors] [ON] Factory default 4 [Maintenance Menu] 4-26 bizhub 42/36 4.10 4.10 [Maintenance Menu] Configure machine adjustment settings. 4.10.1 [Print Menu] Print error logs, halftone patterns, and reports. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Print Menu]. Settings [Event Log] Select this button to print event logs such as error history and consumable replacement history. [Black 64] Prints the halftone pattern using a 25% density. [Black 128] Prints the halftone pattern using a 50% density. [Black 256] Prints the halftone pattern using a 100% density. [Gradation] Prints the gradation pattern. [Activity Report] Select this button to print reports where transmission and reception are recorded. This item is displayed if the Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. [Scan Send Report Print] Select this button to print reports where scan transmission is recorded. [Scan Event Log] Select this button to print reports where errors that have occurred in scanner are recorded. bizhub 42/36 4-27 4.10 [Maintenance Menu] 4 4.10.2 [Printer Adjustment] Adjust the starting print position and defective print images caused by paper type features. dReference The starting print position is factory-adjusted. Normally, you are not required to change the set values. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment]. Settings [Leading Edge Adjustment] [Plain Paper] Adjust the top margin for various types of media. For details, refer to page 4-29. [Thick 1] [Thick 2] [Envelope] [Transparency] [Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Dx)] Adjust the top margin for media fed from each paper tray with 2-sided printing. For details, refer to page 4-29. [Leading Edge Adjustment Tray] [Tray 1] Adjust the top margin for media fed from each paper tray. [Tray 2] For details, refer to page 4-29. [Tray 3] [Tray 4] [Tray 5] [Side Edge Adjustment] [Tray 1] Adjust the side margins for media fed from each paper tray. [Tray 2] For details, refer to page 4-30. [Tray 3] [Tray 4] [Tray 5] [Left ADJ Duplex] [Tray 1] Adjust the side margins for media fed from each paper tray with 2-sided printing. [Tray 2] For details, refer to page 4-30. [Tray 3] [Tray 4] [Tray 5] [Engine DipSW] [Engine DipSW 1] to [Engine DipSW 28] Use to change engine settings. Normally, there is no need to change the settings. If it becomes necessary to change the settings, contact your service representative. 4 [Maintenance Menu] 4-28 bizhub 42/36 4.10 [Feed Zoom] [Plain Paper] Adjust the feed direction zoom ratio of paper types. [Thick 1] [Thick 2] [Envelope] [Paper Separation Adjustment] [First Side] Adjust the paper position where the two sides are separated for 2-sided print. [Second Side] [Gradation Adjustment] Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images. [Max. Density Adjustment] This function is useful when the required printing result is not obtained, for example, the printing density is too high or too low. Scan the amount of toner adhered on an output test pattern, and adjust to the optimal density. For details, refer to page 4-31. [Gradation Adjustment] This function is useful when a print image is not reproduced with consistent density. Scan the density of an output test pattern and adjust to the optimal gradation. For details, refer to page 4-32. [Max Image Density Adj] This function is useful when the required printing result is not obtained, for example, the printing density is too high or too low. Adjust the amount of toner that is to be adhered to the paper based on the printing density value set to the highest level in order to fine-adjust the entire printing density setting (amount of toner). If the required printing density result is not obtained after the maximum image density has been adjusted, contact your service representative. [Replenish Toner] Directly after replacing the toner bottle or after printing a large number of originals with many black areas, the machine cannot sufficiently replenish the toner, and printing density may fall temporarily. In this case, using this function forcibly replenishes the toner. Press Start to start replenishing toner. Factory default [Paper Separation Adjustment] [0.0mm] [Max Image Density Adj] [0] Settings bizhub 42/36 4-29 4.10 [Maintenance Menu] 4 [Leading Edge Adjustment] Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the Bypass Tray. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment]. % To adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Dx)]. 2 Select a paper type to be adjusted. 3 Load the paper into the Tray 1 (Bypass Tray). 4 Press the Start key. A test pattern is printed. 5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 3/16 inches (4.2 mm). % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the Start key to print a test pattern. 6 Press [OK]. [Leading Edge Adjustment Tray] Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the each tray. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment Tray]. 2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted. 3 Load the paper into the selected paper tray. 4 Press the Start key. A test pattern is printed. 5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 3/16 inches (4.2 mm). % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the Start key to print a test pattern. 6 Press [OK]. a: 4.2 mm a: 4.2 mm 4 [Maintenance Menu] 4-30 bizhub 42/36 4.10 [Side Edge Adjustment] Adjust the print position at the side edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the each tray. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Side Edge Adjustment]. % To adjust the print position at the side edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Left ADJ Duplex]. 2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted. 3 Press the Start key. A test pattern is printed. 4 Check that the difference between (b) and (c) (distance between the side edge of paper and the print position) is 0 ± 1/16 inches (0 ± 1.0 mm). % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the Start key to print a test pattern. 5 Press [OK]. b-c: 0±1.0 mm bizhub 42/36 4-31 4.10 [Maintenance Menu] 4 [Max. Density Adjustment] This function is useful when the required printing result is not obtained, for example, the printing density is too high or too low. Scan the amount of toner adhered on an output test pattern, and adjust to the optimal density. 0 Before correcting the maximum density, fine-adjust the printing density (amount of toner) using [Max. Image Density Adj]. 0 After correcting the maximum density, be sure to also correct the gradation. 0 If the required printing density result is not obtained even after the maximum density has been corrected, contact your service representative. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Gradation Adjustment]. 2 Press [Max. Density Adjustment]. 3 Press [Print]. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Two test pattern are printed. 6 Press [Scan]. 7 Place the first printed test pattern on the Touch Panel in the orientation displayed in the Original Glass. 8 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming transparent. 9 Close the ADF. 10 Press the Start key. The test pattern is scanned. 11 Place the second printed test pattern on the Touch Panel in the orientation displayed in the Original Glass. 12 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming transparent. 13 Close the ADF. 14 Press the Start key. The test pattern is scanned. 4 [Maintenance Menu] 4-32 bizhub 42/36 4.10 [Gradation Adjustment] This function is useful when a print image is not reproduced with consistent density. Scan the density of an output test pattern and adjust to the optimal gradation. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Gradation Adjustment]. 2 Press [Gradation Adjustment]. 3 Press [Print]. 4 Press [OK]. 5 A test pattern is printed. 6 Press [Scan]. 7 Place the printed test pattern on the Touch Panel in the orientation displayed in the Original Glass. 8 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming transparent. 9 Close the ADF. 10 Press the Start key. The test pattern is scanned. bizhub 42/36 4-33 4.10 [Maintenance Menu] 4 4.10.3 [Drum Dry] Perform Drum Dry to prevent condensation around the photo conductor. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Drum Dry]. 4.10.4 [Finisher Settings] Adjust the width of the paper alignment plate to align the output sheets of paper. 0 This item is available if the Finisher FS-529 is installed. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Finisher Settings]. [Paper Alignment Plate Settings] Adjust the width of the paper alignment plate to align the output sheets of paper. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Maintenance Menu] ö [Finisher Settings] ö [Alignment Plate Position (Side)] or [Alignment Plate Position (Back)]. 2 Select the paper alignment plate position. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the position. 4 Press [OK]. Settings [Drum Dry] If the room temperature changes rapidly or the humidity is high, dew may form around the photo conductor in this machine, causing smudgy images to be generated. In this case, using this function removes dew condensation from around the photo conductor. Press [Execute], and press [OK] to start drum dry processing. 4 [Folder Settings] 4-34 bizhub 42/36 4.11 4.11 [Folder Settings] Specify the processing method of data saved in the hard disk. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Folder Settings]. Settings [Auto Del Interval] Select the length of time until files saved on the hard disk are automatically deleted. [Auto Document Delete Time] The administrator can specify the period between the time when documents are saved and the time when they are automatically deleted. [Document Hold Setting] Select whether or not to save documents when transmitting or printing them. Factory default [Auto Del Interval] [Erase Disabled] [Auto Document Delete Time] [1 Day] [Document Hold Setting] [Disable] bizhub 42/36 4-35 4.12 [Security Settings] 4 4.12 [Security Settings] Configure the settings for the restricting the functions of this machine for processing secret data. 4.12.1 [Administrator Password] Change the administrator password. 0 The administrator password can be entered using 0 through 8 digits. 0 If password rules are specified, an 8-digit password must be entered. 0 If you enter an incorrect administrator password a configured number of times, you are prohibited from using this machine. In this case, turn the power of the machine off and on again. 1 Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator Password]. 2 Press the upper [Password] button, enter a new administrator password, and press [OK]. 3 Press the lower [Password] button, enter a new administrator password, and press [OK]. 4 Press [OK]. The password is changed. dReference To configure password rule settings: Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Rules]. Factory default [Administrator Password] 12345678 4 [Security Settings] 4-36 bizhub 42/36 4.12 4.12.2 [Security Details] Configure security detail settings to restrict the functions of this machine. You can restrict the functions to enhance security. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details]. Settings [Password Rules] Configure whether to enable the password rules. When enabled, the restrictions are applied to the following passwords. The set passwords must be changed to ones that meet the conditions. • Administrator Password • User password • Account password • SNMP password • Secured Job password • Specify a password in 8 or more digits. • Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. • Only half-width symbols can be used. For some of the passwords, specification of "'", "\", """, "#", and "space" is restricted. • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be specified. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. [Registering and Changing Addr.] Select whether or not to prohibit editing of the address book. If [Restrict] is selected, the address book cannot be edited. [Manual Destination Input] Specify whether to allow manual destination input. If [Restrict] is selected, destinations for fax and scan operations cannot be entered directly. [Hide Personal Data] Select whether or not to display transmission destinations in the job log. If [ON] is selected, transmission destinations are not displayed. [Disable Job History Display] Select whether or not to display the communication log. If [ON] is selected, the communication log is not displayed. [Restrict Scan to USB] Select whether or not to prohibit the Scan to USB function. If [Restrict] is selected, the Scan to USB function cannot be used. Factory default [Password Rules] [OFF] [Registering and Changing Addr.] [Allow] [Manual Destination Input] [Allow] [Hide Personal Data] [OFF] [Disable Job History Display] [OFF] [Restrict Scan to USB] [Allow] bizhub 42/36 4-37 4.12 [Security Settings] 4 4.12.3 [Enhanced Security Mode] If Enhanced Security settings is enabled, various security functions are configured to allow you to ensure higher-level security of data management. The enhanced security mode cannot be enabled when any of the current functional settings conflict with the enhanced security mode. When the enhanced security mode is enabled, the settings required for the mode or the settings that have been forcibly switched when entering the mode cannot be changed. Required settings To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must have been configured. Settings to forcibly changed When the enhanced security is enabled, the following settings are forced. - The changed settings will not revert when the enhanced security mode is turned off. - After the password rules have been changed, any passwords that do not comply with the changed rules will not be authenticated. For details on the password rules, refer to page 4-36. Administrator Settings Required settings [Security] / [Authentication] / [General Settings] in PageScope Web Connection Select either [Device] or [External Server] (Active Directory) in [User Authentication]. [Security Settings] / [Administrator Password] Set a password complying with password rules. [Security Settings] / [Security Details] / [Password Rules] Select [ON]. [Security] / [PKI Settings] / [Device Certificate] in PageScope Web Connection Register a self-signed certificate in order to perform SSL communications. Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changed [Authentication Setting] / [User List Display Setting] Set to [OFF]. [Ethernet] / [TCP/IP] / [Telnet] Set to [Disable]. [Security] / [Authentication] / [General Settings] / [Public Access] in PageScope Web Connection Set to [Restrict]. [Security] / [Authentication] / [General Settings] / [Print without Authentication] in PageScope Web Connection Set to [Restrict]. [Security] / [PKI Settings] / [SSL/TLS Settings] / [SSL/TLS] in PageScope Web Connection Set to [Enable]. [Security] / [PKI Settings] / [SSL/TLS Settings] / [Encryption strength] in PageScope Web Connection Unable to be set to the setting that includes encryption strength lower than [AES-256, 3DES]. [Network] / [SNMP Settings] / [SNMPv1/v2c Settings] in PageScope Web Connection [Write] is set to [Disable]. [Network] / [SNMP Settings] / [SNMPv3 Settings] in PageScope Web Connection In [Write User], [Security Level] cannot be set to [None]. Specify both of auth-password and auth/privpassword in more than 8 digits. 4 [Security Settings] 4-38 bizhub 42/36 4.12 4.12.4 [HDD Settings] Configure hard disk settings. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [HDD Settings]. [Overwrite All Data] This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to contact your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the Power Switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, press [Execute], and then press [OK]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. Settings [Check HDD Capacity] Check the total capacity of the hard disk, the amount of space used and the amount of space available. [Overwrite All Data] Delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it. For details, refer to page 4-38. bizhub 42/36 4-39 4.12 [Security Settings] 4 Settings [Mode] Select the method for overwriting the data on the hard disk. [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers ö Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers ö Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers ö Verified [Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0x00 ö Overwritten with 0xff ö Overwritten with 0xaa ö Verified [Execute] Overwrite the hard disk. The following data is deleted. • Registered user authentication data • Registered account track data • Registered information for secured printing and saved files • Image files • SSL certificates • S/MIME certificates (digital certificates) Factory default [Mode] [Mode 1] 4 [Security Settings] 4-40 bizhub 42/36 4.12 4.12.5 [SSD Low-level Format] Overwrite and delete data stored in SSD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to contact your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the Power Switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, press [OK]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [SSD Low-level Format]. Settings [SSD Low-level Format] Overwrite and delete data stored in SSD. The following data is deleted. • Image files • Address book (E-mail address and telephone number destination data) • S/MIME certificates (Encryption certification) • Sent and received fax data bizhub 42/36 4-41 4.13 [Restore Defaults] 4 4.13 [Restore Defaults] Restore the network and system defaults. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Restore Defaults]. Settings [Restore Network] Resets the network settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. [Restore System] Resets the system settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. [Restore All] Resets all settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. 4 [HDD Format] 4-42 bizhub 42/36 4.14 4.14 [HDD Format] Format the hard disk. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [HDD Format]. Settings [User Area (Print)] Format the area where print jobs are stored. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. [User Area (Scan)] Format the area where scanned jobs are stored. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. [All] Format all the hard disk area. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. bizhub 42/36 4-43 4.15 [Paper Empty] 4 4.15 [Paper Empty] Select whether or not to display a warning message when paper runs out in a tray. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Paper Empty]. Settings [Tray 1] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 1 has run out of paper. [Tray 2] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 2 has run out of paper. [Tray 3] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 3has run out of paper. [Tray 4] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 4has run out of paper. This item is displayed if the Paper Feed Cabinet PC-211 is installed. [Tray 5] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 5 has run out of paper. This item is displayed if the Paper Feed Cabinet PC-211 is installed. Factory default [Tray 1] [OFF] [Tray 2] [OFF] [Tray 3] [OFF] [Tray 4] [OFF] [Tray 5] [OFF] 4 [Restriction Code Settings] 4-44 bizhub 42/36 4.16 4.16 [Restriction Code Settings] Disable registering of the applications, which work with OpenAPI and which we do not recommend, in the machine. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Restriction Code Settings]. Settings [Restriction Code Settings] Displays the inhibited codes of the OpenAPI connection applications. You can register new restriction codes using the [New] button. [New] Select this button to register new restriction codes of applications that work with OpenAPI. For restriction codes, you can enter data of Index, Vendor, and Application. Before registering the code, be sure to contact your service representative. bizhub 42/36 4-45 4.17 [Erase Job Log] 4 4.17 [Erase Job Log] Manually erase job logs. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Erase Job Log]. Settings [Erase Job Log] Click [OK] to erase the following types of log file. • Accounting log • Counting log • Audit log 4 [Fax Settings] 4-46 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18 [Fax Settings] Configure fax settings in the machine. Before connecting the machine to a telephone line to use the fax function, make these settings. Reference - To use the fax function, the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is required. - On how to use the fax function, refer to [User's Guide Fax Operations]. 4.18.1 [Sender Settings] Register sender information and fax ID that are included in TX documents that is to be printed on documents received by the recipient. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Sender Settings]. Settings [Sender] Allows you to register the sender name that is to be printed on documents received by the recipient as sender information. Enter a text using up to 30 characters. [Sender Fax No.] The registered fax number is printed as the sender's information on the document received by the recipient. Enter a sender fax number using 0-9, [+], and space (up to 20 characters). bizhub 42/36 4-47 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.2 [Header/Footer Settings] Specify the position on a page where sender information and fax ID that are printed on received documents. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Header/Footer Settings]. The following indicates where to print sender information or reception information. - [Inside Body Text]: The sender or receiving information is added so that it is overlaid on part of the original image before the fax is being sent. Settings [Header Position] Specify the position of the sender information to be added on a fax document sent from this machine. The added sender information is printed as a part of the image on the document received by the recipient. If you select [OFF], the sender information will not be added. [OFF] is not displayed if [Fax Target] is set to [U.S.A] or [Hong Kong]. [Fax TX Header Name] Specify the items to be added as the sender information. [Footer Position] Specify the position of the reception information (reception time and reception number) to be printed on a document received by this machine. If you select [RX Ft. OFF], the reception information will not be printed. Factory default [Header Position] [Outside Body Text] [Fax TX Header Name] [ON] [Footer Position] [RX Ft. OFF] FROM:MFP01 TO:123456789 2011/04/25 13:22:11 #138 P.001/001 4 [Fax Settings] 4-48 bizhub 42/36 4.18 - [Outside Body Text]: The sender or receiving information is added to the outside of the original image area before the fax is being sent. - [OFF], [RX Ft. OFF]: The sender or receiving information is not added. [OFF] is not displayed if [Fax Target] is set to [U.S.A] or [Hong Kong]. The following indicate how sender information is printed. - [ON]: The sender name, destination name (TO: xxxxx), transmission start date and time, transmission number, and the number of pages are added as sender information. - [OFF]: The sender name, fax ID of this machine, transmission start date and time, transmission number, and the number of pages are added as sender information. FROM:MFP01 TO:123456789 2011/04/25 13:22:11 #138 P.001/001 FROM:MFP01 TO:123456789 2011/04/25 13:22:11 #138 P.001/001 FROM:MFP01 987654321 2011/04/25 13:22:11 #138 P.001/001 bizhub 42/36 4-49 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.3 [Comm. Settings] Configure items related to fax transmission and reception. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Comm. Settings]. Settings [PB/DP] Select one of the dialing methods from PB/10pps/20pps. [RX Mode] Select a receive mode. • [Auto RX]: Automatically receives faxes. • [Manual RX]: If you expect frequent phone calls, for example if an external telephone is connected to this machine, set this mode to Manual RX. • [DRPD]: If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax. If [DRPD] is selected, select the ring pattern for faxing with [Ring Pattern]. [Number of RX Call Rings] Set the number of incoming call rings. (The setting range varies depending on the local standard.) [Redial] Set the number of redials (for busy, no-answer, and so on). (The setting range varies depending on the local standard.) [Redial Interval] Set redial intervals. (The setting range varies depending on the local standard.) [Line Monitor] Select whether the line monitoring tone is produced during communication. [OFF]: No line monitoring tone is produced. [Until Connection Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the connection with the destination has been completed after dialing. [Until Transmission Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the fax transmission has been completed after dialing. [Line Monitor Volume] Select the volume of the line monitoring tone. [Ring Pattern] Select the ring pattern for faxing when [RX Mode] is set to [DRPD]. [Manual RX V.34 OFF] Select whether or not V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception. Factory default [PB/DP] This value varies depending on the area. [RX Mode] [Auto RX] [Line Monitor] [OFF] [Line Monitor Volume] [Low] [Ring Pattern] [Double] [Manual RX V.34 OFF] [No] 4 [Fax Settings] 4-50 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.4 [Function Settings] Configure the printing method for RX operations. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Function Settings]. Settings [Inch Paper Priority] Specify [ON] to select inch size paper for printing received documents priory to other paper size. [Paper Priority] • [Auto Select]: Print paper is automatically selected. • [Fixed Size]: Paper of the specified size is used for printing. • [Size Priority]: Paper of the size specified as the preferred size is used for printing. If no preferred size is specified, paper of the closest size is used for printing. [Print Paper Size] Specify paper size for printing received documents. The initial setting varies depending on the setting for [Inch Paper Priority]. dReference To enable the setting for the print paper size, set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto]. [Tray Selection for RX Print] If you want to fix the paper tray used to print received faxes, select the paper tray. The available tray types vary depending on the options that are installed. [Min. Reduction for RX Print] Specify the reduction ratio for received document to Full Size or a value between 87 and 96%. If the reduction rate for RX print is set to [100%], the items below are set as follows: • [Paper Priority]: [Auto Select] • [Tray Selection for RX Print]: [Auto] • [Print Separate Fax Pages]: [OFF] [Print Separate Fax Pages] If this item is set to [ON], a document longer than the standard size is printed on separate pages. • This item does not appear if [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON]. [Duplex Print (RX)] If Duplex Print (RX) is set to [ON], the original received is printed on both sides of the paper. • This item does not appear if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]. Factory default [Inch Paper Priority] [OFF] [Paper Priority] [Auto Select] [Print Paper Size] [Letter], [A4] [Tray Selection for RX Print] [Auto] [Min. Reduction for RX Print] [96] [Print Separate Fax Pages] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-51 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.5 [Fax Function Settings] Configure the fax function settings. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Fax Function Settings]. [Duplex Print (RX)] [OFF] Factory default Settings [F-Code TX] Specify whether to use F-Code TX. • F-Code TX provides two methods: confidential transmission and relay transmission. [Dest. Check Display Func.] Specify whether to display the list of the specified destinations when sending a fax. [Confirm Addr (TX)] When specifying a fax destination with direct input, a screen appears prompting you to enter the fax number again for confirmation. Entering the fax number twice prevents one from entering incorrect destinations. • When Confirm Address (TX) is enabled, you cannot specify a destination using [Off-Hook]. You cannot specify the fax address using [Log] either. [Confirm Addr (Register)] When the user specify a fax destination when the user registers a program, configures the fax forwarding settings, or registers a one-touch destination, the user must enter the destination twice for confirmation. By entering twice, you can prevent the destination from being incorrectly entered. [Restrict Fax TX] Select whether to restrict fax transmissions. If [ON] is selected, the fax transmission function is unavailable in the fax screen. [Restrict Fax RX] Select whether to restrict fax receptions. If [ON] is selected, the fax reception function is unavailable in the fax screen. [Restrict PC-Fax TX] Select whether to restrict PC-Fax transmissions. If [ON] is selected, the PC-Fax transmission function is unavailable. [Restrict Internet Fax TX] Select whether to restrict Internet Fax transmissions. If [ON] is selected, the internet fax transmission function is unavailable in the fax screen. [Restrict Internet Fax RX] Select whether to restrict Internet Fax receptions. If [ON] is selected, the internet fax reception function is unavailable in the fax screen. Factory default [F-Code TX] [ON] [Dest. Check Display Func.] [OFF] [Confirm Addr (TX)] [OFF] 4 [Fax Settings] 4-52 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.6 [Memory RX] Specify whether to use Memory RX Setting function. To use the function, specify a password for print. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Memory RX]. The following items are not available if Memory RX Settings are configured. - PC-Fax RX Settings - Forward TX Settings - Nighttime RX Settings [Confirm Addr (Register)] [ON] [Restrict Fax TX] [OFF] [Restrict Fax RX] [OFF] [Restrict PC-Fax TX] [OFF] [Restrict Internet Fax TX] [OFF] [Restrict Internet Fax RX] [OFF] Factory default Settings [Memory RX] Specify whether to use Memory RX Setting function. If [ON] is selected, received fax data is stored in the memory and is not automatically printed. [Password] Specify the password to be entered from the ten key pad when outputting the data stored in the memory. (8 digits or less) Factory default [Memory RX] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-53 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.7 [Closed Network RX Password] Specify whether to use the Closed Network RX function. To use the function, specify a password that is used for Closed Network RX. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Closed Network RX Password]. Reference - Closed Network RX is only available when the receiver has password transmission function. Settings [Enable] Specify whether to use the Closed Network RX function. [Password] Specify a password using the keypad. (up to 4 digits) Factory default [Enable] [No] 4 [Fax Settings] 4-54 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.8 [Forward TX Settings] You can forward received documents to a preset recipient. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Forward TX Settings]. The following items are not available if Forward TX Setting is configured. - PC-Fax RX Settings - Memory RX - Nighttime RX Settings Reference - If a document with a resolution of 300 e 300 dpi is received as an Internet Fax, it can not be forwarded to a fax (G3) destination. In this case, this machine prints the document. If [Confirm Addr (Register)] is [ON], a screen for entering the fax number again appears after you press [OK]. Enter the fax number and then press [OK]. dReference For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 4-51. Settings [Forward TX Setting] Specify whether to use the Forward TX function. [Forwarding Address] Allows you to enter a destination (fax number or E-mail address) using up to 38 digits. It is also possible to select it from the address book. [Forward & Print] [Forward & Print]: Received document are forwarded and printed on this machine. [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)]: Received documents are forwarded and, if forwarding fails, are printed on the machine. Factory default [Forward TX Setting] [OFF] [Forward & Print] [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)] bizhub 42/36 4-55 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.9 [Remote RX Settings] Send a request of reception from an external telephone to the machine by entering the remote reception number from the external telephone. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Remote RX Settings]. Settings [Remote RX Enabled] Select whether or not the remote reception function is used. [Remote RX No.] Type in the remote reception number (2 digits) for performing remote reception. Factory default [Remote RX Enabled] [OFF] 4 [Fax Settings] 4-56 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.10 [PC-Fax RX Settings] Specify whether to use the PC-Fax RX function. To use the function, configure the following items. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [PC-Fax RX Settings]. Reference - The documents received by fax are saved in the TIFF format. The following items are not available if PC-Fax RX Setting is configured. - Forward TX Settings - Memory RX - Nighttime RX Settings Settings [PC-Fax RX Setting] Specify whether to use the PC-Fax RX function. [PC-Fax RX Print] Specify whether to print a fax after receiving. Factory default [PC-Fax RX Setting] [OFF] [PC-Fax RX Print] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-57 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.11 [Nighttime RX Settings] Specify whether to use the Nighttime RX function. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Nighttime RX Settings]. The following items are not available if Nighttime RX Setting is configured. - Forward TX Settings - Memory RX - PC-Fax RX Settings Settings [Night Fax RX Print] If [ON] is selected, printing of documents received during the night hours are forbidden. All documents received during the night hours are printed after the period. [Night RX Start Time] Specify the start time for the night using the key pad. [Night RX End Time] Specify the end time for the night using the key pad. Factory default [Night Fax RX Print] [OFF] [Night RX Start Time] [00:00] [Night RX End Time] [00:00] 4 [Fax Settings] 4-58 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.12 [PBX Connection Settings] Specify the PBX line connection method. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [PBX Connection Settings]. Settings [PBX Function] Select whether or not a PBX line is connected. [PBX Number] Specify an access code for an outside line. An access code refers to a number used to connect to an outside line, such as a number beginning with a zero ("0"). Outside line numbers specified here are dialed, after which fax numbers registered with the address book or program are dialed. Specify an access code (0 to 9999) using the keypad. Factory default [PBX Function] [OFF] bizhub 42/36 4-59 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.13 [Fax Report] Specify a way to output reports. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Fax Report]. Settings [Activity Report] Configure output settings for Activity Report. To output the report, configure the following settings. [Output Settings] Specify the time when the report is to be output. [Every 100 comm.]: Outputs the report for every 100 communication jobs. [Every Day]: Outputs the report every day at a certain time. [100/ Daily]: Outputs the latest 100 communication jobs every day at a certain time. [No]: Is not output. [Output Time Setting] Allows you to specify this item if [Every Day] or [100/ Daily] is selected for [Output Settings]. Specify the time when to output the report. [Output Limit Setting] If [Output Settings] is set to [Every Day] or [100/ Daily], select your output preference for Activity Report. [Journal 100]: Outputs the information for the 100 most recent communication jobs. [Within 24 Hours]: Outputs the information for a maximum 100 communication jobs within the past 24 hours. [TX Result Report] Configure the output settings for TX Result Report. Select output conditions. [TX Result Report Image] Specify whether or not an image of the first page of the document is outputted in the TX Results Report. [TX Reserve] Configure the output settings for TX Reserve Report. Specify whether to output the report. [PC-Fax TX Error Report] Configure the output settings for PC-Fax TX Error Report. Specify whether to output the report. [Broadcast Report] Configure the output settings for Broadcast Report. Specify whether to output the report. [Broadcast Result Report] Configure the output settings for Broadcast Result Report. Select a way to output the report. • With [Mode Once] selected, a broadcast result report is output only when a transmission still fails after a redial attempt. No report is output when transmission is completed successfully. [TX Result Report Screen] Configure display settings for TX Result Report Screen. Specify whether to display the report. [I-Fax RX Error Report] Specify whether or not to output a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails. 4 [Fax Settings] 4-60 bizhub 42/36 4.18 4.18.14 [List Print] Specify whether or not to outputs a list of settings related to faxes. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [List Print]. 4.18.15 [Fax Target] Select the country where this machine is installed. Select the setting when installing the machine. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Fax Target]. Factory default [Output Settings] [Every 100 comm.] [Output Time Setting] [00:00] [Output Limit Setting] [Journal 100] [TX Result Report] [If TX Fails] [TX Result Report Image] [OFF] [TX Reserve] [ON] [PC-Fax TX Error Report] [ON] [Broadcast Report] [ON] [Broadcast Result Report] [All Dest.] [TX Result Report Screen] [OFF] [I-Fax RX Error Report] [ON] bizhub 42/36 4-61 4.18 [Fax Settings] 4 4.18.16 [Fax Factory Default] Select whether or not to reset the fax related settings to factory default. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Fax Factory Default]. 4.18.17 [Fax Image Initialized] Select whether or not to initialize fax image data stored in the machine's memory. % Press the Utility/Counter key ö [Admin Settings] ö [Fax Settings] ö [Fax Image Initialized]. Reference - After the completion of initialization, the machine is rebooted. - Registered addresses are not deleted. 4 [Fax Settings] 4-62 bizhub 42/36 4.18 5 Configuring from PageScope Web Connection bizhub 42/36 5-3 5.1 [System] tab 5 5 Configuring from PageScope Web Connection This section describes the operations for the administrator in PageScope Web Connection, device management utility. For the basic operations of the utility and the operations in user mode, refer to [User's Guide Print Operations], [User's Guide Scan Operations], or [User's Guide Fax Operations]. For details on how to log in to the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, refer to page 3-6. In PageScope Web Connection, there are menus that you can specify from the Control Panel. For these menus, the pages you can refer to are shown in the tables. 5.1 [System] tab This page allows you to configure several user- and printer-specific items. 5.1.1 [Device Information] [Summary] The current status of the machine is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Summary]. 5 [System] tab 5-4 bizhub 42/36 5.1 [Paper Source] The information on the installed paper feed trays and the paper used in the machine is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Paper Source]. [Output Tray] The information on the exit tray(s) installed in the machine and their status is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Output Tray]. bizhub 42/36 5-5 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Storage] The status of the hard disk installed in the machine is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Storage]. [Interface Information] The information on the network specified in the machine is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Interface Information]. 5 [System] tab 5-6 bizhub 42/36 5.1 [Consumables] The information on the machine's consumables is available. Select [System] ö [Device Information] ö [Consumables]. 5.1.2 [Counter] The counter information on the machine are available. [Total Counter] Number of pages (counting each side printed as one page) printed in the machine is available according to type of function. Select [System] ö [Counter] ö [Total Counter]. bizhub 42/36 5-7 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Sheets Printed by Paper Size] Number of pages (counting each side printed as one page) printed in the machine is available according to size of paper. Select [System] ö [Counter] ö [Sheets Printed by Paper Size]. 5 [System] tab 5-8 bizhub 42/36 5.1 [Sheets Printed by Paper Type] Number of pages (counting each side printed as one page) printed in the machine is available according to type of paper. Select [System] ö [Counter] ö [Sheets Printed by Paper Type]. 5.1.3 [Online Assistance] The information you wish to provide users with the help function are specified. Select [System] ö [Online Assistance] ö [Online Assistance]. Item Description [Contact Name] Enter the name of the person or organization responsible for providing assistance with the machine. (Up to 63 characters) [Contact Information] Enter the contact name information for the machine such as the URL (up to 127 characters). [Product Help URL] Enter the URL of the Web page for product information (up to 127 characters). [Corporate URL] Enter the URL of the Web page for the manufacturer (up to 127 characters). [Supplies and Accessories] Enter consumables supplier information (up to 127 characters). [Contact Utility Link] Enter the link to the Device Management Utilities (up to 127 characters). [Driver URL] Enter the driver storage location (up to 127 characters). bizhub 42/36 5-9 5.1 [System] tab 5 5.1.4 [Import/Export] You can save (export) the configuration information being stored in this machine to the computer. You can also write (import) the information from the computer to this machine. (If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, this menu item will not be displayed.) [Job Log] You can delete and download log data (accounting log, counting log, or audit log) of the jobs that were executed in this machine. (This page appears when [Job Log] (in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] page) is set to [Enable].) Select [System] ö [Import/Export] ö [Job Log]. Item Description [Export] Specify the number of job logs to be retrieved. The specified number of job logs is retrieved from the most recent job logs. If the specified number of job logs is larger than the number of job logs available, all job logs are retrieved. When downloading job log data, click [Export]. [Clear] Click to delete all job log information. 5 [System] tab 5-10 bizhub 42/36 5.1 [Authentication] User registration information and authentication data can be imported or exported. (This page appears when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [Device] or [External Server].) Select [System] ö [Import/Export] ö [Authentication]. Reference - You cannot edit exported files. Item Description [Import] Imports the registered user authentication information to the device. If the optional authentication device is used on the machine, authentication data can be imported. [Export] Exports the registered user authentication information to the computer. If the optional authentication device is used on the machine, authentication data can be exported. [Clear] Click to delete user authentication/account track data. bizhub 42/36 5-11 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Address] Addresses can be imported or exported. Select [System] ö [Import/Export] ö [Address]. Reference - You cannot edit exported files. Item Description [Import] Click to send to the machine the file containing the registered destination information. [Export] Click to export to the computer all destination information registered on the machine. [Clear] Click to delete all destination information registered on the machine. 5 [System] tab 5-12 bizhub 42/36 5.1 5.1.5 [Date/Time Settings] Specify the date and time of the clock built into this machine. [Manual Settings] Date and time can be set manually. Select [System] ö [Date/Time Settings] ö [Manual Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Year] Enter the year. page 4-4 [Month] Enter the month. [Day] Enter the day. [Hour] Enter the hour. [Minute] Enter the minute. [Time Zone] Specify the time difference from GMT. bizhub 42/36 5-13 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Time Adjustment Settings] Time adjustment that uses NTP (Network Time Protocol) is available. Select [System] ö [Date/Time Settings] ö [Time Adjustment Settings]. Item Description [Time Adjustment] Select whether or not the time is automatically adjusted with NTP. [NTP Server Address] Enter the NTP server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Enter a port number. Default setting: 123 [Time Zone] Specify the time difference from GMT. [Adjustment Time] Shows the last modification date and time. 5 [System] tab 5-14 bizhub 42/36 5.1 [Daylight Saving Time Settings] Specify the daylight saving time. Select [System] ö [Date/Time Settings] ö [Daylight Saving Time Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Daylight Saving Time] Select whether or not daylight saving time is observed. page 4-4 bizhub 42/36 5-15 5.1 [System] tab 5 5.1.6 [Machine Settings] Register the administrator information and the address of this machine. Select [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Device Name] Enter the device name (up to 127 characters). This name is used as a part of an Internet fax subject name. dReference Use alphanumeric characters and symbols. [Device Location] Enter the installation location of this machine (up to 127 characters). [Device Information] Enter the information of this machine (up to 127 characters). [Administrator Name] Enter the administrator name of this machine (up to 127 characters). page 4-6 [Administrator E-mail Address] Enter the administrator's E-mail address. If the administrator's E-mail address is omitted, you will not be able to send an E-mail. page 4-6 [Do Startup Page] Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. page 4-20 [Unit of Measure] Select the measurement units used to indicate lengths. page 4-21 [Energy Saver Time] Enter a time interval before transition to the Sleep mode since the last operation of this machine. page 4-4 [Low Power] Set whether or not exchange to the low power mode when this machine is not being operated. page 4-4 [Low Power Time] Set a time period before switching to the low power mode when this machine is not being operated. page 4-4 [Job Log] Select whether or not the Job Log function is used. [Hide Personal Information] Select whether or not the names of printed files ([Document Name]) are displayed in the [Job] tab. 5 [System] tab 5-16 bizhub 42/36 5.1 5.1.7 [ROM Version] Check the ROM version of this machine. Select [System] ö [ROM Version] ö [ROM Version]. 5.1.8 [Maintenance] You can initialize the settings (to the factory defaults), and reset the controller. [Clear Settings] You can initialize the network settings and system settings. Select [System] ö [Maintenance] ö [Clear Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [System Settings] Resets the system settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. page 4-41 [Network Settings] Resets the network settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. [All Settings] Resets all settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the machine is automatically restarted. bizhub 42/36 5-17 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Reset] If you click [Reset], the controller is reset. Select [System] ö [Maintenance] ö [Reset]. 5.1.9 [Notification Settings] You can send the setting information being managed on this machine to the specified destination. [Status Notification Settings] You can send the status of this machine to the specified destination. Select [System] ö [Notification Settings] ö [Status Notification Settings]. 5 [System] tab 5-18 bizhub 42/36 5.1 Item Description [IP Address] [Notification Address] Enter the destination IP address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Enter the port number of the SNMP trap. Default setting: 123 [Community Name] Enter a community name (up to 15 characters). [IPX Address] [Notification Address] Enter the IPX address using an 8-digit hexadecimal value. [Node Address] Enter the node address using a 12-digit hexadecimal value. [Community Name] Enter a community name (up to 15 characters). [E-mail Address] [Notification Address] Enter the destination E-mail address (up to 320 characters). [Alert] [Paper Empty] Sends a notification when the paper tray is empty. [Paper Jam] Sends a notification when a page has been jammed. [Maintenance] Sends a notification when the periodical inspection is required. [Toner Out] Sends a notification when the toner is empty. [Output Tray Full] Sends a notification when the capacity of the output tray has been exceeded. [Fuser Unit End] Sends a notification when the fusing unit needs to be replaced. [Operator Call] Sends a notification when a error has occurred. [Service Call] Sends a notification when a service call has occurred. [Job Complete] Sends a notification when the job has finished. [Job Error] Sends a notification when the job has ended abnormally. bizhub 42/36 5-19 5.1 [System] tab 5 [Total Counter Notification Settings] You can send the counter information being managed on this machine to the specified destination by E-mail. Select [System] ö [Notification Settings] ö [Total Counter Notification Settings]. Item Description [Model Name] Enter a model name to be included in the notification mail message (up to 20 characters). [Schedule Setting] Specify the conditions for the notification schedule. Schedules 1 and 2 can be registered with different settings. [Register Notification Address] Enter the destination E-mail address (up to 320 characters). In addition, select a notification schedule. 5 [System] tab 5-20 bizhub 42/36 5.1 5.1.10 [Sender Registration] Register sender information that is included in Fax TX documents that is to be printed on documents received by the recipient. Select [System] ö [Sender Registration] ö [Sender Registration]. Item Description Control Panel [Sender] Allows you to register the sender name that is to be printed on documents received by recipient as sender information (up to 30 characters). page 4-46 bizhub 42/36 5-21 5.2 [Security] tab 5 5.2 [Security] tab From the [Security] tab, all settings related to user authentication and network security can be specified. 5.2.1 [Authentication] [General Settings] User authentication/account track settings can be configured. If a setting is changed for any of the following parameters, all registered user/account information as well as job data/images related to users/accounts are cleared. - User Authentication - Account Track - Account Track Method - Number of Counters Assigned for Users However, if the user authentication method is changed ([Device] or [External Server]), the user/account information is not cleared. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, items other than [Print without Authentication] are not displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. Item Description [User Authentication] Select whether or not user authentication is performed. [Device]: Select this setting for user authentication to be performed by the machine. [External Server]: Select this setting for user authentication to be performed by an external server. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. This setting is required when select [Device] or [External Server] from [User Authentication]. [Ticket Hold Time (Active Directory)] Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. This setting is required when select [External Server] from [User Authentication]. [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. 5 [Security] tab 5-22 bizhub 42/36 5.2 If Enhanced security mode is enabled, restriction is applied as follows. - You cannot select [Off] in [User Authentication]. - You cannot select [Allow] and [Allow (without Login] in [Public Access]. - You cannot select [Allow] in [Print without Authentication]. [Account Track Method] To use the account track function, select its authentication method. This setting is required when you only use the account track function. [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. Once you specify the account name of the user at user registration, you will be able to log in by entering only the user name. If you have omitted the account name, the user must specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. This setting is required when set [ON] for [Account Track] when select [Device] or [External Server] from [User Authentication]. [Number of Counters Assigned for Users] Enter a number of user counters to be assigned if user authentication and account track are enabled. You can aggregate the counter by user or account track, and assign up to 1,000 counters to users and account tracks. For example, if the number of user counters to be assigned is set to 950, you can register up to 50 account tracks. This setting is required when set [ON] for [Account Track] when select [Device] or [External Server] from [User Authentication]. [Print without Authentication] Select the way in which the machine functions when it receives a job without authentication information (a print job sent with user authentication or account track disabled in the printer driver) or a public user job. [Allow]: Select this option to print the received job. [Restrict]: Select this option to delete the received job. This setting is required when select [Device] or [External Server] from [User Authentication]. Item Description bizhub 42/36 5-23 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [User List] (This page appears when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [Device] or [External Server].) (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [User List]. Item Description [New Registration] Click to register a new user. [Search for Number] Select the range of user registration numbers ([No.]) to be displayed. [Edit] Click to edit the information for the registered user. [Delete] Click to delete the registered user. 5 [Security] tab 5-24 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [User List] (New Registration/Edit) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [User List] ö [New Registration] or [Edit]. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number for the new user. [User Name] Enter a user name (up to 64 characters). A user name that already exists cannot be specified. "Public" cannot be specified as the user name. [External Server Name] Displays the name of the external server that performed authentication. This item appears when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [External Server]. [E-mail Address] Enter the E-mail address of the user (up to 320 characters). This item cannot enter when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [External Server]. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. Displays this item when editing the registration information. [Password] Enter a password (up to 64 characters, excluding space and "). This item cannot enter when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [External Server]. [Account Track Number] Enter an account track number of the user. Before you specify an account track number, you must register the account. This item is displayed if user authentication and account track are synchronized. If you have omitted the account track number, the user must specify the user and account name when the user log in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. If the account information is changed after the account track number has been specified, the user and the account will be dissociated. [Function Permission] Select whether to permit [Copy], [Scan to Network], [Scan to HDD], [Scan to USB Memory], [Fax], [Print], and [Manual Destination Input]. [Output Permission (Scan)] Select whether to allow images to be scanned in color. bizhub 42/36 5-25 5.2 [Security] tab 5 Reference - You cannot register a password less than eight characters when [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Rules] is set to [ON] in the [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel. If a user password containing less than eight characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains eight characters before setting [Password Rules] to [ON]. - If you permit the public user access, you can configure the Function Permission for the public user. For details, refer to page 5-31. - If you specify a user whose name includes " (double quotation mark) from the printer driver and try to print a job or save it into a HDD when user authentication is enabled on this machine, login error occurs on the machine and the print job is deleted. - When [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict] in [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless of the setting of this function. [Account Track List] (This page appears when [Account Track] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [On].) (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [Account Track List]. [Max. Allowance Set] Specify the maximum number of pages that can be printed. To specify the limit, select the appropriate check box and enter the desired limit value. [Authentication Device Settings] Shows whether or not an authentication device has been registered. Item Description Item Description [New Registration] Click to register a new account. [Search for Number] Select the range of account registration numbers ([No.]) to be displayed. [Edit] Click to edit the information for the registered account. [Delete] Click to delete the registered account. 5 [Security] tab 5-26 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Account Track List] (New Registration/Edit) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [Account Track List] ö [New Registration] or [Edit]. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number for the new account. [Account Name] Enter an account name (up to 8 characters, excluding space and "). An account name that already exists cannot be specified. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. Displays this item when editing the registration information. [Password] Enter a password (up to 8 characters, excluding space and "). [Output Permission (Scan)] Select whether to allow images to be scanned in color. [Max. Allowance Set] Specify the maximum number of pages that can be printed. To specify the limit, select the appropriate check box and enter the desired limit value. bizhub 42/36 5-27 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [External Server List] (This page appears when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [External Server].) (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [External Server List]. Item Description [Default] Select the default external server. [Edit] Click to edit the information for the registered external server. [Delete] Click to delete the registered external server. 5 [Security] tab 5-28 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [External Server List] (Edit) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [External Server List] ö [Edit]. Item Description [External Server (Active Directory)] [No.] Displays the registration number. [Name] Enter the name of an external server (up to 32 characters). [Server Type] Displays the external server type. [Default Domain Name] Enter the default domain name of Active Directory (up to 64 characters). [External Server (NTLM)] [No.] Displays the registration number. [Name] Enter the name of an external server (up to 32 characters). [Server Type] Select the new external server type. [NTLMv2] is applied on the Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4) and later. [Default Domain Name] Enter the NTLM default domain name (up to 64 characters). The default domain name must be uppercase letters. [External Server (NDS)] [No.] Displays the registration number. [Name] Enter the name of an external server (up to 32 characters). [Server Type] Displays the external server type. [Default Tree] Enter the default NDS tree name (up to 63 characters). [Default Context] Enter the default NDS context name (up to 191 characters). bizhub 42/36 5-29 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [External Server (LDAP)] [No.] Displays the registration number. [Name] Enter the name of an external server (up to 32 characters). [Server Type] Displays the external server type. [Server Address] Specify the LDAP server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Enter a port number. Default setting: 389 [SSL] Select whether or not SSL is used. [Port Number (SSL)] Enter a SSL port number. Default setting: 636 [Search Base] Enter the search starting point in the directory structure under the LDAP server (up to 255 characters). This search function also covers subdirectories under the entered starting point. [Timeout] Enter the timeout period for LDAP search. [Authentication Method] Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server. Select the same authentication method as that used on the LDAP server. [Search Attribute] Enter attributes to be used for search of user account (up to 64 characters, the only symbol allowed is a hyphen (-)). Item Description 5 [Security] tab 5-30 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Default Function Permission] Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [Default Function Permission]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) Reference - When [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict] in [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless of the setting of this function. Item Description [Copy] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. If a user not registered on this machine is authenticated on the external server, the user will be registered on this machine with the function permissions that you configure here. Once the function permissions of a user have been registered on this machine, you can edit them in [User Registration]. [Scan to Network] [Scan to HDD] [Scan to USB Memory] [Fax] [Print] [Manual Destination Input] bizhub 42/36 5-31 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Public User Registration] (This page appears when [Public Access] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [Allow] or [Allow (without Login].) (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [Public User Registration]. Reference - When [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict] in [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel, the user cannot manually enter the address regardless of the setting of this function. Item Description [Function Permission] Specify whether to permit [Copy], [Scan to Network], [Scan to HDD], [Scan to USB Memory], [Fax], [Print], and [Manual Destination Input]. [Output Permission (Scan)] Select whether to allow images to be scanned in color. 5 [Security] tab 5-32 bizhub 42/36 5.2 5.2.2 [ID & Print Settings] [ID & Print Settings] can be configured. (This page appears when [User Authentication] (in the [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings] page) is set to [Device] or [External Server].) Select [Security] ö [ID & Print Settings] ö [ID & Print Settings]. dReference For details on the ID & print function, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Description [ID & Print] Select whether to process all print jobs requested from a registered user as ID & print jobs. If you select [Enable], all print jobs requested from a registered user are processed as ID & print jobs even when [ID & Print] is not enabled on the printer driver. If you select [Disable], print jobs are processed as ID & print jobs only when [ID & Print] is enabled on the printer driver. A print job requested from a registered user is processed as a normal one if [ID & Print] is not enabled on the printer driver. [Public User] Select the operation required when receiving a job without authentication information (a job for which printing is instructed while user authentication or account track is not enabled on the printer driver) or receiving a public user's job. If you select [Print Immediately], the received job is printed as it is. If you select [Save], the received job is saved in the hard disk. [Default Operation Selection] Select the default operation you want to apply after Authentication has been completed on the authentication unit (success in login). If you select [Begin Printing], ID & print jobs are executed after authentication has been completed. If you select [Access Basic Screen], you can log in to the basic window after authentication has been completed. In this case, ID & print jobs are not executed. bizhub 42/36 5-33 5.2 [Security] tab 5 5.2.3 [Authentication Device Settings] IC card authentication settings can be configured. (This page appears when the optional Authentication Unit AU-201 is installed in this machine.) [General Settings] Select [Security] ö [Authentication Device Settings] ö [General Settings]. Reference - When a setting on this menu is changed, the card information saved on the machine is erased. Item Description [Authentication Type] Select the authentication method. Select [Card Authentication] to authenticate only by IC card reading. Select [Card Authentication+Password] to authenticate by IC card reading and password entry. [IC Card Type] Displays the types of cards supported by the loadable driver. 5 [Security] tab 5-34 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [FeliCa (SSFC) Settings] (If the optional Authentication Unit AU-201 is installed and FeliCa (SSFC) is supported, this menu is displayed.) Select [Security] ö [Authentication Device Settings] ö [FeliCa (SSFC) Settings]. Reference - When a setting on this menu is changed, the card information saved on the machine is erased. Item Description [Room Code] Specify the room number. Default Setting: 0 [Floor Code] Specify the floor number. Default Setting: 0 [Building Code] Specify the building number. Default Setting: 0 [Area Code] Specify the region number. Default Setting: 0 [Security Level] Select the security level. Default Setting: 0 [Company Identification Code] Specify the company identification code. [Company Code] Specify the company code. bizhub 42/36 5-35 5.2 [Security] tab 5 5.2.4 [PKI Settings] You can configure SSL communication settings and device certificate. [Device Certificate] Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Device Certificate]. Item Description [New Registration] Register a new device certificate. Select a registration method: creating a self-signed certificate, requesting an issuance of a certificate, or importing a certificate. Up to 10 certificates can be registered. If 10 certificates have already been registered, [New Registration] does not appear. [Default] Specify the default device certificate. When not using device certificates depending on protocols, specify the default device certificate. [Issued By] Displays an issuer of a device certificate. [Issued To] Displays a destination to issue a device certificate to. [Expiration Date] Displays the validity period of a device certificate. [Detail] Enables you to confirm detailed information about a device certificate. [Edit] Enables you to remove or export a device certificate if it is installed. If [Requesting] is displayed in [Issued To] of the device certificate, you can install a CA-issued certificate in this machine. 5 [Security] tab 5-36 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Device Certificate] (New Registration) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Device Certificate] ö [Device Certificate] (New Registration). Item Description [Create a Self-signed Certificate] [Common Name] Displays the IP address or domain name of this machine. This item shows the set value used to access this machine. [Organization] Enter an organization or association name (up to 63 characters). [Organization Unit] Enter an account name (up to 63 characters). You can also specify a null. [Locality] Enter a city, ward, town, or village name (up to 127 characters). [State/Province] Enter a prefecture name (up to 127 characters). [Country] Enter the country name with a country code defined in ISO03166 (2 characters). United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia: AU, The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE, Japan: JP, France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU [E-mail Address] Enter the E-mail address of the administrator (up to 128 characters, excluding a space). [Validity Start Date] Displays the validity period starting date. [Validity Period] Enter the validity period of a certificate with the number of days that have elapsed since the starting date. bizhub 42/36 5-37 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Request a Certificate] [Common Name] Displays the IP address or domain name of this machine. This item shows the set value used to access this machine. [Organization] Enter an organization or association name (up to 63 characters). [Organization Unit] Enter an account name (up to 63 characters). You can also specify a null. [Locality] Enter a city, ward, town, or village name (up to 127 characters). [State/Province] Enter a prefecture name (up to 127 characters). [Country] Enter the country name with a country code defined in ISO03166 (2 characters). United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia: AU, The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE, Japan: JP, France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU [E-mail Address] Enter the E-mail address of the administrator (up to 128 characters, excluding a space). [Import a Certificate] [File] Specify the file name of the device certificate to be imported. Click [Browse] to specify where to save a certificate file. [Password] Enter the password to decode the encrypted certificate file (up to 32 characters). [Retype Password] Reenter the password for confirmation (up to 32 characters). Item Description 5 [Security] tab 5-38 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Device Certificate] (Request a Certificate) Displays request data to create [Request a Certificate]. [Device Certificate] (Install a Certificate) Ask the CA to issue a certificate, and install the certificate sent from the CA in this machine. Item Description [Request a Certificate] Displays request data to issue a device certificate. Send the displayed character string to the CA. [Save] Click this button to save certificate signing request data in your computer as a file. Item Description [File] Select the data sent from the CA. [Apply] Click this button to install a certificate. bizhub 42/36 5-39 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Device Certificate] (Edit) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Device Certificate] ö [Edit]. Reference - If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, the device certificate cannot be deleted. Item Description [Certificate Information] Select to view detailed information about the device certificate. [Export a Certificate] [Password] Enter the password (up to 32 characters). The entered password is required when importing a certificate. [Retype Password] Reenter the password for confirmation (up to 32 characters). [Delete a Certificate] Click [OK] to remove the registered device certificate. 5 [Security] tab 5-40 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [SSL/TLS Settings] Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [SSL/TLS Settings]. Item Description [SSL/TLS] Select the PageScope Web Connection mode to apply SSL. Click [Disable] to disable SSL. [Encryption Strength] Specify the SSL encryption strength. bizhub 42/36 5-41 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Protocol Settings] Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings]. Item Description [Protocol] Displays the classification for each protocol. [Issued By] Displays the issuer of the device certificate. If no device certificates have been registered, [Not Installed] appears. If a protocol has been specified as the default, [Default] appears. [Issued To] Displays the destination of the device certificate. [Edit] Click to change the device certificate or confirm the details of the device certificate. 5 [Security] tab 5-42 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Protocol Settings] (IEEE802.1X) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (IEEE802.1X). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. bizhub 42/36 5-43 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Protocol Settings] (S/MIME) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (S/MIME). [Protocol Settings] (HTTP Server) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (HTTP Server). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. 5 [Security] tab 5-44 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Protocol Settings] (E-mail Send (SMTP)) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (E-mail Send (SMTP)). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. bizhub 42/36 5-45 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Protocol Settings] (E-mail Receive (POP)) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (E-mail Receive (POP)). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. 5 [Security] tab 5-46 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Protocol Settings] (TCP Socket) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (TCP Socket). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. bizhub 42/36 5-47 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Protocol Settings] (LDAP) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (LDAP). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. 5 [Security] tab 5-48 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Protocol Settings] (WebDAV Client) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (WebDAV Client). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. bizhub 42/36 5-49 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Protocol Settings] (OpenAPI) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (OpenAPI). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Client Certificate]: Select whether to request for client certificates. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. 5 [Security] tab 5-50 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [Protocol Settings] (Web Service) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Protocol Settings] ö [Edit] (Web Service). Item Description [Protocol Settings] Displays the name of the selected protocol. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify settings for verifying the server certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. [Chain]: Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer. [Check CRL Expiration]: Select whether to use the certificate revocation list (CRL) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Check OCSP Expiration]: Select whether to use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to check that the server certificate has not expired. [Client Certificate]: Select whether to request for client certificates. [Device Certificate] Select the certificate to be used. bizhub 42/36 5-51 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [External Certificate] Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [External Certificate]. Item Description [New Registration] Click this button to register a new external certificate. Click [Browse] in the new registration window to specify a new external certificate to be registered. [Certification Type] Select the type of external certificates to be displayed. External certificates of the selected type appear in the list. [Issued By] Displays the issuer of an external certificate. [Issued To] Displays the destination of an external certificate. [Expiration Date] Displays the validity period of an external certificate. [Detail] Check detailed information about an external certificate. [Delete] Displays a message asking you to confirm deletion, enables you to delete an external certificate. 5 [Security] tab 5-52 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [External Certificate] (New Registration) Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [External Certificate] ö [New Registration]. Item Description [Certification Type] Select the type of external certificate to be registered. If [Trusted Root Certification Authorities] is selected, a root certificate from a trusted certificate authority (CA) will be registered. If [Trusted Intermediate Certification Authorities] is selected, an interim certificate from a trusted certificate authority (CA) will be registered. If [Trusted Certificate] is selected, trusted certificates will be individually registered. If [Untrusted Certificate] is selected, untrusted certificates will be individually registered. [File] Click [Browse] to specify a new external certificate to be registered. bizhub 42/36 5-53 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [Validate Certificate] Select [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Validate Certificate]. Item Description [Certificate Verification] Select whether or not certificate verification is performed. [Timeout] Enter the timeout period for expiration date confirmation. [OCSP Service] Select this check box to use the OCSP service. [URL] Enter the URL of the OCSP service (up to 511 characters). If this item is left blank, the machine accesses the URL of the OCSP service embedded in the certificate. If the URL of the OCSP service is not embedded in the certificate, an error will occur. [Proxy Server Address] To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server, enter its address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Proxy Server Port Number] Enter the port number of a proxy server. [User Name] Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63 characters). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63 characters). [No Proxy for following domain] To enable expiration date confirmation, specify an address that does not use the proxy server depending on your environment. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. 5 [Security] tab 5-54 bizhub 42/36 5.2 5.2.5 [IPsec] You can configure IPsec settings. Select [Security] ö [IPsec] ö [IPsec]. Item Description [General Settings] [IPsec] Displays whether or not the IPsec function is enabled. [IKE Life Time] Displays the length of the life for the IKE. [IKE Diffie-Hellman Group] Displays the IKE Diffie-Hellman group. [IPsec SA Life Time] Displays the length of the life for the IPsec SA. [Edit] Click this button to edit [General Settings]. bizhub 42/36 5-55 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [General Settings] Select [Security] ö [IPsec] ö [IPsec] ö [Edit] (General Settings). [IKE Settings] [IPsec SA Settings] [IPsec Peer Settings] Displays the registered settings. [Edit] Click this button to edit each item. [Delete] Click to delete the settings. Item Description Item Description [IPsec] Select whether or not to enable the IPsec function. [IKE Life Time] Specify the length (in seconds) of the life for the IKE. [IKE Diffie-Hellman Group] Select the IKE Diffie-Hellman group. [IPsec SA Life Time] Specify the length (in seconds) of the life for the IPsec SA. 5 [Security] tab 5-56 bizhub 42/36 5.2 [IKE Settings] Select [Security] ö [IPsec] ö [IPsec] ö [Edit] (IKE Settings). (Up to four groups can be registered for the IKE Settings.) [IPsec SA Settings] Select [Security] ö [IPsec] ö [IPsec] ö [Edit] (IPsec SA Settings). (Up to eight groups can be registered for the IPsec SA Settings.) Item Description [No.] Displays the number to be registered. [Encryption Algorithm] Select an encryption algorithm to be used for creation of the common key. [Authentication Algorithm] Select an authentication algorithm to be used for creation of the common key. Item Description [No.] Displays the number to be registered. [Security Protocol] Select a security protocol to use. [Encryption Algorithm for ESP] If you have set the Security Protocol to [ESP], select the ESP encryption algorithm. [Authentication Algorithm for ESP] If you have set the Security Protocol to [ESP], select the ESP authentication algorithm. [Authentication Algorithm for AH] If you have set the Security Protocol to [AH], select the AH authentication algorithm. bizhub 42/36 5-57 5.2 [Security] tab 5 [IPsec Peer Settings] Select [Security] ö [IPsec] ö [IPsec] ö [Edit] (IPsec Peer Settings). (Up to 10 peers can be registered.) Item Description [No.] Displays the number to be registered. [Encapsulation Mode] Select an IPsec operation mode. [Peer's Address] Enter the IP address of the peer. When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Perfect Forward Secrecy] To increase the IKE security level, select [Use]. If you have selected [Use], the communication time increases. [Pre-Shared Key] Enter the Pre-Shared Key text to be shared with the peer (up to 64 characters). This text must be the same as that used at the peer. 5 [Security] tab 5-58 bizhub 42/36 5.2 5.2.6 [IP Address Filtering] You can specify the range of IP addresses from which access to the machine is permitted. Select [Security] ö [IP Address Filtering] ö [IP Address Filtering]. Reference - If the range of permitted IP addresses in [Access Permission Address] overlaps the range of refused IP addresses in [Access Refuse Address], the refused addresses in [Access Refuse Address] are given priority. - To specify a single IP address, type the same IP address into both the box for the starting IP address and for the ending IP address, or type "0.0.0.0" into the box for either the starting IP address or the ending IP address. Item Description [Access Permission Address] To specify addresses you permit access from, select [Enable]. Range of IP address permitted access Enter the start and end addresses of ranges you permit access from. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Access Refuse Address] To specify addresses you deny access from, select [Enable]. Range of IP address refused access Specify the start and end addresses of ranges you deny access from. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) bizhub 42/36 5-59 5.2 [Security] tab 5 5.2.7 [IEEE802.1X] You can configure IEEE802.1X settings. Select [Security] ö [IEEE802.1X] ö [IEEE802.1X]. Item Description [IEEE802.1X] Select whether or not to enable the IEEE802.1X function. [EAP Type] Select an EAP authentication method. If you select [Server Specification], the EAP-Type provided by the authentication server will be used for authentication. Configure the supplicant settings as required for this machine according to the EAP-Type provided by the authentication server. Do not set this item to [None]. [User ID] Enter a user ID (up to 128 characters). This user ID is used for all EAP-Type options. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password (up to 128 characters). The password is used for all EAP-Type options other than [EAP-TLS]. [TTLS Anonymous Name] Enter an anonymous name to be used for EAP-TTLS authentication (up to 128 characters). This item is available if [EAP-Type] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [Server Specification]. If [EAP Type] is set to [Server Specification] while the actual authentication method is EAP-MD5, type in the same name as that specified for [User ID]. [TTLS Authentication Type] Select an EAP-TTLS inner authentication protocol. This item is available if [EAP-Type] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [Server Specification]. [Send Client Certificate] Select whether to encrypt authentication information using client certificates of this machine. You can configure this setting when client certificates are registered in this machine. If [EAP-Type] is [EAP-TLS], the client certificates are always required. This setting can be configured even if [EAP-Type] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [PEAP]. [Server ID] Enter a server ID (up to 64 characters). This setting is required if you verify the CN of the server certificate. 5 [Security] tab 5-60 bizhub 42/36 5.2 5.2.8 [Limiting Access to Destination] You can configure the setting that prohibits user operation. [Restrict User Access] Select [Security] ö [Limiting Access to Destination] ö [Restrict User Access]. [Encryption Strength] Select an encryption strength level for encrypted communication with TLS. • [Low]: Keys of any length are used for communication. • [Medium]: Keys that are more than 56 bits in length are used for communication. • [High]: Keys that are more than 128 bits in length are used for communication. This item is available if [EAP-Type] is set to anything other than [None] or [EAP-MD5]. [Network Stop] If an authentication process does not succeed within the specified time, all network communication will stop. To specify the delay between the start of an authentication process and the stop of network communication, select [Enable]. [Limit Time] Specify the delay (sec.) between the start of an authentication process and the stop of network communication. To restart the authentication process after network communication has stopped, turn the power of this machine off and on again. Item Description Item Description [Registering and Changing Addresses] Select whether or not to prohibit users from registering or editing destinations. bizhub 42/36 5-61 5.2 [Security] tab 5 5.2.9 [Auto Logout] Logout time can be set. Select [Security] ö [Auto Logout] ö [Auto Logout]. Item Description [Admin Mode Logout Time] Specify the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when no operations have been performed in the administrator mode. [User Mode Logout Time] Specify the time period before the user will automatically be logged out when no operations have been performed in the user mode. 5 [Security] tab 5-62 bizhub 42/36 5.2 5.2.10 [Administrator Password] Configure the administrator password of this machine. Select [Security] ö [Administrator Password] ö [Administrator Password]. Reference - If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, this page will not be displayed. - If a device certificate has not been registered, this page will not be displayed. - This page does not appear if [SSL/TLS] is set to [Disable] in [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [SSL Settings], when a device certificate is already registered. Reference - You cannot register a password less than eight characters when [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Rules] is set to [ON] in the [Admin Settings] on the Control Panel. Item Description [Current Password] Enter a currently specified administrator password. [New Password] Enter a new administrator password (up to 8 characters, excluding space and "). [Retype New Password] Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation. bizhub 42/36 5-63 5.3 [Job] tab 5 5.3 [Job] tab This page allows you to view the status of current print jobs. 5.3.1 [Current Jobs] You can check the current jobs being processed on the machine. [Print] Select [Job] ö [Current Jobs] ö [Print]. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the print job. Each print job that the machine receives is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the print job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the print file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Status] Displays the current status of the print job. (Waiting, Parsing, Printing, Scanning, Pause, Cancel, or Abort) [Time Stored] Displays the time that the job was queued. [Delete] Click to delete the print job(s) whose check box in column 1 has been selected. 5 [Job] tab 5-64 bizhub 42/36 5.3 [Send] Select [Job] ö [Current Jobs] ö [Send]. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the transmission job. Each job sent by the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the transmission job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the transmission file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Status] Displays the current status of the transmission job. (Waiting, Spooling, Parsing, Printing, Scanning, Transferring, Pause, Sending, Dialing, Wait To Redial or TimerTx) [Time Stored] Displays the time that the job was queued. [Delete] Click to delete the transmission job(s) whose check box in column 1 has been selected. bizhub 42/36 5-65 5.3 [Job] tab 5 [Receive] Select [Job] ö [Current Jobs] ö [Receive]. [Save] Select [Job] ö [Current Jobs] ö [Save]. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the reception job. Each job received by the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the reception job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the reception file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Status] Displays the current status of the reception job. (Waiting, Printing, Transferring, Pause, Receiving, Dialing or Wait To Redial) [Time Stored] Displays the time that the job was queued. [Delete] Click to delete the reception job(s) whose check box in column 1 has been selected. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the stored job. Each job stored on the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the stored job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the stored file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Status] Displays the current status of the stored job. (Scanning or Pause) [Time Stored] Displays the time that the job was queued. [Delete] Click to delete the stored job(s) whose check box in column 1 has been selected. 5 [Job] tab 5-66 bizhub 42/36 5.3 5.3.2 [Job History] You can check the jobs that have been completed on the machine. [Print] Select [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Print]. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the print job. Each print job that the machine receives is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the print job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the print file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Result] Displays the result of the print job. (OK, Error, or Canceled) [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. bizhub 42/36 5-67 5.3 [Job] tab 5 [Send] Select [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Send]. [Receive] Select [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Receive]. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the transmission job. Each job sent by the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the transmission job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the transmission file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Result] Displays the result of the transmission job. (OK, Error, or Canceled) [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the reception job. Each job received by the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the reception job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the reception file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Result] Displays the result of the reception job. (OK, Error, or Canceled) [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. 5 [Job] tab 5-68 bizhub 42/36 5.3 [Save] Select [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Save]. [Job History] (Detail) Select [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Detail]. Reference - As an example, a description of the [Job] ö [Job History] ö [Print] ö [Detail] page is provided below. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the stored job. Each job stored on the machine is assigned a unique identification number. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the stored job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the stored file. This cell remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. [Result] Displays the result of the stored job. (OK, Error, or Canceled) [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. Item Description [No.] Displays the identification number of the print job. Each print job that the machine receives is assigned a unique identification number. [Type] Displays the job type. [User Name] Displays the name of the owner for the print job, if known. [Document Name] Displays the name of the print file. This item remains empty if [Hide Personal Information] is set to [On] in the [System] ö [Machine Settings] ö [Machine Settings] page. bizhub 42/36 5-69 5.3 [Job] tab 5 5.3.3 [Communication List] You can check the list of communication completed in the machine. [Scan] Select [Job] ö [Communication List] ö [Scan]. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of pages in the document. This item is not displayed in the [Detail] window of [Send], [Receive], and [Save]. [Copies] Displays the number of printed copies. [Result] Displays the result of the print job (OK, Error, or Canceled) [Time Stored] Displays the time that the job was queued. [Time Finished] Displays the time that printing finished. [OK] Click to return to the previous page. Item Description Item Description [No.] Displays the transmission ID. [Destination] Displays the transmission recipient. [Start Time] Displays the time that the job started. [Result] Displays the results of the job. [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. 5 [Job] tab 5-70 bizhub 42/36 5.3 [Fax TX] Select [Job] ö [Communication List] ö [Fax TX]. [Fax RX] Select [Job] ö [Communication List] ö [Fax RX]. Item Description [No.] Displays the transmission ID. [Destination] Displays the transmission recipient. [Start Time] Displays the time that the job started. [Result] Displays the results of the job. [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. Item Description [No.] Displays the transmission ID. [Destination] Displays the transmission recipient. [Start Time] Displays the time that the job started. [Result] Displays the results of the job. [Detail] Click to display a page containing details. bizhub 42/36 5-71 5.3 [Job] tab 5 [Communication List] (Detail) Select [Job] ö [Communication List] ö [Detail]. Reference - As an example, the [Job] ö [Communication List] ö [Fax TX] ö [Detail] page is shown. Item Description [No.] Displays the transmission ID. [Destination] Displays the transmission recipient. [Mode] Displays the communication type. [Start Time] Displays the time that the job started. [Communication Time] Displays the transmission time. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of pages in the document. [Result] Displays the results of the job. [OK] Click to return to the previous page. 5 [Print] tab 5-72 bizhub 42/36 5.4 5.4 [Print] tab This page allows more detailed printer settings to be specified. 5.4.1 [Default Settings] You can configure printer settings and paper settings. [General Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [General Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [PDL] Select the printer definition language. page 4-24 [Paper Source] Select the primary paper tray. page 4-19 [Duplex] Select whether to print in the 2-sided print format. Refer to the [User's Guide Print Opera[ Binding] Specify the default binding position for 2-sided tions]. printing. [Finishing] Select offset or staple. When selecting staple, specify the staple position. [Binding Direction Adjustment] Specify the method for paper arrangement (adjusting the binding position) for 2-sided printing. [Adjust Orientation]: Execute the Adjust Orientation processing. [Control Adjustments]: Follow the instruction from the printer driver without executing the Adjust Orientation processing. [Output Tray] Display the output tray. [Copies] Enter the number of copies to be printed. [Paper Size] Select the paper size. [Width] Specifies the paper width when [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Length] Specifies the paper length when [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. bizhub 42/36 5-73 5.4 [Print] tab 5 [Paper Source Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [Paper Source Settings]. [Paper Type] Select the type of paper loaded in the selected tray. Refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. [Collate] Select whether or not collating pages sequentially when printing multiple sets of copies. [Auto Continue] Select whether or not printing continues if the size or type of paper in the selected paper tray is different from the size or type of paper for the print job. page 4-20 [Hold Job Timeout] Select the length of time until print jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted. page 4-22 Item Description Control Panel Item Description Control Panel [Tray1] [Size Detection Mode] Select whether or not to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the Tray 1. If [Auto] is selected, [Paper Size] is grayed out. Refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. [Paper Size] Specifies the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 1. [Width] Specifies the paper width when [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Length] Specifies the paper length when [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Paper Type] Specifies the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 1. [Tray2] [Paper Size] Displays the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. [Paper Type] Specifies the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 2. 5 [Print] tab 5-74 bizhub 42/36 5.4 Reference - When the optional Paper Feed Cabinet PC-211 is installed, [Tray4] or [Tray5] is displayed. [Tray Mapping Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [Tray Mapping Settings]. [Tray3] [Paper Size] Displays the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 3. Refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. [Paper Type] Specifies the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 3. [Tray4] [Paper Size] Displays the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 4. [Paper Type] Specifies the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 4. [Tray5] [Paper Size] Displays the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 5. [Paper Type] Specifies the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 5. [Tray Chaining] Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. Refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description Control Panel Item Description Control Panel [Tray Mapping Mode] Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. Refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. [Logical Tray 0] to [Logical Tray 9] Select the tray that is used for printing when a print job is received from another manufacturer's printer driver. bizhub 42/36 5-75 5.4 [Print] tab 5 [PCL Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [PCL Settings]. [PostScript Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [PostScript Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Font Number] Specify the default font in the PCL language. page 4-24 [Symbol Set] Select the symbol set used with the PCL language. [Lines Per Page] Specify the number of lines per page in the PCL language. [Font Point Size] Specify the font size in the PCL language. [Font Pitch Size] Specify the font pitch in the PCL language. [CL/LF Mapping] Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. Item Description Control Panel [Wait Timeout] Specify the length of time until Postscript times out. "0" means that no timeout control is applied. page 4-24 [PS Protocol] Select the PS protocol. [Print to PS Error] Select whether to print error information when an error occurs during PS rasterization. 5 [Print] tab 5-76 bizhub 42/36 5.4 [XPS Settings] Select [Print] ö [Default Settings] ö [XPS Settings]. 5.4.2 [Font/Form] You can check the fonts and forms saved on the machine. [PCL Font] Select [Print] ö [Font/Form] ö [PCL Font]. Item Description Control Panel [Digital Signature] Specify whether to verify digital signature. When [Enable] is selected, the document without a valid digital signature is not printed. page 4-24 [Print to XPS Error] Specify whether to print error message if the digital signature of XPS data is invalid. Item Description [No.] Displays the control number of the font. [Font Name] Displays the name of the font. [Source] Displays the location of the font. bizhub 42/36 5-77 5.4 [Print] tab 5 [PostScript Font] Select [Print] ö [Font/Form] ö [PostScript Font]. [Form Overlay] Select [Print] ö [Font/Form] ö [Form Overlay]. Item Description [Font Name] Displays the name of the font. [Source] Displays the location of the font. Item Description [File Name] Displays the name of the overlay. [Source] Displays the location of the overlay. 5 [Print] tab 5-78 bizhub 42/36 5.4 5.4.3 [Download Font/Form] Configuration is necessary if you wish to download fonts and forms to the machine. [PostScript Font] Select [Print] ö [Download Font/Form] ö [PostScript Font]. Item Description [Download Post- Script Font] [Source] Specify the download destination of the font. [File] Specify the file name for the PostScript font to be downloaded. Click [Browse] to display a dialog box for browsing to the Post- Script font file. [Download] Click to download the specified PostScript font file to the machine. [Delete Post- Script Font] [Font Name] Displays the name of the fonts. [Source] Displays the storage source of the font. [Delete] Deletes the PostScript font file(s) whose check boxes the left end are checked. bizhub 42/36 5-79 5.4 [Print] tab 5 [Form Overlay] Select [Print] ö [Download Font/Form] ö [Form Overlay]. 5.4.4 [Report Types] Specified reports can be printed. Select [Print] ö [Report Types] ö [Report Types]. Item Description [Download Form Overlay] [Source] Specify the download destination of the form overlay file. [File] Specify the file name for the form overlay to be downloaded. Click [Browse] to display a dialog box for browsing to the form overlay file. [Download] Click to download the specified form overlay file to the machine. [Delete Form Overlay] [File Name] Displays the name of the overlays. [Source] Displays the storage source of the form overlay. [Delete] Deletes the form overlay file(s) whose check boxes the left end are checked. Item Description [Configuration Page] Prints the printer configuration page. [PCL Font Page] Prints the PCL font lists. [PostScript Font Page] Prints the PostScript font lists. [Statistics Page] Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages printed. [Directory Listing Page] Prints the directory list on the hard disk. 5 [Print] tab 5-80 bizhub 42/36 5.4 5.4.5 [Direct Print] Specified files can be printed. Select [Print] ö [Direct Print] ö [Direct Print]. Reference - The following file formats can be printed using direct printing: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. Item Description [File] Specify the location of the file to be printed. Click [Browse], and then select the file. [Send] Click to send the specified file to the machine. bizhub 42/36 5-81 5.5 [Storage] tab 5 5.5 [Storage] tab From this tab, image data saved on the machine can be managed. 5.5.1 [Scan to HDD] You can manage the scanned data stored in the HDD. Select [Storage] ö [Scan to HDD] ö [Scan to HDD]. [Scan to HDD] (View) Select [Storage] ö [Scan to HDD] ö [Scan to HDD] ö [View]. Item Description [Search for Number] Select the range of user registration numbers ([No.]) to be displayed. [No.] Displays the registration number for the user. [User Name] Displays the registered user name. [View] Click to view the image of the first page of the file stored by the user. [Delete] Click to delete all files stored by the user. Item Description [Search for Number] Select the range of registration numbers to be displayed. [Thumbnail] Displays the image of the first page of the stored file. [File Name] Displays the name of the stored file. [Copy] Click to download the stored file. [Delete] Click to delete the stored file from the machine's hard disk. 5 [Storage] tab 5-82 bizhub 42/36 5.5 [Scan to HDD] (File Information) Select a thumbnail or file name in the [Storage] ö [Scan to HDD] ö [Scan to HDD] ö [View] page. Item Description [File Name] Displays the name of the file. [Time Stored] Displays the date that the file was stored. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of document pages in the file. [Color Type] Displays the color information for the file. [File Format] Displays the file format. [File Size] Displays the file size. [Copy] Click to download the file. [Delete] Click to delete the file from the machine's hard disk. [Cancel] Click to deselect this file and return to the [Scan to HDD] (View) page. bizhub 42/36 5-83 5.5 [Storage] tab 5 5.5.2 [PC-Fax] You can manage the data stored on the machine with Forced memory reception and PC-Fax. Select [Storage] ö [PC-Fax] ö [PC-Fax]. Reference - If a memory reception password has been specified, a page appears so that the password can be typed in. If the correct password has been typed in, the following page appears. [PC-Fax] (File Information) Select a thumbnail or file name in the [Storage] ö [PC-Fax] ö [PC-Fax] page. Item Description [Search for Number] Select the range of registration numbers to be displayed. [Thumbnail] Displays the image of the first page of the stored file. [File Name] Displays the name of the stored file. [Copy] Click to download the stored file. [Print] Click to print the stored file. After the file is printed, it is deleted from the machine. [Delete] Click to delete the stored file. Item Description [File Name] Displays the name of the file. [Time Stored] Displays the date that the file was stored. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of document pages in the file. [File Size] Displays the file size. [Copy] Click to download the file. [Print] Click to print the file. After the file is printed, it is deleted from the machine. [Delete] Click to delete the file from the machine's hard disk. [Cancel] Click to deselect the file and return to the [PC-Fax] page. 5 [Address] tab 5-84 bizhub 42/36 5.6 5.6 [Address] tab From the [Address] tab, settings can be specified for destination information registered on the machine and for e-mail message subject and body text. Reference - If invalid data has been entered (left blank) when the [Apply] is clicked, an error message does not appear, but the entered data is cleared and the destination is not registered. If the destination does not appear in the list, enter valid data, and then click the [Apply]. 5.6.1 [Address Book] You can manage destinations data. [Address Book List] Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List]. Item Description [New Registration] Add new destinations to the address book. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of destinations in the selected range. [Search from Index] Select an index to display the list of destinations registered with the selected index. [No.] Displays the registration number. [Function] Displays the registered functions. [Name] Displays the registered name. [Edit] Click this button to edit the registered address. [Delete] Delete an address from the address book. bizhub 42/36 5-85 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Address Book List] (New Registration) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration]. Item Description [E-mail] Select this setting to register an e-mail destination. For details, refer to page 5-86. [FTP] Select this setting to register an FTP destination. For details, refer to page 5-87. [SMB] Select this setting to register an SMB destination. For details, refer to page 5-88. [WebDAV] Select this setting to register a WebDAV destination. For details, refer to page 5-89. [Fax] Select this setting to register a fax destination. For details, refer to page 5-90. This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. [I-Fax] Select this setting to register an I-Fax destination. For details, refer to page 5-91. This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. 5 [Address] tab 5-86 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: E-mail) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [E-mail]. Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [E-mail Address] Enter the E-mail address of the destination (up to 320 characters). [S/MIME Certification] Displays whether a certificate is registered. [Edit a Certification] Select the check box to edit information for the certificate. [Register a Certification]: Select this option to specify a certificate file and register a certificate. [Delete a Certification]: Select this option to delete a registered certificate. bizhub 42/36 5-87 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: FTP) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [FTP]. Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [Host Address] Enter the IP address of the destination FTP server. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [File Path] Specify the destination directory (up to 127 bytes). [anonymous] Select whether to allow anonymous users to access the FTP server. [User ID] Enter the user ID to log in to the destination FTP server (up to 63 bytes). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the destination FTP server (up to 63 bytes, excluding space and "). [PASV Mode] Select whether to communicate in PASV mode. [Proxy] Select whether to use a proxy server. [Port Number] Enter a port number. 5 [Address] tab 5-88 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: SMB) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [SMB]. Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [Host Address] Enter the IP address of the destination computer. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. If you perform SMB transmission using an IPv6 address, Direct Hosting needs to be enabled. For details on the Direct Hosting service, refer to page 5-131. [File Path] Specify the destination directory (up to 255 bytes). [User ID] Enter the user ID to log in to the destination computer (up to 127 bytes). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the destination computer (up to 127 bytes, excluding space and "). bizhub 42/36 5-89 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: WebDAV) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [WebDAV]. Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [Host Address] Enter the IP address of the destination WebDAV server. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [File Path] Specify the destination directory. (up to 142 bytes) [User ID] Enter the user ID to log in to the destination WebDAV server. (up to 63 bytes) [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the destination WebDAV server. (up to 63 bytes) [SSL] Select whether to use SSL for encryption. [Proxy] Select whether to use a proxy server. [Port Number] Enter a port number. 5 [Address] tab 5-90 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: Fax) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [Fax]. (This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [Destination] Enter the fax number of the destination (up to 38 characters). [Communication Setting] Specify the communication settings. Select the check box for [V34 Off], [ECM Off] or [Check Destination] to enable the corresponding function. bizhub 42/36 5-91 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Address Book List] (New Registration/Edit: I-Fax) Select [Address] ö [Address Book] ö [Address Book List] ö [New Registration] ö [I-Fax]. (This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) Item Description [No.] Specify the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Index] Select the index character used when searching for the destination. It is convenient to select the [Main] check box for a frequently used destination. [E-mail Address] Enter the E-mail address of the destination (up to 320 characters). 5 [Address] tab 5-92 bizhub 42/36 5.6 5.6.2 [Group] You can manage the destinations data registered as Group. [Group List] Select [Address] ö [Group] ö [Group List]. Item Description [New Registration] Click this button to register a new group. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of group destinations in the selected range. [No.] Displays the registration number. [Function] Displays the registered function. [Name] Displays the registered name. [Edit] Click this button to edit the registered group. The available items are the same as those for registration. [Delete] Click this button to delete the group. bizhub 42/36 5-93 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Group List] (New Registration) Select [Address] ö [Group] ö [Group List] ö [New Registration]. [Group List] (New Registration/Edit: Scan) Select [Address] ö [Group] ö [Group List] ö [New Registration] ö [Scan]. Item Description [Scan] Select this setting to register a group destination where scan data is to be sent. For details, refer to page 5-93. [Fax] Select this setting to register a group destination where faxes are to be sent. For details, refer to page 5-94. This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. Item Description [Name] Enter the destination name. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of destinations in the selected range. [Search from Index] Select an index to display the list of destinations registered with the selected index. [Search from Function] Select a function from the list to display the list of destinations registered with the selected function. 5 [Address] tab 5-94 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Group List] (New Registration/Edit: Fax) Select [Address] ö [Group] ö [Group List] ö [New Registration] ö [Fax]. (This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) Destinations list Select the check boxes for the destinations to be added to the group, and then click [Apply]. Item Description Item Description [Name] Enter the destination name. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of destinations in the selected range. [Search from Index] Select an index to display the list of destinations registered with the selected index. [Search from Function] Select a function from the list to display the list of destinations registered with the selected function. Destinations list Select the check boxes for the destinations to be added to the group, and then click [Apply]. bizhub 42/36 5-95 5.6 [Address] tab 5 5.6.3 [Program] You can register or edit a program destination. You can register a combination of address information, communication information, and original information as a program destination. [Program List] Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List]. Item Description [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of program destinations in the selected range. [No.] Displays the registration number. [Function] Displays the registered function. [Name] Displays the registered name. [Edit] Click to register a program destination or edit an existing one. If no program destinations have been registered when this button is clicked, the [New Registration] page appears. Select the communication method for the program destination to be registered. For details, refer to page 5-96. If a program destination has already been registered when this button is clicked, the [Program] page appears. Change the settings for the registered program destination. For details, refer to page 5-100. [Delete] Click to delete the program destination. 5 [Address] tab 5-96 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Program List] (New Registration: Communication Setting) Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List] ö [Edit]. Item Description [E-mail] Select the communication method for the new program destination to be registered. Select a communication method, and then click [Next]. A page for specifying the destination information appears, corresponding to the selected communication method. [Fax] and [I-Fax] appear when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed. [FTP] [SMB] [WebDAV] [Fax] [I-Fax] [Address Book] [Group] bizhub 42/36 5-97 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Program List] (New Registration: Destination Setting) Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List] ö [Edit] ö [Destination Setting]. Item Description [Program (E-mail)] Registers program destinations used for E-mail transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-86. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (FTP)] Registers program destinations used for FTP transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-87. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (SMB)] Registers program destinations used for SMB transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-88. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (WebDAV)] Registers program destinations used for WebDAV transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-89. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (Fax)] Register Program destinations used for fax transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-90. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (I-Fax)] Register Program destinations used for I-Fax transmission. The items of destination settings are same as those for the registration in address book. For details, refer to page 5-91. Specify detailed settings for the program destination after registering the destinations. [Program (Address Book)] Registers program destinations using the data of address book. For details, refer to page 5-98. [Program (Group)] Registers program destinations using data registered in a group. For details, refer to page 5-99. 5 [Address] tab 5-98 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Program List] (New Registration: Address Book) Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List] ö [Edit] ö [Address Book]. [Apply] Click to display the [Program] page, and then specify detailed settings for the program destination. For details, refer to page 5-100. Item Description Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of destinations in the selected range. [Search from Index] Select an index to display the list of destinations registered with the selected index. [Search from Function] Select a function from the list to display the list of destinations registered with the selected function. Destinations list Select the radio button on the left for the destination you wish to add and click [Apply] to register the destination as Program destination. bizhub 42/36 5-99 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Program List] (New Registration: Group) Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List] ö [Edit] ö [Group]. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number of the destination. [Name] Enter the destination name. [Search by Number] Select a range of registration numbers to display the list of destinations in the selected range. Group list Select the radio button on the left for the group you wish to add and click [Apply] to register the group as Program destination. 5 [Address] tab 5-100 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Program List] (Edit) Select [Address] ö [Program] ö [Program List] ö [Edit]. [Edit] ö [E-mail] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Subject] Specify the subject of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default subject is used. [Text] Specify the body text of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default body text is used. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. bizhub 42/36 5-101 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Edit] ö [FTP] [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [E-mail Notification] Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving scanned data. To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. Item Description 5 [Address] tab 5-102 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Edit] ö [SMB] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [E-mail Notification] Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving scanned data. To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. bizhub 42/36 5-103 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Edit] ö [WebDAV] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [E-mail Notification] Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving scanned data. To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. 5 [Address] tab 5-104 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Edit] ö [Fax] (This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) [Edit] ö [I-Fax] (This item appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. [Special Original] If the original being sent is a long original, select whichever is relevant. [Timer TX] Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission, enter the send time. [Password TX] Select whether to perform password transmission. To perform password transmission, enter the password. [F-Code] Select whether to use the F-code for transmission. To use this function, enter the SUB address and password. Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. [Special Original] If the original being sent is a long original, select whichever is relevant. bizhub 42/36 5-105 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Edit] ö [Address Book] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Subject] Specify the subject of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default subject is used. [Text] Specify the body text of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default body text is used. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. [Special Original] If the original being sent is a long original, select whichever is relevant. [Timer TX] Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission, enter the send time. [Password TX] Select whether to perform password transmission. To perform password transmission, enter the password. [F-Code] Select whether to use the F-code for transmission. To use this function, enter the SUB address and password. 5 [Address] tab 5-106 bizhub 42/36 5.6 [Edit] ö [Group (Scan)] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [File Type] Select the file type for saving scanned data. [Page Setting] Select whether to save the whole scanned pages in one file, or to divide a file into one page when saving the data. [Subject] Specify the subject of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default subject is used. [Text] Specify the body text of the E-mail message. If you select [Not Specified], the default body text is used. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Auto Color] Select whether the color information for a document is automatically detected and the document is scanned with the appropriate setting. [Monotone] Select the color setting for scanning in black and white. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [E-mail Notification] Specify whether to notify via E-mail the destination URL defined for saving scanned data. To notify the URL, specify the notification addresses. [Original Direction] Select the orientation of the original. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. bizhub 42/36 5-107 5.6 [Address] tab 5 [Edit] ö [Group (Fax)] Item Description [Destination Settings] Displays the destination information. Click [Edit] to specify the destination information. [Resolution] Select the resolution used for scanning the original. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to scan one side or both sides of the original. You can scan one side of the first page of the original, and then scan both sides of the remaining pages. [Original Type] Select the original type, such as text or photo. [Separate Scan] Select whether to divide the original to scan. [Density] Select the density. [Background Removal] Adjust the density of the background. [Sharpness] Adjust the sharpness. [Scan Size] Select the paper size of the original. If you select [Standard Size], select the size. If you select [Custom Size], specify the height and width. [2-Sided Binding Direction] Select the binding position of the original. [Special Original] If the original being sent is a long original, select whichever is relevant. [Timer TX] Select whether to perform timer transmission. To perform timer transmission, enter the send time. [Password TX] Select whether to perform password transmission. To perform password transmission, enter the password. [F-Code] Select whether to use the F-code for transmission. To use this function, enter the SUB address and password. 5 [Address] tab 5-108 bizhub 42/36 5.6 5.6.4 [Subject] Register the subject used for sending E-mail messages or Internet faxes. Select [Address] ö [Subject] ö [Subject List]. [Subject Registration] Select [Address] ö [Subject] ö [Subject List] ö [Edit]. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number. [E-mail Default] Select the e-mail subject to be used as the default. [Subject] Displays the name of the e-mail subject. [Edit] Click to display the [Subject Registration] page in order to edit the registered e-mail subject. [Delete] Click to delete the e-mail subject. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number. [Subject] Register the subject of the E-mail message (up to 64 characters). bizhub 42/36 5-109 5.6 [Address] tab 5 5.6.5 [Text] Register the message body used for sending E-mail messages or Internet faxes. Select [Address] ö [Text] ö [Text List]. [Text Registration] Select [Address] ö [Text] ö [Text List] ö [Edit]. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number. [E-mail Default] Select the e-mail body text to be used as the default. [Text] Displays the name of the e-mail body text. [Edit] Click to display the [Text Registration] page in order to edit the registered e-mail body text. [Delete] Click to delete the e-mail body text. Item Description [No.] Displays the registration number. [Text] Register the E-mail body (up to 256 characters). 5 [Network] tab 5-110 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7 [Network] tab This tab allows you to configure network settings. 5.7.1 [General Settings] You can specify the network speed and the settings for local connection. [Ethernet Settings] Select [Network] ö [General Settings] ö [Ethernet Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Speed/Duplex] Select the operating mode and speed for Ethernet. page 4-14 [MAC Address] Displays the MAC address of the network interface card of this machine. bizhub 42/36 5-111 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [Local Interface Settings] Select [Network] ö [General Settings] ö [Local Interface Settings]. Item Description [I/O Timeout] Specify the reception timeout period. 5 [Network] tab 5-112 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.2 [TCP/IP Settings] Configure the settings for TCP/IP function. [TCP/IP Settings] Select [Network] ö [TCP/IP Settings] ö [TCP/IP Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [TCP/IP] Select whether or not to make a connection via TCP/IP. page 4-11 [LPD] Select whether or not LPD is used. [SLP] Select whether or not SLP is used. Select [Enable] to search for this machine using TWAIN. page 4-11 [LLMNR] To perform name resolution to send data to a computer with Windows Vista/7/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 installed in the environment where the DNS server is not running, select [Enable]. To perform the name resolution especially in the IPv6-only communication environment, enable this setting. bizhub 42/36 5-113 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [IPv4 Settings] Select [Network] ö [TCP/IP Settings] ö [IPv4 Settings]. Reference - If the specified address is outside of the allowable range, the value is not changed, even after [Apply] is clicked. Instead, the setting returns to the previous value. Item Description Control Panel [IP Address Setting Method] Select the automatic assigning method for the machine IP address. page 4-11 [IP Address] To directly specify the IP address, enter the IP address of this machine. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Subnet Mask] When directly entering the IP address, configure the subnet mask of the network to be connected. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Default Gateway] When directly entering the IP address, specify the default gateway of the network to be connected. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Domain Name Automatic Acquisition] Select whether to automatically obtain the domain name. This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. [DNS Server Automatic Acquisition] Select whether to automatically obtain the DNS server address. This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. 5 [Network] tab 5-114 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [IPv6 Settings] Select [Network] ö [TCP/IP Settings] ö [IPv6 Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [IPv6] Select whether or not IPv6 is used. page 4-11 [IPv6 Auto Setting] Select whether or not the IPv6 auto setting is used. [IPv6 Link Local Address] Displays the link-local address generated from the MAC address. [IPv6 Global Address] If you do not obtain the IPv6 address automatically, enter the IPv6 global address. (up to 43 characters) [IPv6 Gateway Address] If you do not obtain the IPv6 address automatically, enter the IPv6 gateway address. (up to 39 characters) [DHCPv6] To use DHCPv6 to obtain the IPv6 address, select [Enable]. [DNS Server Automatic Acquisition] Select whether or not the DNS server address is automatically acquired from the DHCPv6 server to overwrite the current setting. [Search Domain Name Automatic Acquisition] Select whether or not the default DNS search domain name is automatically acquired from the DHCPv6 server to overwrite the current setting. [NTP Server Automatic Acquisition] Select whether or not the NTP server address is automatically acquired from the DHCPv6 server to overwrite the current setting. bizhub 42/36 5-115 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [RAW Port Settings] Select [Network] ö [TCP/IP Settings] ö [RAW Port Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [RAW Port] Select whether or not a RAW port is used. page 4-11 [RAW Port Number] Specify the number of the machine's RAW port. The currently used port number and numbers 80, 161, 427, 443, 515, 631 and 4567 cannot be specified. [RAW Port Bidirectional] Select whether or not RAW port bidirectional is used. page 4-11 5 [Network] tab 5-116 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [DNS Settings] Select [Network] ö [TCP/IP Settings] ö [DNS Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Host Name] Specify the host name of this machine (up to 63 characters). [Domain Name] Specify the name of the domain that contains this machine (up to 63 characters). [DNS Server Address (IPv4)] Specify the IPv4 DNS server address. Up to three can be registered. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [DNS Server Address (IPv6)] Specify the IPv6 DNS server address (up to 43 characters). Up to three can be registered. [Search Domain Name] Specify the DNS search domain name (up to 253 characters). [Dynamic DNS] Select [Enable] when automatically registering the host name specified in [Host Name] with the DNS server that supports the Dynamic DNS function. page 4-11 bizhub 42/36 5-117 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.3 [E-mail Settings] Configure the settings for E-mail function. [E-mail TX (SMTP)] Select [Network] ö [E-mail Settings] ö [E-mail TX (SMTP)]. Item Description Control Panel [E-mail TX (SMTP)] If [Enable] is selected, e-mail messages can be sent. If [Disable] is selected, [Scan to E-mail], [E-mail Notification], [Total Counter Notification], and [Device E-mail Address] are grayed out. page 4-11 [Scan to E-mail] If [Enable] is selected, the Scan to E-mail operation is enabled. [E-mail Notification] If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification is enabled. [Total Counter Notification] If [Enable] is selected, total counter notification is enabled. [SMTP Server Address] Enter the SMTP server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Specify number of the port for communicating with the SMTP server. 5 [Network] tab 5-118 bizhub 42/36 5.7 Reference - When specifying a setting for [SMTP Server Address], also specify a setting for [Device E-mail Address]. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not to encrypt a communication between this machine and the SMTP server using SSL/TLS. If [Disable] is selected, [Port Number (SSL)] is grayed out. [Port Number (SSL)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. [Connection Timeout] Select the length of time until the connection with the SMTP server times out. [Administrator E-mail Address] Displays the e-mail address of the administrator. [Device E-mail Address] Specify the e-mail address of the device. In order to perform network scanning, be sure to specify an address for [Device E-mail Address]. page 4-6 [Max Mail Size] Select whether to limit the size of an E-mail to be sent. If [No Limit] is selected, you cannot configure the [Server Capacity] setting. [Server Capacity] Enter the SMTP server capacity. A mail that exceeds the upper limit of the server capacity will be discarded. If an E-mail is divided, this setting is made invalid. [Binary Division] Select whether or not to divide an E-mail. If the E-mail software that received an E-mail does not have a restoration function, you may not be able to read the E-mail. If [Off] is selected, you cannot configure the [Divided Mail Size] setting. page 4-15 [Divided Mail Size] Enter the divided mail size to divide an E-mail. [POP Before SMTP] Select [Enable] to perform POP before SMTP authentication. [POP Before SMTP Time] Enter the period from a time you log in to the POP server to a time you access the SMTP server. If the POP and SMTP servers are in different computers, it will take time to notify the SMTP server that you have logged in to the POP server. Therefore, if a too short time is specified, sending of Emails may fail. [SMTP Authentication] If [Enable] is selected, SMTP authentication is enabled. For SMTP authentication, the authentication method with the highest strength that is supported by the SMTP server is automatically selected from Digest-MD5, CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, and LOGIN. If [Disable] is selected, you cannot configure the [Account], [Password], [Domain Name] setting. [Account] Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication (up to 255 bytes). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password for SMTP authentication (up to 128 bytes). [Domain Name] Enter the domain name (realm) for SMTP authentication (up to 255 characters). This setting is required when the authentication method is set to Digest-MD5. Item Description Control Panel bizhub 42/36 5-119 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [E-mail RX (POP)] Select [Network] ö [E-mail Settings] ö [E-mail RX (POP)]. Item Description [E-mail RX (POP)] If [Enable] is selected, e-mail messages can be received. [POP Server Address] Enter the POP server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Specify number of the port for communicating with the POP server. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not to encrypt a communication between this machine and the POP server using SSL/TLS. If [Disable] is selected, [Port Number (SSL)] is grayed out. [Port Number (SSL)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. [Login Name] Enter the login name of the POP server (up to 63 characters). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the POP server (up to 15 characters). [Connection Timeout] Specify the timeout period for a communication with a server. [APOP Authentication] Select [Enable] to encrypt the login name and password when logging on to the POP server. The password is encrypted with MD5 when APOP is used to log on to the POP server. Before selecting [Enable], check whether the POP server supports APOP. If the POP server does not support APOP, an error will occur, resulting in communication failure. [Auto Check of Arrival] Select whether or not automatic reception is performed. If [Disable] is selected, you cannot configure the [Polling Rate] setting. [Polling Rate] Enter the interval where reception is checked via automatic connection to the POP server. 5 [Network] tab 5-120 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [S/MIME] Select [Network] ö [E-mail Settings] ö [S/MIME]. Item Description Control Panel [S/MIME] Select whether or not to use S/MIME. If [Disable] is selected, [Digital Signature], [E-mail Text Encryption Method], and [Digital Signature Type] are grayed out. page 4-16 [Digital Signature] Select whether or not a digital signature is applied to e-mail messages. [E-mail Text Encryption Method] Select the e-mail text encryption format. [Digital Signature Type] Select the type of digital signature applied. bizhub 42/36 5-121 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.4 [LDAP Settings] Configure the settings for LDAP function. [LDAP Settings] Select [Network] ö [LDAP Settings] ö [LDAP Settings]. Item Description [LDAP] Select whether or not the LDAP server is used. 5 [Network] tab 5-122 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [LDAP Server Registration] Select [Network] ö [LDAP Settings] ö [LDAP Server Registration]. Item Description [Server Address] Specify the LDAP server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Port Number] Enter a port number. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used. If [Disable] is selected, [Port Number (SSL)] is grayed out. [Port Number (SSL)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. [Search Base] Enter the search starting point in the directory structure under the LDAP server (up to 255 characters). This search function also covers subdirectories under the entered starting point. [Timeout] Enter the timeout period for LDAP search. [Max. Search Result] Enter the maximum number of items that can be received as LDAP search results. [Authentication Method] Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server. The authentication method must match that used in the LDAP server. If [anonymous] is selected, [Login Name], [Password], and [Domain Name] can be omitted. If [GSS-SPNEGO] is selected, log in to the server in the Kerberos authentication method. The Kerberos authentication method is supported by Active Directory. [Login Name] Enter the login name to log in to the LDAP server (up to 255 characters). bizhub 42/36 5-123 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.5 [HTTP Settings] Configure the settings for HTTP server function. Select [Network] ö [HTTP Settings] ö [HTTP Server Settings]. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password to log in to the LDAP server (up to 128 characters). [Domain Name] Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server (up to 64 characters). If [GSS-SPNEGO] is selected, enter the domain name of Active Directory. [User Referral] Select whether to use the referral function. Make an appropriate choice to fit the LDAP server environment. [Search Condition Attributes] Select the attribute of the name used for LDAP searching. You can toggle this attribute between [Name] (cn) and [Nickname] (display- Name). [Initial Setting for Search Details] Specify LDAP search conditions. Item Description Item Description Control Panel [HTTP Server] Select whether or not the HTTP server is used. page 4-11 [Port Number] Specify the port number of the HTTP server. Do not set the port number to [25], otherwise a connection cannot be established with Page- Scope Web Connection. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used. If [Disable] is selected, [Port Number (SSL)] is grayed out. [Port Number (SSL)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. 5 [Network] tab 5-124 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.6 [IPP Settings] Configure the settings for IPP function. Select [Network] ö [IPP Settings] ö [IPP Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [IPP Print] Select whether or not to use IPP. page 4-11 [Accept IPP Job] Select whether or not to accept IPP jobs. [Printer Name] Enter a printer name (up to 127 characters). [Printer Location] Enter a printer location (up to 127 characters). [Printer Information] Enter printer information (up to 127 characters). [Printer URI] Displays the URI of the printer that can print data using the IPP. [Operational Support] Select the check box of each job to be executed using the IPP. [Print Job] Select whether to allow a print job. Select this check box to enable IPP printing. [Validate Job] Select whether to allow confirmation of a valid job. [Cancel Job] Select whether to allow canceling the job. [Get Job Attributes] Select whether to obtain job attributes. [Get Jobs] Select whether to obtain a list of job attributes. [Get Print Attributes] Select whether to obtain printer attributes. [IPP Authentication] Select an authentication method. [User Name] Enter a user name (up to 20 characters, excluding a colon (:)). This entry is required if you have selected [Basic] or [Digest] for the [IPP Authentication]. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. bizhub 42/36 5-125 5.7 [Network] tab 5 Reference - If any of [Printer Name], [Printer Location], or [Printer Information] is left blank and you click the [Apply] button, all your input is cleared and the changes you made do not take effect although no error message appears. 5.7.7 [FTP Settings] Configure the settings for FTP function. [FTP Server Settings] Select [Network] ö [FTP Settings] ö [FTP Server Settings]. [Password] Enter the password (up to 20 characters). This entry is required if you have selected [Basic] or [Digest] for the [IPP Authentication]. [Realm] Enter realm (up to 127 characters). This entry is required if you have selected [Basic] or [Digest] for the [IPP Authentication]. Item Description Control Panel Item Description Control Panel [FTP Server] Select whether or not the FTP server is used. page 4-11 [Port Number] Enter the port number of the FTP server. The currently used port number cannot be specified. 5 [Network] tab 5-126 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [FTP TX Settings] Select [Network] ö [FTP Settings] ö [FTP TX Settings]. Item Description [FTP TX] If [Enable] is selected, FTP transmission is enabled. [Connection Timeout] Enter the timeout period for a communication with a server. [Proxy Server Address] To perform transmissions via a proxy server, enter its address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Proxy Server Port Number] Enter the port number of a proxy server. bizhub 42/36 5-127 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.8 [SNMP Settings] Configure the settings for SNMP function. Select [Network] ö [SNMP Settings] ö [SNMP Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [SNMP] If [Enable] is selected, SNMP is enabled. page 4-11 [SNMP v1/v2c(IP)] If [Enable] is selected, SNMPv1/v2c (IP) is enabled. [SNMP v3(IP)] If [Enable] is selected, SNMPv3 (IP) is enabled. [SNMP v1(IPX)] If [Enable] is selected, SNMPv1 (IPX) is enabled. [UDP Port] Enter a UDP port number. The currently used port number cannot be specified. [SNMP v1/v2c Settings] Configure the settings for SNMP v1/v2c. [Read Community Name] Enter a community name used for reading (up to 15 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Write] If [Enable] is selected, the Write function is enabled. [Write Community Name] Enter a community name used for reading and writing (up to 15 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [SNMP v3 Settings] Configure the settings for SNMP v3. 5 [Network] tab 5-128 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [Context Name] Enter a context name (up to 63 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Discovery] If [Enable] is selected, the Discovery function is enabled. [Discovery User Name] Enter a context user for detection (up to 32 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Read User Name] Enter a user name of the read-only user (up to 32 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Security Level] Select a security level of the read-only user. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [auth-password] Enter the password of the read-only user for authentication (up to 32 from 8 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [priv-password] Enter the privacy password of the read-only user to be used for privacy (encryption) (up to 32 from 8 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Write User Name] Enter a user name used of the read and write-only user (up to 32 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Security Level] Select a security level of the read and write-only user. [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [auth-password] Enter the password of the read and write-only user for authentication (up to 32 from 8 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [priv-password] Enter the privacy password of the read and writeonly user to be used for privacy (encryption) (up to 32 from 8 characters, excluding " ' # \ and space). [Encryption Algorithm] Select an encryption algorithm. [Authentication Method] Select an authentication method. [Trap Settings] Configure the settings for SNMP TRAP. [Allow Setting] Select whether or not to permit the Trap settings. [Trap Setting When Authentication Fails] Select whether to enable TRAP transmission at the time of authentication failure. Item Description Control Panel bizhub 42/36 5-129 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.9 [SMB Settings] Configure the settings for SMB function. [WINS Settings] Select [Network] ö [SMB Settings] ö [WINS Settings]. Item Description [WINS] To use the WINS server, select [Enable]. [WINS Automatic Retrieval] To automatically obtain the WINS server address, select [Enable]. This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled. [WINS Server Address 1]/[WINS Server Address 2] Enter the WINS server address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) [Node Type] Specify the name resolution method. • [B Node]: Query by broadcast • [P Node]: Query the WINS server • [M Node]: Query by broadcast, and then query the WINS server • [H Node]: Query the WINS server, and then query by broadcast 5 [Network] tab 5-130 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [SMB Client Settings] Select [Network] ö [SMB Settings] ö [SMB Client Settings]. Item Description [SMB Client] If [Enable] is selected, the SMB client function is enabled. [NTLM] Specify the NTLM version. To perform SMB transmission for Windows sharing (Mac OS X) or Samba (Linux/Unix), select [v1]. To perform SMB transmission for Windows 98SE or Windows Me, select [v1/v2] or [v1]. [DFS] To perform SMB transmission in a DFS (Distributed File System) environment, select [Enable]. bizhub 42/36 5-131 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [Direct Hosting Settings] Select [Network] ö [SMB Settings] ö [Direct Hosting Settings]. Item Description [Direct Hosting] To use IPv6 addresses for communication, select [Enable]. 5 [Network] tab 5-132 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.10 [Web Service Settings] Configure the settings for WSD function. [Common Settings] Select [Network] ö [Web Service Settings] ö [Common Settings]. Item Description [Friendly Name] Enter a Friendly Name (up to 127 characters). [Secure Mode] If [Enable] is selected, SSL is enabled. bizhub 42/36 5-133 5.7 [Network] tab 5 [Printer Settings] Select [Network] ö [Web Service Settings] ö [Printer Settings]. Item Description [Print Function] If [Enable] is selected, the WSD print function is enabled. [Printer Name] Enter a printer name (up to 127 characters, excluding ! \ and ,). [Printer Location] Enter a printer location (up to 127 characters). [Printer Information] Enter printer information (up to 127 characters). 5 [Network] tab 5-134 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [Scanner Settings] Select [Network] ö [Web Service Settings] ö [Scanner Settings]. Item Description [Scan Function] If [Enable] is selected, the WSD scan function is enabled. [Scanner Name] Enter a scanner name (up to 127 characters). [Scanner Location] Enter a scanner location (up to 127 characters). [Scanner Information] Enter scanner information (up to 127 characters). [Connection Timeout] Enter a connection timeout. bizhub 42/36 5-135 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.11 [Bonjour Settings] Configure the settings for Bonjour function. Select [Network] ö [Bonjour Settings] ö [Bonjour Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [Bonjour] Select whether or not to enable the Bonjour function. page 4-11 [Printer Name] Enter a Bonjour name that is displayed as the name of connected device (up to 63 characters). [Priority Protocol] Select the connection protocol given priority with Bonjour. 5 [Network] tab 5-136 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.12 [NetWare Settings] Configure settings for printing in a NetWare environment. [NetWare Settings] Select [Network] ö [NetWare Settings] ö [NetWare Settings]. dReference For details on how to install the printer driver, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Description [IPX/SPX] If [Enable] is selected, the IPX/SPX function is enabled. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. [NetWare Print Mode] Select the NetWare configuration mode. [Print Server Name] Enter a print server name to be operated as PServer (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Print Server Password] Enter a print server password if necessary (up to 63 characters). [Print Queue Scan Rate] Set a job inquiry interval. [Bindery/NDS] Select the bindery options. [Preferred File Server] Enter the priority file server name to be used in the Bindery emulation mode (up to 47 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). [Preferred NDS Context Name] Enter an NDS context name for print server connection (up to 191 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ?). [Preferred NDS Tree Name] Enter an NDS tree name for print server connection (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). [Printer Name] Enter a printer name to be operated as the NPrinter/RPrinter (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). [Printer Number] Enter the NPrinter/RPrinter number. bizhub 42/36 5-137 5.7 [Network] tab 5 In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation 0 When you use the Bindery Emulation, make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the NetWare server. 1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority. 2 Start Pconsole. 3 Select [Quick Setup] from [Available Options] list box, and press the Enter key. 4 Fill in [Print Server Name], [Printer Name], and [Print Queue Name]. Set the [Type] of the printer to [Other/ Unknown], and save them. 5 Terminate Pconsole by pressing the Esc key. 6 Load the PSERVER.NLM file on the NetWare Server console. Then, configure the following settings in [NetWare Setting]. In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation 0 When you use the Bindery Emulation, make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the NetWare server. 0 When you select the Print Server mode, the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server. 1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority. 2 Start Pconsole. 3 Select [Quick Setup] from [Available Options] list box, and press the Enter key. 4 Fill in [Print Server Name], [Printer Name], and [Print Queue Name]. Set the [Type] of the printer to [Other/ Unknown], and save them. 5 Terminate Pconsole by pressing the Esc key. Then, configure the following settings in [NetWare Setting]. Item Description Prior check [IPX/SPX] Select [Enable]. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. Frame type [NetWare Print Mode] Select [NPrinter/RPrinter]. [Printer Name] Enter a printer name to be operated as the NPrinter/ RPrinter (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). The print server name specified in Step 4 [Printer Number] Enter the NPrinter/RPrinter number. Item Description Prior check [IPX/SPX] Select [Enable]. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. Frame type [NetWare Print Mode] Select [PServer]. [Print Server Name] Enter a print server name to be operated as PServer (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). The print server name specified in Step 4 [Print Server Password] Enter a print server password if necessary (up to 63 characters). 5 [Network] tab 5-138 bizhub 42/36 5.7 In NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS) 1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority. 2 Start NWAdmin. 3 Select an organization or department container for the print service, and select [Print Services Quick Setup] from the Tools menu. 4 Fill in [Print Server Name], [Printer Name], [Print Queue Name], and [Print Queue Volume]. Then, set the [Type] of the printer to [Other/Unknown] and save them. 5 Load the PSERVER.NLM file on the NetWare Server console. Then, configure the following settings in [NetWare Setting]. In the NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS) 0 When you select the Print Server mode, the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server. 1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority. 2 Start NWAdmin. 3 Select an organization or department container for the print service, and select [Print Services Quick Setup (non-NDPS)] from the Tools menu. 4 Fill in [Print Server Name], [Printer Name], [Print Queue Name], and [Print Queue Volume]. Then, set the [Type] of the printer to [Other/Unknown] and click [Create]. Then, configure the following settings in [NetWare Setting]. [Print Queue Scan Rate] Set a job inquiry interval. [Bindery/NDS] Select [Bindery/NDS]. [Preferred File Server] Enter the priority file server name to be used in the Bindery emulation mode (up to 47 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). Item Description Prior check [IPX/SPX] Select [Enable]. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. Frame type [NetWare Print Mode] Select [NPrinter/RPrinter]. [Printer Name] Enter a printer name to be operated as the NPrinter/ RPrinter (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). The print server name specified in Step 4 [Printer Number] Enter the NPrinter/RPrinter number. Item Description Prior check [IPX/SPX] Select [Enable]. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. Frame type [NetWare Print Mode] Select [PServer]. [Print Server Name] Enter a print server name to be operated as PServer (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). The print server name specified in Step 4 Item Description Prior check bizhub 42/36 5-139 5.7 [Network] tab 5 For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS) 0 Before starting the NDPS setting, make sure that an NDPS broker and NDPS manager have already been created and loaded. 0 Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol has been set on the NetWare server, an IP address of this machine has been set, and this machine has already been started. 1 From the client, log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority. 2 Start NWAdmin. 3 Right-click the [Organization] and [Organization unit] containers for printer agent creation, and select [NDPS Printer] from Create. 4 Enter a [NDPS Printer Name] in the [Printer Name] field. 5 Select [Create a New Printer Agent] in the [Printer Agent Source] field, and click [Create]. 6 Confirm the printer agent name, and browse and register the NDPS manager in the [NDPS Manager Name] field. 7 Set the [Gateway Types] to [Novell Printer Gateway], and register it. 8 In the [Configure Novell NDPS for Printer Agent] window, set the Printer to [(None)] and the port handler to [Novell Port Handler], and register the settings. 9 Set the [Connection type] to [Remote (LPR on IP)] and register the setting. 10 For the host address, enter the IP address of this machine you have configured. Enter [Print] for the printer name, and then press [Finish] to register the settings. 11 When printer driver registration windows appear, select [None] for each OS and finish the registration. [Print Server Password] Enter a print server password if necessary (up to 63 characters). [Print Queue Scan Rate] Set a job inquiry interval. [Bindery/NDS] Select [NDS]. [Preferred NDS Context Name] Enter an NDS context name for print server connection (up to 191 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ?). [Preferred NDS Tree Name] Enter an NDS tree name for print server connection (up to 63 characters, excluding / \ : ; , * [ ] < > | + = ? .). Item Description Prior check 5 [Network] tab 5-140 bizhub 42/36 5.7 [NetWare Status] Select [Network] ö [NetWare Settings] ö [NetWare Status]. Item Description [File Server] Displays the current NetWare file server. [Queue Name] Displays the current NetWare queue name. [Queue Status] Displays the current NetWare status. bizhub 42/36 5-141 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.13 [AppleTalk Settings] Configure the settings for AppleTalk function. Select [Network] ö [AppleTalk Settings] ö [AppleTalk Settings]. Item Description Control Panel [AppleTalk] If [Enable] is selected, AppleTalk is enabled. page 4-14 [Printer Name] Enter a printer name to be displayed on the selector (up to 31 characters, excluding = and ~). [Zone Name] Enter a name of zone this machine belongs to (up to 31 characters). [Current Zone Name] The current zone name is displayed. 5 [Network] tab 5-142 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.14 [Network Fax Settings] Configure the settings for Network Fax function. (This menu appears when the optional Fax Kit FK-509 is installed.) Select [Network] ö [Network Fax Settings] ö [Network Fax Function Settings]. Item Description [I-Fax] Select whether or not the I-Fax is used. bizhub 42/36 5-143 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.15 [WebDAV Settings] Configure the settings for WebDAV function. Select [Network] ö [WebDAV Settings] ö [WebDAV Client Settings]. Item Description [WebDAV Client] Select whether or not the WebDAV client is used. [Proxy Server Address] To perform transmissions via a proxy server, enter its address. Format: *.*.*.* (Asterisk * can be 0 to 255) If the DNS server has already been configured, you can enter the host name instead. For the host name, specify a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). When using IPv6, you can specify the IPv6 address. [Proxy Server Port Number] Enter the port number of a proxy server. [Proxy Server User Name] Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server (up to 63 characters). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Proxy Server Password] Enter the password to log in to the proxy server (up to 63 characters). [Connection Timeout] Enter the timeout period for a communication with a server. 5 [Network] tab 5-144 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.16 [OpenAPI Settings] Configure the settings for OpenAPI function. Select [Network] ö [OpenAPI Settings] ö [OpenAPI Settings]. Item Description [OpenAPI] Select whether or not OpenAPI is used. [Port Number] Enter a port number. The currently used port number cannot be specified. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used. You can configure this setting if device certificate(s) is registered in [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Device Certificate]. [Port Number (SSL/TLS)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. The currently used port number cannot be specified. [Authentication] Select whether or not to perform OpenAPI authentication. [Login Name] Enter the login name used with OpenAPI authentication (up to 8 characters, excluding symbols). [Change Password] Select this check box to change the password. [Password] Enter the password used with OpenAPI authentication (up to 8 characters, excluding symbols). bizhub 42/36 5-145 5.7 [Network] tab 5 5.7.17 [TCP Socket Settings] Configure the settings for TCP Socket function. Select [Network] ö [TCP Socket Settings] ö [TCP Socket Settings]. Item Description [TCP Socket] Select whether or not the TCP socket is used. [Port Number] Enter a port number. The currently used port number cannot be specified. [SSL/TLS] Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used. You can configure this setting if device certificate(s) is registered in [Security] ö [PKI Settings] ö [Device Certificate]. [Port Number (SSL/TLS)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. The currently used port number cannot be specified. 5 [Network] tab 5-146 bizhub 42/36 5.7 5.7.18 [LLTD Settings] Configure the settings for LLTD function. Select [Network] ö [LLTD Settings] ö [LLTD Settings]. Item Description [LLTD] Select whether or not LLTD is used. 6 Configuration Depending on Your Needs bizhub 42/36 6-3 6.1 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) 6 6 Configuration Depending on Your Needs 6.1 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine by MFP authentication. You can configure the user authentication and account track settings to restrict use of this machine. Specify user authentication when managing individual users, and specify account track when managing a group or multiple users. You can use a combination of user authentication and account track for management of each user for each department. You can use this function to assign the counter to both the department and user counters, and to aggregate the resulting values of both counters. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] (1) User authentication (2) Account track (3) Synchronize user authentication with account track (1) (2) (3) User Registration Account Track Registration Account Track Registration User Registration Finish 6 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) 6-4 bizhub 42/36 6.1 6.1.1 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) Reference - If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, you cannot select [Off] in [Authentication] ö [General Settings] ö [User Authentication]. Also, you cannot allow the public user access. 6.1.2 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. Reference - For details on the ID & print function, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 6.1.3 User Registration Configure user registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-24. Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [Device]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Account Track Method] To use the account track function, select its authentication method. This setting is required when you only use the account track function. [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. Once you specify the account name of the user at user registration, you will be able to log in by entering only the user name. If you have omitted the account name, the user must specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? [Number of Counters Assigned for Users] Enter a number of user counters to be assigned if user authentication and account track are enabled. You can aggregate the counter by user or account track, and assign up to 1,000 counters to users and account tracks. For example, if the number of user counters to be assigned is set to 950, you can register up to 50 account tracks. bizhub 42/36 6-5 6.1 Restricting users of this machine (MFP authentication) 6 6.1.4 Account Track Registration Configure account track registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-26. 6 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) 6-6 bizhub 42/36 6.2 6.2 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine by Active Directory authentication. These settings are required if you wish to use the user authentication with Active Directory on the Windows Server. You can restrict the functions available to each user. You can also restrict users who use this machine using Active Directory authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory function of Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. 6.2.1 [TCP/IP] Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. - To use Active Directory, register the DNS server connected to Active Directory in this machine. - To perform Active Directory authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory function of Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2, configure IPv6. For details on the IPv6 settings, refer to page 3-4. For details, refer to page 3-3. 6.2.2 External Server Settings Configure external server (Active Directory) registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-28. [TCP/IP] External Server Settings [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] [Default Function Permission] [Date/Time Setting] Finish bizhub 42/36 6-7 6.2 Restricting users of this machine (Active Directory) 6 6.2.3 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) 6.2.4 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. 6.2.5 [Default Function Permission] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. For details, refer to page 5-30. 6.2.6 [Date/Time Setting] To use Active Directory, specify the date and time of this machine. - You cannot log in to Active Directory if the system time of this machine and Active Directory is extremely different. Specify the date and time for this machine to match the system time of Active Directory. For details, refer to page 5-12. Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [External Server]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Ticket Hold Time (Active Directory)] Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. To synchronize, specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? 6 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) 6-8 bizhub 42/36 6.3 6.3 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) Configure settings to restrict users who can use this machine by NTLM authentication. These settings are required if you wish to use NTLM authentication when using the Windows NT 4.0 system or when using Active Directory (NT-compatible domain environment) in the Windows Server system. You can restrict the functions available to each user. You can also restrict users who can use this machine by NTLM authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory function (NT-compatible domain environment) of Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2. To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the Direct Hosting service. To resolve the names using a DNS server, prepare the DNS server and configure the DNS settings of this machine. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. 6.3.1 [TCP/IP] Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. - To perform NTLM authentication in an IPv6 environment configured by the Active Directory function (NT-compatible domain environment) of Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2, configure IPv6. For details on the IPv6 settings, refer to page 3-4. - To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the Direct Hosting service. To resolve the names using a DNS server, prepare the DNS server and configure the DNS settings of this machine. For details, refer to page 3-3. 6.3.2 External Server Settings Configure external server (NTLM) registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-28. [TCP/IP] External Server Settings [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] [Default Function Permission] In an IPv6 environment? No Yes Do you use a WINS serv- [Direct Hosting Settings] Yes No [WINS Settings] Finish bizhub 42/36 6-9 6.3 Restricting users of this machine (Windows domain or workgroup) 6 6.3.3 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) 6.3.4 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. 6.3.5 [Default Function Permission] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. For details, refer to page 5-30. 6.3.6 [WINS Settings] When you start NTLM authentication via the router, you must set up the WINS server. For details, refer to page 5-129. 6.3.7 [Direct Hosting Settings] To use NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment, you must enable the direct hosting service. For details, refer to page 5-131. Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [External Server]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. To synchronize, specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? 6 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX) 6-10 bizhub 42/36 6.4 6.4 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX) Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine by NDS over IPX/SPX authentication. These settings are required if you use the NetWare 5.1 or later and use the NDS authentication in the IPX/SPX environment. You can restrict the functions available to each user. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. 6.4.1 External Server Settings Configure external server (NDS) registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-28. 6.4.2 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) External Server Settings [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] [Default Function Permission] [NetWare Settings] Finish Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [External Server]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. To synchronize, specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? bizhub 42/36 6-11 6.4 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over IPX/SPX) 6 6.4.3 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. 6.4.4 [Default Function Permission] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. For details, refer to page 5-30. 6.4.5 [NetWare Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Network] ö [NetWare Settings] ö [Net- Ware Settings]. Item Description Prior check [IPX/SPX] Select [Enable]. [Ethernet Frame Type] Select a frame type to be used. Frame type 6 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) 6-12 bizhub 42/36 6.5 6.5 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine by NDS over TCP/IP authentication. These settings are required if you use the NetWare 5.1 or later and use NDS authentication in the TCP/IP environment. You can restrict the functions available to each user. To use the authentication with NDS over TCP/IP, you must specify the DNS server in [TCP/IP]. During user authentication, the tree name and context name are inquired to the specified DNS server to obtain the IP address of the NDS authentication server. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. Reference - Apply the latest service pack to each NetWare version. 6.5.1 [TCP/IP] Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. - To use the authentication with NDS over TCP/IP, you must specify the DNS server. For details, refer to page 3-3. 6.5.2 External Server Settings Configure external server (NDS) registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-28. [TCP/IP] External Server Settings [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] [Default Function Permission] Finish bizhub 42/36 6-13 6.5 Restricting users of this machine (NDS over TCP/IP) 6 6.5.3 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) 6.5.4 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. 6.5.5 [Default Function Permission] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. For details, refer to page 5-30. Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [External Server]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. To synchronize, specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? 6 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) 6-14 bizhub 42/36 6.6 6.6 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) Configure settings to restrict users who use this machine by LDAP authentication. These settings are required if you use the LDAP server for user authentication. You can restrict the functions available to each user. Use the following flowchart to configure settings. Clicking a step jumps to the associated procedure. Reference - To use the same LDAP server for both user authentication and destination search, the certificate verification settings of the LDAP server for user authentication specified in [External Server List] are determined according to the certificate verification settings of the LDAP server for destination search specified in [Network] ö [LDAP Settings] ö [LDAP Server Registration]. For details on LDAP server settings for destination search and certificate verification settings, refer to page 5-47. 6.6.1 [TCP/IP] Configure settings to use this machine in the TCP/IP network environment. For details, refer to page 3-3. 6.6.2 External Server Settings Configure external server (LDAP) registration settings. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) For details, refer to page 5-28. [TCP/IP] External Server Settings [General Settings] [ID & Print Settings] [Default Function Permission] Do you have an SSL communication with the LDAP server? Yes No LDAP over SSL Finish bizhub 42/36 6-15 6.6 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) 6 6.6.3 [General Settings] In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the following items are not displayed.) 6.6.4 [ID & Print Settings] Configure settings to use or operate the ID & Print function. For details, refer to page 5-32. 6.6.5 [Default Function Permission] Configure the default settings for function permissions to users who are authenticated on the external server. For details, refer to page 5-30. Item Description Prior check [User Authentication] Select [External Server]. [Public Access] Select whether to allow the public user access. If [Allow] is selected, the public user can use this machine by selecting [Public User] in the login page to log in to the machine. If [Allow (without Login)] is selected, the public user can use this machine without logging in to the machine in the login page. Do you permit the public user access? [Account Track] To enable account track, select [On]. To select [On], specify the authentication method first, and then register accounts in [Account Track List]. Do you use the account track function? [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] To synchronize user authentication with account track and manage users for each account track, select [Synchronize]. To synchronize, specify the account name when logging in for the first time. The account name that the user specify at the first login time will be registered as the account name of the user. Do you synchronize user authentication with account track? 6 Restricting users of this machine (LDAP) 6-16 bizhub 42/36 6.6 6.6.6 LDAP over SSL External Server Settings In the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [External Server List] ö [Edit]. (If you use PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, this item is not displayed.) LDAP Server Registration Specify the device certificate used in LDAP protocol. For details, refer to page 5-47. Certificate Verification Settings Configure settings used to verify certificates. For details, refer to page 5-53. Item Description Prior check [SSL] Select [Enable] to encrypt an SSL communication between this machine and the LDAP server. Does the server support SSL? [Port Number (SSL)] Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Server port number 7 Authentication unit bizhub 42/36 7-3 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 7 Authentication unit This chapter describes the Authentication Unit AU-201. 1. Authentication Unit AU-201 7.1 Using authentication unit The Authentication Unit AU-201 is an "IC card authentication" system that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. To use the authentication unit, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, and register users. NOTICE Authentication Unit AU-201 must be installed inside the Working Table WT-510. Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication unit. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. Do not leave the IC card within 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) of the card reader. 1 7 Using authentication unit 7-4 bizhub 42/36 7.1 7.1.1 Configuring this machine NOTICE To configure IC card authentication, the loadable driver needs to be installed in the machine. For details, contact your service representative. User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. You configure user authentication using PageScope Web Connection. This device does not support external server authentication. For [Public Access] or [Account Track] settings, refer to page 5-21. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to [Synchronize]. 1 Log in to the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection. % For details on how to log in to the administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, refer to page 3-6. 2 Select [Security] ö [Authentication] ö [General Settings]. 3 Set [User Authentication] to [Device]. 4 Click [Apply]. 5 In the [General Settings] window of [Authentication Device Settings], select your option for [Authentication Type] and [IC Card Type]. bizhub 42/36 7-5 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 % In [IC Card Type], specify the required IC card type. % For [Authentication Type], specify how to log in to this machine after registration. [Card Authentication]: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication+Password]: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. 6 Click [Apply]. 7 Exit PageScope Web Connection. 7.1.2 Registering a user The following two methods can be used to register a user. - Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine - Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user NOTICE The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data. Registering a user using the Control Panel of this machine 1 Use the Control Panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. 2 Press [Authentication Setting]. 3 Press [Card Authentication]. 7 Using authentication unit 7-6 bizhub 42/36 7.1 4 Select the user name to be registered and press [OK]. % Press [All] to display all users. Press [Search] to extract target users with search characters. 5 Press [Edit]. % Press [Edit] also if the IC card information which has previously been registered is to be modified or a card ID has been registered through [Input the card ID directly] of Data Administrator. % To delete a previously registered IC card information, press [Delete]. Select [Yes] and press [OK] on the confirmation screen that will appear. 6 Place the IC card on the Working Table WT-510 and press [OK]. bizhub 42/36 7-7 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 7 Press [Close]. Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. NOTICE Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the [Help] menu of Data Administrator, select [Version Information]. NOTICE This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click [Plug-in version]. 3 In [Plug-in information list], confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. % This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x". Setup 1 Turn the Power Switch of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer. The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears. 3 Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)]. 4 Insert the application DVD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the DVD-ROM drive of the computer. 5 Click the [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)]. 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application DVD-ROM, and then click [Next]. % When the driver's search location is not the application DVD-ROM, click [Browse]. Select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the DVD-ROM, and click [OK]. Installation starts. 7 Click [Close]. Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 7 Using authentication unit 7-8 bizhub 42/36 7.1 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD-ROM, and then click setup.exe. 9 Select a language, and then click [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation. 11 Click [Next]. 12 Select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next]. 13 Click [Install]. 14 Click [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup. User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer, and also connect the computer to this machine via network. 1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the Power Switch of this machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit. % When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4. NOTICE To turn the Power Switch off and on, first turn the Power Switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur. 2 Turn on the Power Switch of this machine. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. NOTICE Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit. bizhub 42/36 7-9 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. % For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. 5 In Select Function, select [Authentication Settings] - [User Authentication Settings], and then click [Add]. 7 Using authentication unit 7-10 bizhub 42/36 7.1 6 Select the desired template, and then click [OK]. The User Registration window appears. 7 Enter the user name and password, and select the [IC card authentication] tab. % Enter the E-mail address and other information as required. 8 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and click [Start reading]. % If necessary, click [Input the card ID directory] to register the card ID. bizhub 42/36 7-11 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 9 Click [OK]. % Repeat steps 5 to 9 to register all users. 10 Click [Export to the device]. % Select the user name and click [Edit] to change the registered data. 7 Using authentication unit 7-12 bizhub 42/36 7.1 11 Click [Write]. % Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 12 Click [OK]. 13 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer. 14 Turn the Power Switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and turn the Power Switch of this machine on. NOTICE To turn the Power Switch off and on, first turn the Power Switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur. bizhub 42/36 7-13 7.1 Using authentication unit 7 Associating the user with card using authentication device When a user and card ID have been registered using Data Administrator, the user must be associated with the card in the Administrator Settings of the machine. 1 Use the Control Panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. 2 Press [Authentication Setting]. 3 Press [Card Authentication]. 4 Select a user to be registered, and press [OK]. % Press [All] to display all users. Press [Search] to extract target users with search characters. 5 Press [Edit]. % Press [Delete] to cancel the registration when IC card information is already registered. 6 Place the IC card on Working Table WT-510, and press [OK]. % This associates the user with the IC card and registers the IC card for the user. 7 Using authentication unit 7-14 bizhub 42/36 7.1 8 Appendix bizhub 42/36 8-3 8.1 Product specifications (Network functions) 8 8 Appendix 8.1 Product specifications (Network functions) * When using the Lotus Domino Server, and setting the search condition to "OR", the function will not work correctly. Item Specification Type Embedded Frame type IEEE802.2/802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE802.3SNAP Cable type 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Connector RJ-45 Main supported protocols TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP, FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP, NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME, IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD, SSDP, SOAP Supported LDAP Servers OpenLDAP 2.1x, Active Directory, Exchange 5.5/2000, Sun Java Directory Server (Netscape/iPlanet Directory Server), Novell NetWare 5.x/6.x NDS, Novell eDirectory 8.6/8.7, and Lotus Domino Server (5.x/6.x)*. Supported LDAP protocol LDAP Protocol Version 3 (Version 2 is not supported) Supported SSL versions SSL2, SSL3, and TLS1.0 (An x.509 certificate must be installed on the server.) Multiprotocol Auto detection Operating environments of PageScope Web Connection Compatible Web browsers: • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 3.6 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 3.6 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 3.6 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) Settings Saved to non-volatile memory 8 Error Message 8-4 bizhub 42/36 8.2 8.2 Error Message Follow the instructions below if error messages are displayed. Message Possible Cause Remedy [Configuration of Options Changed] [Configuration of options has been changed. Power OFF and ON.] While the power of the machine was ON, the configuration of options was changed. Turn the machine off, then on again. [Job Log Error] [The job log has reached the maximum allowed. Contact the administrator.] The write area of the job log has reached the maximum allowed. Delete the job log using the Control Panel or PageScope Web Connection. [Card Authentication Registration Error] [Authentication failure. Try again from the beginning.] Error occurred while reading IC card. Restart registration from the beginning. [Counter reached its limit.] [Counter has reached its maximum allowance. Please delete the job.] The upper limit of the counter is exceeded. Delete a job. [Expiration Error] [The Enhanced Server Authentication application has expired. Change the User Authentication method to one other than Enhanced Server Authentication.] In external server authentication, the account is expired. Contact your server administrator. [IEEE802.1x Authentication failure.] [Please reboot.] Due to timeout during IEEE802.1X port authentication, user was automatically forced to log off. Reboot the machine, perform IEEE802.1X port authentication, and log in. [IEEE802.1x Authenticating] [Please wait.] IEEE 802.1X port authentication is being performed. If authentication is successful, the message is cleared. If authentication times out, turn the machine off, then on again. [Incorrect HDD] [Format HDD.] The HDD used in another machine is installed. Format the HDD from the control panel. bizhub 42/36 8-5 8.3 Glossary 8 8.3 Glossary Term Description 10Base-T /100Base-TX /1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. 2in1 A function to send the original by double-page spread, consolidating two pages on a sheet. 2-Sided Binding Direction A function to specify the binding position of a double-sided document when it is sent using ADF. Two types of binding positions are available for a double-sided original: One is the top/bottom binding with the binding position at the top or bottom of the original. The other is left/right binding with the binding position at the left (or right) of the original. Note that the second side of the original has a different top/bottom relationship. Abbreviated/address A function to register frequently used fax numbers of recipients. When registering abbreviated/addresses, you should also register the destination name and the search string, so that you can specify the destination using the search string to select. Active Directory A network service provided by Microsoft. Active Directory can centrally manage all types of information including servers, clients, printers and other hardware resources, as well as properties and access permissions of users on the network. Anonymous FTP While FTP sites are usually protected using some account name and password mechanism, an anonymous FTP system permits anyone to access the FTP site by simply entering "anonymous" as the account name, without a password. APOP The acronym for Authenticated Post Office Protocol. While usual POP does not encrypt the password used for receiving an E-mail, APOP encrypts the password. This authentication method helps enhance the E-mail security. AppleTalk The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0". Background Removal A function to adjust the shading of background color before sending the original. Batch transmission A function to send documents as one document at a specified time if the documents have the same transmission conditions such as destination, transmission time, memory transmission or resolution, and are stored in the same memory. Baudrate The transmission rate of a modem. This machine can communicate at a high transmission rate of 33,600bps. When selecting overseas communication mode, the machine communicates at 7200bps or 4800bps, a rate suitable for noise-resistance. bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous for the larger size Bitmap Font characters. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. It is a file format used to save image data. (The file extension is ".bmp"). Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Bonjour A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting a device connected to the network for automatic configuration. Previously called "Rendezvous", and has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4. Book Copy A function to separate the front cover, back cover, right pages, and left pages into individual pages when sending a book or catalog by fax. BOOTP The abbreviation for Bootstrap Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Instead of BOOTP, DHCP, an advanced protocol based on BOOTP, is typically used today. 8 Glossary 8-6 bizhub 42/36 8.3 bps The acronym for bit per second, which is a unit of data transmission, indicating the amount of data transmitted per second. Broadcast A transmission of a single original to multiple recipients in one operation. Bulletin board A function to post documents to be viewed, or to store the documents to be transmitted via polling. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. Client A computer using services provided by servers via the network. Closed Network RX A function to accept only transmissions from recipient machines with a matching password. Compact PDF/XPS A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF or XPS format, used when digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents. Confidential communication A function used to transmit an original only to specific people who you want to read it. Originals sent via confidential communication are not printed when received, and are saved in a confidential box of the recipient's fax machine. The document can be printed by some specific operation such as entering the access code for the confidential box. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation. CSV The acronym for Comma Separated Values, which is one of the formats used for saving database or spreadsheet data as a text file. (The file extension is ".csv".) Data can be shared among different applications by being separated by commas (as the delimiter). Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function is activated. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. Default value A setting value configured for the machine prior to shipment from the factory. Some default values can be changed by using the settings menu. It will be convenient to set a frequently used value to the default value according to your application. Density The amount of density of an image. Density Compensation A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. Dialing Method There are three Dialing methods: PB (push-button dialing), 10PPS (pulse dialing /10 pps), and 20PPS (pulse dialing /20 pps). Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors. This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness on the image. DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. Term Description bizhub 42/36 8-7 8.3 Glossary 8 DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. DSN The acronym for Delivery Status Notifications, which is a delivery status notification message being returned from a receiver to a sender when the E-mail is delivered to the receiver's mail server. Dynamic authentication (LDAP setting) An authentication method option used when connecting to a LDAP server form a multifunctional product. Select this option if you want an user to enter the login name and password each time the user logs on the LDAP server to refer to destination information. ECM The acronym for Error Correction Mode. An error resending method used for G3 communication. ECM checks whether the data is correctly sent to the destination, and should it be not the case, ECM resends the same data while maintains the serial communication. If a receiver also provides the ECM mode, this machine uses the ECM-based communication with the receiver unless the ECM mode is disabled. Erase A function of erasing dark shadow around the document before transmitting it via fax, when scanning a booklet form document or a document with ADF kept open. Ethernet LAN transmission line standard. F-Code A communication procedure related to the usage of subaddress of T.30* standardized by ITU-T (international telecommunication union). F-code is provided by Japanese Communications Industrial Corporation. Various kinds of capabilities are available for the communication among fax machines with the F-code function irrespective of difference of the fax machine brand. This machine uses Fcode for the bulletin boards, relay request, confidential communication, and password transmission. (* a communication standard) File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". Forced memory reception A function to store received documents in memory, and print them when required. Frame type A type of communication format used in NetWare environments. For mutual communication, the same frame type is required. FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol, which is used to transfer files via the Internet, intranet or other TCP/IP network. G3 A fax communication mode standardized by the ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union). G3 and G4 are provided for the communication modes. Today, G3 is more widely used than G4. Gateway Hardware and software used as the point where a network is connected to a network. A gateway not only connects networks but also changes data formats, addresses, and protocols according to the connected networks. Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce smoother transition of the shading. Gray scale A form presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Group The grouping of multiple abbreviation numbers. It will be convenient to use the group when a volume of serial broadcasts or serial pollings are distributed to the same destination addresses. GSS-SPNEGO/ Simple/Digest MD5 Authentication methods used for logging in to the LDAP server. The different authentication method, GSS-SPNEGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5 is used for a LDAP server depending on the type of the server being used or server settings. Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black and white dots Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. Host name The name of a device on the network. Term Description 8 Glossary 8-8 bizhub 42/36 8.3 HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information. IEEE802.1X A standard used in a wired or wireless LAN to authenticate terminals gaining access to the network. A LAN switch compatible with IEEE802.1X permits a user to connect with the LAN after authentication (to confirm whether the user is authorized). Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. Internet Fax A transmission method by which the scanned original data is transmitted among Internet fax machines and computers as TIFF format E-mail attachments via the intranet (in-house network) and the Internet. IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32- bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. The IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet. IPP The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol, which is used to send or receive print data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also send and print data to printers in remote areas via the Internet. IPsec The name of a security technology used for the TCP/IP network. IPsec allows service with enhanced security by determining the protocol used for the encryption of transmit packets and for authentication. IPv6 The acronym for Internet Protocol version 6. With the number of devices on the Internet increasing, the IPv6 protocol has been arranged to replace the current IPv4 protocol. 128-bit IP addressing system and expanded security features. IPX One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI reference model. IPX/SPX The abbreviation for Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange, which is a protocol developed by Novell, Inc., typically used in NetWare environments. JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group. It is a file format used to save image data. The compression ratio is generally 1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other natural images. Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network, which is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, which is a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network. LLMNR The acronym for Link-local Multicast Name Resolution,which is a protocol used for the name resolution of neighboring computers. LLMNR uses simple exchange of request and response messages to perform name resolution of neighboring computers without configuring DNS server or clients. LLTD The acronym for Link Layer Topology Discovery,which is a technology investigating how the devices on the network are connected.Network devices with this technology are recognized by Windows Vista/Server 2008/7 on the network, and displayed as icons configured on the network map of Windows Vista/7 Local printer A printer connected to a parallel or USB port of a computer. Long Original A function to send original pages longer than the standard size. Long size documents can be sent by selecting this function. Term Description bizhub 42/36 8-9 8.3 Glossary 8 LPD The acronym for Line Printer Daemon. This is a platform-independent printer protocol running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed for BSD UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used among general computers. LPR/LPD The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. This is a printing method implemented via networks, used for Windows NT or UNIX based systems. It uses TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or UNIX to a printer on the network. MAC address MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. A MAC address is an ID number unique to each Ethernet card, enabling sending or receiving data to or from other Ethernet cards. A Mac address consists of 48-bit numbers. The first 24 bits are controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture, whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique number to each card. Main Scanning The operation of scanning a document optically, and converting the document into image data. Main scanning direction The horizontal direction for scanning originals. Manual transmission An operation to send a fax while checking the status of the receiver. MDN The acronym for Message Disposition Notifications,which is a message sent to confirm that the mail has been unsealed, a response to a sender when the sender requests for doing so. Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. Memory overflow A condition where the fax memory becomes full while scanned documents or temporarily stored documents are saved. Memory transmission A method used to start a fax transmission after scanning originals and storing them in memory. If memory transmission is used, the total number of pages are automatically printed in the page number of the transmission source information and an image of the first page of the sent document is printed in the transmission report. However, the memory may become full if the document contains many pages, or there is a large amount of information due to high image quality. MIB The acronym for Management Information Base, which defines the format of management information for network devices that are collected using SNMP in TCP/IP communication. Two types of MIB are provided, that is, the private MIB specific to each manufacturer and the standardized MIB. Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages. NDPS The acronym for Novell Distributed Print Services. This provides a high performance printing solution in NDS environments. By using the NDPS as a printer server, you can output from the desired printer, automatically download the printer driver of a newly installed printer, simplify and automate complicated management environments related to printer use, and integrate management related to the network printer. NDS The acronym for Novell Directory Services. This allows the centralized management in a hierarchical structure of shared resources such as servers, printers and users information on the network, as well as the access privilege and other information related to the users. NetBIOS The abbreviation for Network Basic Input Output System,which is a communication interface developed by IBM. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell. This uses NetWare IPX/SPX for the communication protocol. Nprinter/Rprinter A remote printer support module used when using a printer server in NetWare environments. Rprinter is used for NetWare 3.x, and Nprinter for NetWare 4.x. NTLM The acronym for NT LAN Manager, which is a user authentication method used for Windows NT or later. NTLM encodes password using MD4 or MD5 encoding method. Term Description 8 Glossary 8-10 bizhub 42/36 8.3 NTP The acronym for Network Time Protocol, which is a protocol used to adjust the computer's internal clock precisely via the network. In a hierarchical method, the time is adjusted with the server at the highest level using GPS to acquire the correct time, which is then referenced by each lower level host. Number of Originals Transmission with information of the total number of pages. A function used for quick memory transmission. This allows the recipient to check whether the all pages were received or not (In case of memory transmission, the total no. of pages are automatically added). OCR The acronym for Optical Character Reader, which is a device or software that converts handwritten or printed characters to text data by optically scanning them and comparing them with previously stored patterns for identification. OHP/OHT A transparent sheet used for OHP (Overhead projector). This is used for presentations. OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system of a computer. Windows, Mac OS, or Unix is an OS. Password TX A function to send a fax with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network reception. PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission. Pause A temporary break in dialing. In this machine, each pause creates a one second break during dialing. PB A push telephone line. PC-FAX A function to send a fax directly from a computer without using paper. PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is a PostScript based format, and can be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software. PDL The acronym for Page Description Language. This is a language used to instruct a page printer about images being printed on each page. Peer-to-peer A type of network allowing connected devices to communicate each other without using a dedicated server. Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image. Plug and play A mechanism of immediately detecting a peripheral device when it is connected to a computer, and automatically searching an appropriate driver so that the device becomes operable. Polling A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send originals set or stored in the sender's machine or memory. POP Before SMTP A user authentication method used when sending E-mail messages. POP Before SMTP receives E-mail messages first, then authenticates the user using the POP server. The IP address, passed through the user authentication by the POP server, is then permitted to use the SMTP server. This method prevents third parties without permission to use the mail server from sending mail messages. POP3 The acronym for Post Office Protocol - Version 3,which is a commonly used transmission protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and reception of E-mail. POP3 has functions including mail box authentication, E-mail download, list information check, and E-mail deletion. Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PostScript A typical page-descriptive language developed by Adobe and is commonly used for high quality printing. Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or scanning. Print job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Print queue A software system used by a spooler to save generated print jobs. Term Description bizhub 42/36 8-11 8.3 Glossary 8 Printer buffer A memory area temporarily used for processing data of print jobs. Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer. Program A function to register frequently used destination fax numbers, or stereotyped transmission operation procedures. By simply pressing a program key, you can specify the destination, or configure a function automatically to start communication. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, you can use its property to configure different functions. Also by using a file property, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals. Proxy server A server installed for the connection with the Internet. A proxy server acts as a proxy of client computers to contact the Internet to ensure security effectively for the total organization. PServer A print server module available in Netware environments. This module monitors, changes, pauses, restarts, or cancels print jobs. Queue name A logical printer name required for LPD/LPR printing. A name assigned to each device for allowing printing to the device via network. Quick memory transmission A method used to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the original. This method allows even an original with many pages to be sent without overflowing the memory. RAW port number A TCP port number used when the RAW protocol is selected for Windows or other TCP printing. The RAW port number is usually set to 9100. realm (IPP setting) An area used for allowing security functions. The area is used to organize user names, passwords and other authentication information, and define the security policy in the area. Receiving A fax machine status when it receives a call. Redial A function to re-dial a fax number after waiting for a specified length of time when recipient's line is busy. Both manual redial and automatic redial functions are available. Reference Allowed Level A feature for specifying settings so that only certain people are able to view certain destination information for the security of the information. When synchronized with user authentication, only information with an access permission level matching that specified for the user can be viewed. Referral setting (LDAP setting) If no relevant destination data is found on an LDAP server, the LDAP server itself instructs which LDAP server to be searched for the next. The referral setting configures whether the multifunctional product is responsible for searching the next LDAP server. Resending A function to select and resend a document that was not send but stored in the memory. The document can be resent either to the same destination or to another destination. Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced precisely on an image or a print matter. RIP The acronym for Raster Image Processor. RIP extracts picture images from text data created using PostScript or other page description language. This processor is usually integrated into a printer. S/MIME The acronym for Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions,which is a protocol used to add encryption, digital signature, and other features to MIME (E-mail operations). Public key method is used for encryption, using a different key for encryption and decryption. Samba UNIX server software which uses SMB (Server Message Block) to make UNIX system resources available to Windows environments. Term Description 8 Glossary 8-12 bizhub 42/36 8.3 Scan Size A function to specify the scanning size of an original to transmit it. If the width of the paper in the recipient's fax machine is smaller than that of the transmitted document, the document will usually be reduced for printing purposes. If you do not want to reduce the document size, specify the same document size as that of the paper in the recipient's fax machine, so that you can send the document with its original size. Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen font A font used for displaying characters/symbols on a CRT or other monitor. Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image. Sender Fax No. An identification code used for the mutual recognition for fax transmission. Usually the fax number is registered for the fax ID. Sender Name The name of a sender. On the receiver's side, the name is printed as a part of the sender's information at the edge of the transmitted original. Sending Sending indicates making a call. For fax, sending indicates sending originals or dialing for pollings. Shared printer A printer connected to a server on the network and configured to be used by multiple computers. Sharpness A function to enhance the edge of characters before sending the document. Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page. SLP The acronym for Service Location Protocol, which is a protocol capable of finding services on the TCP/IP network, and the automatic configuration of clients. SMB The acronym for Server Message Block, which is a protocol allowing the share of files and printers mainly over the Windows network. SMTP The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, which is a protocol used to transmit or transfer E-mail. SNMP The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol, which is a management protocol in the TCP/IP network environments. Spool The acronym for Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line. Data to be output to a printer is not sent directly to the printer, but is temporarily stored in another location. The stored data is then sent collectively to the printer. SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security,which is an encoding method used to transmit data between the Web server and a browser in a secure manner. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. Sub-scanning direction The vertical direction for scanning originals. Super G3 (SG3) A G3 communication mode complying with ITU-T V.34. Compared with usual G3 communication, it allows the higher rate transmission (up to 33,400bps). TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, which is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. TCP Socket TCP Socket indicates an API used for the TCP/IP network. This socket is used to open a transmission route for input or output of usual files. Temporary document saving A function to save received documents automatically to memory when the machine is unable to print the documents for some reason such as running out of paper. When a proper action is taken such as refilling of paper, the temporarily saved document is printed out. Thumbnail A function to display the content of an image or document file as a small image (image displayed when the file is opened). Term Description bizhub 42/36 8-13 8.3 Glossary 8 TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format. It is a file format used to save image data. (The file extension is ".tif"). By using the "tag" indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. Timer TX A function to transmit a fax at the specified time. It reduce costs by transmitting faxes in the late evening or early morning when discount telephone services are available. Transmission reservation A function to program the next transmission during transmission or printing. Transmission source record The transmission time, name, telephone number, page number, and other information on the sender's side printed at the edge of the document on the receiver's side. Transmission time The time needed to send a fax. The higher the resolution or larger the paper, the longer the transmission takes. TrueType A type of outline font developed by Apple and Microsoft, and currently used as a standard font type for Macintosh and Windows. This type of font can be used both for display and printing. TSI The acronym for Transmitting Subscriber Identification, which is the ID of a fax transmission terminal. TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required. Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus,which is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. V34 A communication mode used for super G3 fax transmission. Super G3 mode transmission may not be activated because of a telephone line status where the receiver's or sender's machine is connected to a telephone line via a private branch exchange switchboard. If this occurs, the G3 mode should be disabled by turning V34 off. Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. Web service Which is a technology useful for detecting a device on the network, using the device functions or obtaining the device information. Web service comes equipped with Windows Vista/7, and is used to detect devices on the network and to perform printing or scanning via the network. WINS The acronym for Windows Internet Naming Service. This is a service, available in Windows environments, to call the name server responsible for conversion between a computer name and an IP address. Zone A name used for an AppleTalk network. Zone is used to group multiple devices on the AppleTalk network. Term Description 8 Glossary 8-14 bizhub 42/36 8.3 9 Index bizhub 42/36 9-3 9.1 Index by item 9 9 Index 9.1 Index by item A Account track method 5-22 Account track number 5-24 Active directory 6-6 Address 5-84 Address registration 4-7 Admin settings 4-3 Administrator mode 3-6 Administrator password 4-35 Administrator registration 4-6 Administrator settings 2-6 AppleTalk 4-14 Authentication device settings 5-25, 5-33 Authentication setting 4-10 Authentication unit (IC card type) 7-3 Auto continue 4-20 Automatic logout time 3-8 B Binary division 4-15 C Certificate information 5-39 Certificate verification 5-53 Change password 5-53 Closed network RX password 4-53 Comm. settings 4-49 Contact utility link 5-8 Control panel 2-3 Copy settings 4-19 Create a self-signed certificate 5-36 Custom size 4-21 D Default operation selection 5-32 Default paper 4-21 Delete a certificate 5-39 Driver URL 5-8 Drum dry 4-33 E Emulation 4-24 Encryption method 4-16 Encryption strength 5-40 Enhanced security mode 4-37 Erase job log 4-45 Error message 8-4 Ethernet 4-11 Export a certificate 5-39 External memory print 4-17 F Fax factory default 4-61 Fax function settings 4-51 Fax image initialized 4-61 Fax report 4-59 Fax settings 4-46 Fax target 4-60 Finisher settings 4-33 Folder settings 4-34 Forward TX settings 4-54 Function permission 5-24 Function settings 4-50 G Gradation adjustment 4-32 H HDD format 4-42 HDD settings 4-38 Header/footer settings 4-47 Hold job timeout 4-22 I IC card type 7-3 ID & print 5-32 IKE settings 5-55 Import a certificate 5-37 IPsec 5-54 IPsec peer settings 5-55 IPsec SA settings 5-55 IPv6 3-4 J Job 5-63 Job timeout 4-18 L LDAP 5-121, 6-14 LDAP over SSL 6-16 Leading edge adj. side 2 (Dx) 4-29 Leading edge adjustment 4-29 Leading edge adjustment tray 4-29 Left ADJ duplex 4-30 List print 4-60 Low Power 5-15 Low Power Mode Setting 4-5 Low Power Time 5-15 LowPowerMode Time Setting 4-5 9-4 bizhub 42/36 9 Index by item 9.1 M Machine settings 4-4 Maintenance menu 4-26 Max. allowance set 5-25 Max. density adjustment 4-31 Measurement unit setting 4-21 Memory RX 4-52 MFP authentication 6-3 N NDS over IPX/SPX 6-10 NDS over TCP/IP 6-12 Netware 4-13 Network 5-110 Network speed 4-14 Nighttime RX settings 4-57 No proxy for following domain 5-53 NTLM authentication 6-8 Number of counters assigned for users 5-22 O OCSP service 5-53 Output permission (Scan) 5-24 Overwrite all data 4-38 P PageScope Web Connection 3-5, 5-3 Paper 4-21 Paper alignment plate settings 4-33 Paper empty 4-43 Paper size 4-21 Paper type 4-21 Password 5-24, 5-53 PBX connection settings 4-58 PC-Fax RX settings 4-56 PKI settings 5-35 Print 5-72 Print menu 4-26 Print settings 4-20 Print without authentication 5-22 Printer adjustment 4-27 Proxy server address 5-53 Proxy server port number 5-53 Public user 5-32 Q Quality settings 4-23 R Remote RX settings 4-55 Request a certificate 5-37 Restore defaults 4-41 Restriction code settings 4-44 S S/MIME comm. setting 4-16 Security 5-21 Security details 4-36 Security settings 4-35 Sender 5-20 Sender settings 4-46 Shift output each job 4-5 Side edge adjustment 4-30 Specification 8-3 SSD low-level format 4-40 SSL/TLS 5-40 Startup page setting 4-20 Storage 5-81 Supplies and accessories 5-8 Synchronize user authentication & account track 5-22 System 5-3 T TCP socket 5-145 TCP/IP 3-3, 4-11 Timeout 5-53 U URL 5-53 User authentication 6-3, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, 6-12, 6-14 User name 5-53 Utility/counter 2-5 bizhub 42/36 9-5 9.2 Index by button 9 9.2 Index by button A Accept IPP Job 5-124 Accessibility 2-5 Account Track 5-21 Account Track Registration 6-5 Activity Report 4-26, 4-59 Address Book 4-9 Address Registration 2-5, 4-7 Adjustment Time 5-13 Admin Settings 2-5, 4-3 Administrator E-mail Address 5-15 Administrator Name 5-15 Administrator Password 4-35, 5-62 Administrator Registration 4-6 Administrator Settings 2-6 All 4-42 All Settings 5-16 Allow Setting 5-128 AppleTalk 5-141 Area Code 5-34 ARP/PING 4-12 Authentication 5-21 Authentication Method 5-122, 5-128 Authentication Setting 4-10 Authentication Type 5-33 auth-password 5-128 Auto Del Interval 4-34 Auto Document Delete Time 4-34 Auto Logout 3-8, 5-61 Auto Power OFF Setting 4-4 Auto Power OFF Time 4-4 Auto Reset 4-5 Auto Reset Settings 4-5 B Bindery/NDS 5-136 Black 128 4-26 Black 256 4-26 Black 64 4-26 Bonjour 4-12, 5-135 BOOTP 4-11 Brightness 4-23 Broadcast Report 4-59 Broadcast Result Report 4-59 Building Code 5-34 C Cancel Job 5-124 Card Authentication 4-10 Change Password 5-24 Check HDD Capacity 4-38 Closed Network RX Password 4-53 Comm. Settings 4-49 Company Code 5-34 Company Identification Code 5-34 Confirm Addr (Register) 4-51 Confirm Addr (TX) 4-51 Connection Timeout 5-126, 5-134, 5-143 Contact Information 5-8 Contact Name 5-8 Context Name 5-128 Contrast 4-23 Copy 5-30 Copy Settings 4-19 Corporate URL 5-8 Counter 5-6 Current Zone Name 5-141 D Date & Time Settings 4-4 Date/Time Settings 5-12 Daylight Saving Time 4-4, 5-14 Default Emulation 4-24 Default Function Permission 6-7 Dest. Check Display Func. 4-51 Device Information 5-3, 5-15 Device Location 5-15 Device Name 5-15 DFS 5-130 DHCP 4-11 Digital Signature 4-16 Direct Hosting 5-131 Disable Job History Display 4-36 Discovery 5-128 Discovery User Name 5-128 Do Startup Page 5-15 Document Hold Setting 4-34 Domain Name 5-123 Drum Dry 4-33 Duplex Print (RX) 4-50 Dynamic DNS 4-12 E Economy Print 4-23 Edge Enhancement 4-23 Edge Strength 4-23 E-mail 4-7, 4-9 E-mail Address 5-18, 5-24 Enable 4-11 Encryption Algorithm 5-128 Energy Saver Time 5-15 Engine DipSW 4-27 Enhanced Security Mode 4-37 Erase Job Log 4-45 Ethernet 4-11 Ethernet Frame Type 5-136 Event Log 4-26 External Memory Print 4-17 External Server (Active Directory) 5-28 9-6 bizhub 42/36 9 Index by button 9.2 External Server (LDAP) 5-29 External Server (NDS) 5-28 External Server (NTLM) 5-28 External Server Name 5-24 External Server Settings 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, 6-12, 6-14, 6-16 F Fax 4-7, 4-9, 5-30 Fax Factory Default 4-61 Fax Function Settings 4-51 Fax Image Initialized 4-61 Fax Report 4-59 Fax Settings 4-46 Fax Target 4-60 Fax TX Header Name 4-47 F-Code TX 4-51 Feed Zoom 4-28 File Server 5-140 Floor Code 5-34 Folder Settings 4-34 Footer Position 4-47 Forward TX Settings 4-54 Friendly Name 5-132 FTP 4-7, 4-9, 4-12 FTP Server 5-125 FTP TX 5-126 Function Settings 4-50 G Gateway 4-11 General Settings 6-4, 6-7, 6-9, 6-10, 6-13, 6-15 Get Job Attributes 5-124 Get Jobs 5-124 Get Print Attributes 5-124 Gradation 4-26 Gradation Adjustment 4-23, 4-28 Group Address 4-9 H Halftone 4-23 HDD Format 4-42 HDD Settings 4-38 Header Position 4-47 Header/Footer Settings 4-47 Hide Personal Data 4-36 Hide Personal Information 5-15 HTTP 4-12 HTTP Server 5-123 I IC Card Type 5-33 ID & Print Settings 5-32, 6-4 IEEE802.1X 5-59 I-Fax 5-142 I-Fax RX Error Report 4-59 Import/Export 5-9 Inch Paper Priority 4-50 Internet Fax 4-7, 4-9 IP Address 4-11, 5-18 IP Address Filter 4-12 IPP 4-12 IPP Authentication 5-124 IPP Print 5-124 IPSec 4-12 IPv6 4-12 IPX Address 5-18 IPX/SPX 5-136 J Job Log 5-9, 5-15 Job Timeout 4-18 L Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Dx) 4-27, 4-29 Leading Edge Adjustment 4-27, 4-29 Leading Edge Adjustment Tray 4-27, 4-29 Left ADJ Duplex 4-27, 4-30 Limiting Access to Destination 5-60 Line Monitor 4-49 Line Monitor Volume 4-49 List Output 4-8 List Print 4-60 List/Counter 4-4 LLTD 5-146 Logout Confirmation Display 4-10 M Machine Settings 4-4, 4-6 Maintenance Menu 4-26 Manual Destination Input 4-36, 5-30 Manual RX V.34 OFF 4-49 Max Image Density Adj 4-28 Max. Density Adjustment 4-31 Max. Search Result 5-122 Memory RX 4-52 Meter Count 2-5 Min. Reduction for RX Print 4-50 Model Name 5-19 N NetWare Print Mode 5-136 NetWare Settings 6-11 Network Settings 5-16 Network Speed 3-3 Night Fax RX Print 4-57 Night RX End Time 4-57 Night RX Start Time 4-57 Nighttime RX Settings 4-57 No. 5-24 Node Type 5-129 NTLM 5-130 NTP Server Address 5-13 Number of Addresses 4-8 bizhub 42/36 9-7 9.2 Index by button 9 Number of RX Call Rings 4-49 O Online Assistance 5-8 OpenAPI 5-144 Operational Support 5-124 Overwrite All Data 4-38 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 Paper Empty 4-43 Paper Priority 4-19, 4-50 Paper Separation Adjustment 4-28 Password Rules 4-36 PB/DP 4-49 PBX Connection Settings 4-58 PBX Function 4-58 PBX Number 4-58 PC-Fax RX Print 4-56 PC-Fax RX Settings 4-56 PC-Fax TX Error Report 4-59 PCL 4-24 Port Number 5-13, 5-122, 5-123, 5-125, 5-144, 5-145 Port Number (SSL) 5-122, 5-123 Port Number (SSL/TLS) 5-144, 5-145 Preferred File Server 5-136 Preferred NDS Context Name 5-136 Preferred NDS Tree Name 5-136 Print 5-30 Print Function 5-133 Print Job 5-124 Print Paper Size 4-50 Print Queue Scan Rate 5-136 Print Separate Fax Pages 4-50 Print Server Name 5-136 Print Server Password 5-136 Print Settings 4-20 Printer Information 5-124, 5-133 Printer Location 5-124, 5-133 Printer Name 5-124, 5-133, 5-135, 5-136, 5-141 Printer Number 5-136 Printer URI 5-124 Priority Mode 4-5 Priority Protocol 5-135 priv-password 5-128 Product Help URL 5-8 Proxy Server Address 5-126, 5-143 Proxy Server Password 5-143 Proxy Server Port Number 5-126, 5-143 Proxy Server User Name 5-143 PS 4-24 Public Access 5-21 Q Queue Name 5-140 Queue Status 5-140 R RAW Port 4-12 Read Community Name 5-127 Read User Name 5-128 Realm 5-125 Redial 4-49 Redial Interval 4-49 Register Notification Address 5-19 Registering and Changing Addr. 4-36 Remote RX Enabled 4-55 Remote RX No. 4-55 Remote RX Settings 4-55 Replenish Toner 4-28 Report Input Tray 4-4 Restore All 4-41 Restore Defaults 4-41 Restore Network 4-41 Restore System 4-41 Restrict Fax RX 4-51 Restrict Fax TX 4-51 Restrict Internet Fax RX 4-51 Restrict Internet Fax TX 4-51 Restrict PC-Fax TX 4-51 Restrict Scan to USB 4-36 Restriction Code Settings 4-44 Ring Pattern 4-49 Room Code 5-34 RX Mode 4-49 S S/MIME Enabled 4-16 Scan Event Log 4-26 Scan Function 5-134 Scan Send Report Print 4-26 Scan to HDD 5-30 Scan to Network 5-30 Scan to USB Memory 5-30 Scanner Information 5-134 Scanner Location 5-134 Scanner Name 5-134 Schedule Setting 5-19 Search Base 5-122 Secure Mode 5-132 Security Details 4-36 Security Level 5-34, 5-128 Security Settings 4-35 Sender 4-46 Sender Fax No. 4-46 Sender Settings 4-46 Server Address 5-122 Side Edge Adjustment 4-27, 4-30 Sleep Time Setting 4-4 SLP 4-12 SMB 4-7, 4-9 SMB Client 5-130 SMTP 4-12 9-8 bizhub 42/36 9 Index by button 9.2 SNMP 4-12, 5-127 SNMP v1(IPX) 5-127 SNMP v1/v2c Settings 5-127 SNMP v1/v2c(IP) 5-127 SNMP v3 Settings 5-127 SNMP v3(IP) 5-127 Specify Tray When APS OFF 4-19 SSD Low-level Format 4-40 SSL/TLS 5-122, 5-123, 5-144, 5-145 Start Number 4-8 Subnet Mask 4-11 System Settings 5-16 T TCP/IP Setting 3-4 TCP/IP Settings 3-3 Telnet 4-12 Ticket Hold Time (Active Directory) 5-21 Time Adjustment 5-13 Time Adjustment Settings 5-13 Time Zone 4-4, 5-13 Timeout 5-122 Trap Setting When Authentication Fails 5-128 Trap Settings 5-128 Tray Selection for RX Print 4-50 TX Reserve 4-59 TX Result Report 4-59 TX Result Report Image 4-59 TX Result Report Screen 4-59 U UDP Port 5-127 Unit of Measure 5-15 User Area (Print) 4-42 User Area (Scan) 4-42 User Authentication 5-21 User List Diplay Setting 4-10 User Name 5-24, 5-124 User Referral 5-123 User Registration 6-4 User Settings 2-5 Utility/Counter 2-5 V Validate Job 5-124 W WebDAV 4-7, 4-9 WebDAV Client 5-143 WINS 5-129 WINS Automatic Retrieval 5-129 WINS Server Address 1 5-129 WINS Server Address 2 5-129 Write 5-127 Write Community Name 5-127 Write User Name 5-128 WSD Print 4-12 X XPS 4-24 Z Zone Name User’s Guide . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Contents-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-3 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9 Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-11 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Use conditions 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-3. Web Browser Image panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Overview of each function 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Page- Scope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-3 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-3 My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-3 My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-3 3 Assigning Application Keys bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-4. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. 1 2 3 3 Overview 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. No. Name Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function. 3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key. 4 Web Browser Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. dReference For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Overview 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings] ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings] ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2 4 Basic operation 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list. 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. dReference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16. 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon. 4 Toolbar 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. 4 Toolbar 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. 4 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-11. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]). bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information]* Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log]* Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries. 5 Screen components 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta. com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again. 5 Using the User Box function 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-8. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name. 5 Using the User Box function 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility]. 5 Using the User Box function 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted. 5 Using the User Box function 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6 Displaying the Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Operating Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-11. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-16. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-18. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. dReference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Operating Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Description 6 Operating Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings] ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytes 6 Registering a photo in the address book 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted. 7 PDF Processing Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-5). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8). dReference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. 7 PDF document properties 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level. 7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description 7 Direct Print 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8 Searchable PDF function bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. dReference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt 8 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. dReference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. 8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 My Panel Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information dReference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9 Overview 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. dReference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. dReference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-16. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-9. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-11. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-13. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-14. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-15. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-16. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. dReference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. dReference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing]. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. 10 My Address function bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel. 10 Overview 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.]. 10 Registering and editing a destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. dReference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. dReference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10 Copying destinations between address books 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. 10 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing 5-3 Acquiring my panel 9-4 Address book 10-5 Application key 3-3, 3-5 Application menu 3-4 C Cache 5-3 Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18 Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6 D Deleting 5-10 Display mode of web browser 4-11 Displaying 4-20 E Entering text in web browser 4-10 External memory 6-16 F Flash player 4-4 G Group 10-6 I Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22 Image panel operation 6-6 J Just-fit rendering 4-11 L Logging in 5-5 Logging out 5-5 M Main menu 9-5 My address 2-4, 10-3 My address book 10-3, 10-10 My address book acquisition 10-4 My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5 My panel settings 9-6 O OCR 8-4 Opening user boxes 5-6 Operating web browser 4-10 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 PDF processing 2-4, 7-3 Photo 6-19 PIN code 6-18 Print 6-15 Printing 4-18, 5-8 Public address book 10-3 R Restriction of web browser 4-6 Restrictions on my address 10-4 Restrictions on my panel 9-4 S Saving 4-21 Scanning 6-8 Screen components of image panel 6-5 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Screen components of web browser 4-9 Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Send tray 6-17 Smart-fit rendering 4-11 Speaker 4-11 Specifications 4-4, 6-19 Specifications for web browser 4-4 T Toolbar 4-12 U Upload 4-22 User box 5-6, 6-9 W Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Web browser information 4-17 Web browser settings 4-16 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button A Access log 4-17 Address 4-14 Address Book (Personal) 10-5 Address Book Index Default 9-11 Application key 1 3-3 Application key 2 3-4 Application Key Settings 3-5 Application menu 3-4 Application menu key 3-3 Authentication information 4-17 C Cache 4-17 Cellular Phone 6-11 Color Selection Settings 9-14 Combine Documents 6-13 Cookie 4-17 Copier Settings 9-9 Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8 Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9 D Default Address Book 9-12 Default Address Type 9-12 Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13 Default Tab Density Settings 9-10 Destination List 6-16 Digital ID 7-6 Direct Print 7-8 Display 4-16 Document Settings 6-14 Document Source List 6-9 Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14 E Edit Document 6-12 Encryption 7-5 External memory 6-10, 6-16 F Favorites (Add) 4-13 Favorites (List) 4-13 Function Permission 4-7 G Group 10-6 H History 4-14 I Initial Screen Settings 9-16 L Language Setting 9-8 M Main Menu Settings 9-15 Manage windows 4-17 Measurement Unit Settings 9-8 Menu 4-16 My Panel Settings 9-6 O OCR operation setting 8-4 P Page Operation 4-16 Password 7-5 PDF Document Properties 7-4 Photo/Icon 6-20 Preview 6-12 Print 4-15, 6-15 Proxy 4-17 Q Quick Settings 9-10 R Return to Scan Dest. 6-14 S Scan 6-8 Scan/Fax Settings 9-11 Security 4-17 Settings 4-17 Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-13 U User Box Settings 9-13 W Web browser contents access 4-8 Web browser setting Handleiding . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Inhoud-1 Inhoud 1 Inleiding 1.1 Welkom............................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Handleidingen .................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 Handleiding ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4 1.2 Gebruiksvoorwaarden .................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventies die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt ................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbolen die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt .......................................................................... 1-5 Deze machine veilig gebruiken .......................................................................................................... 1-5 Procedure-instructie .......................................................................................................................... 1-5 Toetssymbolen................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Origineel- en papieraanduidingen...................................................................................................... 1-6 Origineel- en papierformaten ............................................................................................................. 1-6 Origineel- en papieraanduidingen...................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overzicht 2.1 Overzicht van elke functie.............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Tabel met ondersteunde functies ...................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Toetsopmaak nadat de functie is uitgebreid ..................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functies die beschikbaar zijn met uitgebreide functies..................................................................... 2-4 3 Toepassingstoetsen toewijzen 3.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Toetsopmaak nadat de functie is uitgebreid ..................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Toepassing]............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 De toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2 aanpassen.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Instellingen toep.toetsen].................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Functie Webbrowser 4.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Beschikbare bewerkingen met de functie Webbrowser .................................................................... 4-3 4.1.2 Specificaties....................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specificaties voor Webbrowser ......................................................................................................... 4-4 Beperkingen op Flash Player ............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Webbrowser weergeven................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3 De instellingen configureren om het gebruik van de webbrowser mogelijk te maken............ 4-6 4.3.1 Het gebruik van de webbrowser in de MFP beperken ...................................................................... 4-6 [Webbrowser-instelling] ..................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Het gebruik van Webbrowser beperken voor elke gebruiker ............................................................ 4-7 [Functie permissie] ............................................................................................................................. 4-7 4.3.3 Het gebruik van lokale inhoud beperken ........................................................................................... 4-8 [Toegang inhoud webbrowser] .......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basisbewerking............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Schermcomponenten ........................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.2 Bedieningsinstructies....................................................................................................................... 4-10 Bediening via het tiptoetsscherm .................................................................................................... 4-10 Bediening via de cijfertoetsen ......................................................................................................... 4-10 4.4.3 Tekst invoeren.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Tekst invoeren.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Inhoud-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Schermweergavemodus .................................................................................................................. 4-11 [Normaal].......................................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Exacte aanpassing renderen].......................................................................................................... 4-11 [Intelligente aanpassing renderen] ................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Het luidsprekervolume opgeven ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5 Werkbalk ........................................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.1 Beschrijving van de werkbalk .......................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.2 [Bladwijzer] - [Weergave] ................................................................................................................. 4-13 Lijst met favorieten........................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.3 [Bladwijzer] - [Toev.]......................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.4 [Adres] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.5.5 [Hist] ................................................................................................................................................. 4-14 [Historie weergeven] ........................................................................................................................ 4-14 4.5.6 [Print.]............................................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 De Webbrowser-instellingen configureren................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.1 [Paginabewerking]............................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.2 [Weergave] ....................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.3 [Vensters beheren] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Instellingen] ..................................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan ....................................................... 4-19 4.7.1 Een documentbestand afdrukken.................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.2 Een documentbestand weergeven .................................................................................................. 4-21 4.7.3 Een documentbestand opslaan ....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8 Een documentbestand uploaden................................................................................................. 4-23 4.8.1 Beperkingen..................................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.2 Een gescand documentbestand uploaden...................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.3 Een documentbestand in een gebruikersbox uploaden .................................................................. 4-24 5 PageScope Web Connection (functie Webbrowser) 5.1 PageScope Web Connection gebruiken....................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.1 Voorafgaande controle....................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Toegang ............................................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2 Schermcomponenten ..................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Aanmelden en afmelden................................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Aanmelden ......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Afmelden............................................................................................................................................ 5-6 5.4 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken.............................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.1 Gebruikersbox openen ...................................................................................................................... 5-7 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-7 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.2 Documentbewerkingen...................................................................................................................... 5-9 Een document afdrukken................................................................................................................... 5-9 Een document verwijderen .............................................................................................................. 5-11 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Functies.............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Het Image Panel weergeven .......................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Schermcomponenten ........................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.2 Algemene bediening .......................................................................................................................... 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Inhoud-3 6.3.3 Een document lezen .......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Een document scannen ..................................................................................................................... 6-8 Ophalen vanaf een gebruikersbox ..................................................................................................... 6-9 Een document ophalen vanaf een extern geheugen ....................................................................... 6-10 Met gegevens die zijn opgeslagen in een mobiele telefoon of PDA................................................ 6-11 6.3.4 Het document bewerken.................................................................................................................. 6-12 [Voorbeeld]....................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/pagina] - [Document bewerken] .................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/pagina] - [Documenten combineren]............................................................................. 6-14 [Document/pagina] - [Documentinst.] .............................................................................................. 6-15 [Terug naar Scanbest.]..................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Een bestemming opgeven ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Afdrukken......................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Bestemmingen opgeven .................................................................................................................. 6-17 Een document opslaan in een extern geheugen ............................................................................. 6-18 6.3.6 De verzendlade controleren............................................................................................................. 6-19 Verzendlade ..................................................................................................................................... 6-19 [TX-lade controleren]........................................................................................................................ 6-20 6.3.7 Gegevens verzenden vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA............................................................... 6-21 6.4 Een foto registreren in het adresboek ........................................................................................ 6-22 6.4.1 Specificaties fotogegevens.............................................................................................................. 6-22 6.4.2 Fotogegevens registreren ................................................................................................................ 6-23 6.5 Image Panel aanpassen ............................................................................................................... 6-25 6.5.1 Het gebied Gegevens lezen aanpassen .......................................................................................... 6-25 6.5.2 Het gebied Documentbestemming aanpassen ............................................................................... 6-26 6.5.3 Een geregistreerd snelkoppelingspictogram verwijderen................................................................ 6-27 7 PDF-verwerkingsfunctie 7.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Beschikbare bewerkingen met de PDF-verwerkingsfunctie.............................................................. 7-3 7.2 PDF-documenteigenschappen...................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 PDF-document coderen en digitale handtekening toevoegen................................................... 7-5 7.3.1 Op wachtwoord gebaseerde codering .............................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Op digitale ID gebaseerde codering .................................................................................................. 7-6 7.4 Direct print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Doorzoekbare PDF-functie 8.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Voorzorgsmaatregelen bij het maken van doorzoekbare PDF-bestanden........................................ 8-3 Herkenbare tekengrootte ................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 De OCR-bewerkingsinstellingen configureren ............................................................................ 8-4 [OCR-bewerkingsinstelling]................................................................................................................ 8-4 8.3 De doorzoekbare PDF-instelling configureren............................................................................. 8-5 9 Functie My Panel 9.1 Overzicht.......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Beschikbare bewerkingen met Mijn paneel ....................................................................................... 9-3 Aanpasbare items .............................................................................................................................. 9-3 Functies die beschikbaar zijn door te verbinden met de webbrowser .............................................. 9-3 Functies die beschikbaar zijn met het Image Panel........................................................................... 9-4 9.1.2 Procedure voor het ophalen van My Panel........................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Beperkingen op het gebruik van de functie My Panel ....................................................................... 9-5 9.2 My Panel weergeven....................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.1 Hoofdmenu ........................................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.2.2 Het hoofdmenu weergeven................................................................................................................ 9-6 Inhoud-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 My Panel aanpassen....................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.1 [Instellingen Mijn paneel].................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 [Instellingen Mijn paneel] weergeven ................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.3 [Taalselectie] ...................................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Meeteenheid instelling] ..................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.5 [Kop.app.inst.].................................................................................................................................. 9-10 [Standaard tab] ................................................................................................................................ 9-10 [Sneltoets 1] - [Sneltoets 2].............................................................................................................. 9-10 [Snelinstellingen 1] - [Snelinstellingen 4].......................................................................................... 9-11 [Densiteitinstellingen standaard tabblad]......................................................................................... 9-11 9.3.6 [Scan/fax instellingen] ...................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Standaard tab] ................................................................................................................................ 9-12 [Adresboek standaard index] ........................................................................................................... 9-12 [Sneltoets 1] - [Sneltoets 2].............................................................................................................. 9-13 [Standaard adresboek]..................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Standaard adrestype]...................................................................................................................... 9-14 9.3.7 [Gebruikersboxinstelling].................................................................................................................. 9-14 [Standaard tab] ................................................................................................................................ 9-14 [Sneltoets 1] - [Sneltoets 2].............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.8 [Kleurselectie instellingen]................................................................................................................ 9-15 9.3.9 [Hoofdmenu-instellingen] ................................................................................................................. 9-15 Hoofdmenuknop .............................................................................................................................. 9-16 Een hoofdmenuknop registreren ..................................................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Basisscherminstellingen]................................................................................................................. 9-17 10 Functie My Address 10.1 Overzicht........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classificatie van adresboeken ......................................................................................................... 10-3 Openbaar adresboek ....................................................................................................................... 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 Ophaalprocedure My Address Book ............................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Beperkingen op het gebruik van de functie My Address................................................................. 10-4 10.2 Een bestemming registreren en bewerken ................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.1 Adresboek........................................................................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.2 Groep ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Kopieerbestemmingen tussen adresboeken ............................................................................. 10-8 10.3.1 Bestemmingen kopiëren van het openbare adresboek naar My Address Book ............................. 10-8 10.3.2 Bestemmingen kopiëren van My Address Book naar het openbare adresboek ............................. 10-9 10.4 My Address Book gebruiken tijdens het verzenden van een document ............................... 10-10 10.4.1 Bestemmingen opgeven ................................................................................................................ 10-10 10.4.2 Bestemmingen zoeken .................................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index op item................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index op knop................................................................................................................................ 11-4 1 Inleiding bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welkom 1 1 Inleiding 1.1 Welkom Hartelijk dank voor uw aankoop van deze machine. Deze handleiding beschrijft het overzicht en het gebruik van functies die beschikbaar zijn door een optionele licentieset op deze machine te registreren en functies die beschikbaar zijn door een verbinding te maken met een toepassing. Lees deze handleiding om elke functie effectief te gebruiken. 1.1.1 Handleidingen Gedrukte handleiding Overzicht [Snelgids Kopieer-/afdruk-/fax-/scan-/ boxbewerkingen] Deze handleiding beschrijft de bedieningsprocedures en de functies die u het vaakst gebruikt zodat u deze machine onmiddellijk kunt beginnen gebruiken. Daarnaast bevat deze handleiding opmerkingen en waarschuwingen die moeten worden gevolgd voor een veilig gebruik van deze machine. Zorg dat u deze handleiding leest voordat u deze machine gebruikt. Deze handleiding beschrijft de details van handelsmerken en auteursrechten. • Handelsmerken en auteursrechten Dvd-handleidingen Overzicht [Handleiding Kopieerbewerkingen] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over bewerkingen in de kopieermodus en over de instellingen van deze machine. • Specificaties van originelen en kopieerpapier • Kopieerfunctie • Deze machine onderhouden • Problemen oplossen [Handleiding Bewerkingen Vergroot display] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over de bedieningsprocedures van de functie Vergroot display. • Kopieerfunctie • Scanfunctie • G3 FAX-functie • Netwerkfaxfunctie [Handleiding Afdrukbewerkingen] Deze handleiding geeft een gedetailleerde beschrijving van de printerfuncties. • Printerfunctie • Het printerstuurprogramma instellen [Handleiding Boxbewerkingen] Deze handleiding geeft een gedetailleerde beschrijving van de gebruikersboxfuncties. • Gegevens opslaan in gebruikersboxen • Gegevens ophalen van gebruikersboxen • Gegevens overdragen en afdrukken vanaf gebruikersboxen [Handleiding Netwerkscan-/fax-/netwerkfaxbewerkingen] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over het verzenden van gescande gegevens. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, opslaan in gebruikersbox, WebDAV TX, Webservices • G3 Fax • IP-adresfax, Internetfax [Handleiding Bewerkingen faxstuurprogramma] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over de functie van het faxstuurprogramma dat faxen rechtstreeks vanaf een computer verzendt. • Pc-fax 1 Gebruiksvoorwaarden 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 Handleiding Deze handleiding is bedoeld voor verschillende gebruikers, zowel voor mensen die deze machine voor de eerste keer gebruiken als voor beheerders. Hier vindt u een beschrijving van de basisbewerkingen, functies die een handigere bediening mogelijk maken, eenvoudige bewerkingen voor het oplossen van problemen en verschillende instelmethoden van deze machine. Houd ermee rekening dat een technische basiskennis vereist is van de gebruikers, zodat ze bewerkingen voor het oplossen van problemen kunnen uitvoeren. Beperk uw probleemoplossingen tot de gebieden die in deze handleiding zijn uitgelegd. Neem contact op met uw leverancier als u problemen ondervindt. 1.2 Gebruiksvoorwaarden Wanneer u i-Option LK-101 v2 inschakelt, kunt u toegang verkrijgen tot internet via het bedieningspaneel van de MFP. De gebruikers zullen aansprakelijk zijn voor de geopende, gedownloade en geüploade inhoud via de webbrowser in de MFP en voor andere meegedeelde inhoud. De gebruikers moeten de bedrijfsregels en wetten van het land waarin deze machine wordt gebruikt, naleven. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. en haar groepsbedrijven zullen niet aansprakelijk zijn voor gebruik van het internet door gebruikers. [Handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over de instelmethodes voor elke functie via de netwerkverbinding. • Netwerkinstelling • Instellingen bij PageScope Web Connection [Handleiding Geavanceerde functiebewerkingen] Deze handleiding beschrijft details over de functies die beschikbaar worden door het registreren van de optionele licentiekit en door het maken van een verbinding met een toepassing. • Functie Webbrowser • Image Panel • PDF-verwerkingsfunctie • Doorzoekbare PDF • Functies Mijn paneel en Mijn adres Dvd-handleidingen Overzicht bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventies die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt 1 1.3 Conventies die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt 1.3.1 Symbolen die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt Symbolen die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt om verschillende types informatie uit te drukken. Hieronder vindt u een beschrijving van elk symbool met betrekking tot een correct en veilig gebruik van deze machine. Deze machine veilig gebruiken 7 WAARSCHUWING - Dit symbool gaat aan dat het niet naleven van de instructies kan leiden tot ernstige letsels of overlijden. 7 VOORZICHTIG - Dit symbool geeft aan dat het negeren van de instructies kan leiden tot een verkeerde hantering waardoor lichamelijke letsels of materiële schade kan ontstaan. OPMERKING Dit symbool geeft een risico aan dat kan leiden tot schade aan deze machine of documenten. Volg de instructies om materiële schade te vermijden. Procedure-instructie 0 Deze markering geeft een optie aan voor de functies en omstandigheden waaraan vooraf moet worden voldaan om een procedure te gebruiken. 1 Dit formaatnummer "1" staat voor de eerste stap. 2 Dit formaatnummer staat voor de volgorde van de reeks stappen. % Dit symbool geeft aan dat er extra uitleg is voor een procedure-instructie. % Dit symbool geeft de overgang van het bedieningspaneel aan om het gewenste menu-item te openen. Dit symbool geeft een gewenste pagina aan. De bewerkingen worden beschreven aan de hand van afbeeldingen. 1 Conventies die in deze handleiding worden gebruikt 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dReferentie Dit symbool geeft een referentie aan. Geef de referentie weer zoals vereist. Toetssymbolen [ ] Deze haken geven toetsnamen op het tiptoetsscherm of het computerscherm of de naam van een handleiding aan. Vetgedrukte tekstToetsnamen op het bedieningspaneel, namen van onderdelen, producten en opties, worden in het vet aangeduid. 1.3.2 Origineel- en papieraanduidingen Origineel- en papierformaten Hieronder vindt u de uitleg van de aanduidingen voor originelen en papier die in deze handleiding zijn beschreven. Wanneer het origineel of papierformaat wordt aangegeven, staat de Yzijde voor de breedte en de X-zijde voor de lengte. Origineel- en papieraanduidingen w geeft het papierformaat aan, waarbij de lengte (X) langer is dan de breedte (Y). v geeft het papierformaat aan, waarbij de lengte (X) korter is dan de breedte (Y). 2 Overzicht bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overzicht van elke functie 2 2 Overzicht 2.1 Overzicht van elke functie Hieronder vindt u een overzicht van elke functie. Referentie - Om de geavanceerde functie te gebruiken, is de optionele Upgrade Kit UK-203 vereist. - Er moet een harde schijf in de MFP zijn geïnstalleerd om de geavanceerde functie te gebruiken. - Raadpleeg de [Snelgids Kopieer-/afdruk-/fax-/scan-/boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over de licentiekitregistratie en het inschakelen van functies op MFP's. - Om de functie met de toepassing te verbinden, schakelt u deze in aan de zijde van de toepassing. Raadpleeg de handleiding van de overeenkomende toepassing voor details over het inschakelen van de functie. 2.1.1 Tabel met ondersteunde functies De volgende tabel toont de ondersteunde functies voor de licentiekits en toepassingen. 2.1.2 Toetsopmaak nadat de functie is uitgebreid Wanneer u de functie Webbrowser, Image Panel of Mijn paneel toevoegt, wijzigt het gebruik van de toetsen Box, Fax/Scan, en Kopie op het bedieningspaneel. - De toets Box werkt als de toets Menu Toepassing, en de toetsen Fax/Scan en Kopie werken als toepassingstoetsen. - Druk op Menu Toepassing om het [Menu Toepassing] weer te geven zodat u kunt schakelen naar de toegevoegde functie. - Om te passen bij de gebruiksstatus, kan de functie die wordt toegewezen aan de toepassingstoets, worden gewijzigd. Raadpleeg pagina 3-3 voor meer informatie. Webbrowser Image Panel PDF-verwerking Doorzoekbare PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Overzicht van elke functie 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Functies die beschikbaar zijn met uitgebreide functies Hieronder vindt u een overzicht van elke functie. Raadpleeg de hieronder beschreven referentie voor details. Referentie - Als het accountbeheerapparaat op de MFP is geïnstalleerd, kan het Image Panel niet worden gebruikt. Functie Overzicht Referentie Webbrowser Deze functie kan worden gebruikt door i-Option LK-101 v2 te registreren in de MFP. Door het bedieningspaneel van de MFP die met het netwerk is verbonden te gebruiken, kunt u toegang krijgen tot het internet of intranet en de inhoud weergeven of afdrukken. Via een webbrowser kunt u ook de PageScope Web Connection bedienen van de MFP die met het netwerk is verbonden en documenten die in gebruikersboxen zijn opgeslagen, gebruiken. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Deze functie kan worden gebruikt door i-Option LK-101 v2 te registreren in de MFP. Image Panel is een nieuwe intuïtieve en gemakkelijk te begrijpen paneelinterface. Dit paneel helpt u bij het grafische voorstellen van de bewerking, vanaf het laden tot en met het verzenden van een document. U kunt fotogegevens toevoegen aan de snelkiesbestemmingen met behulp van PageScope Web Connection. De geregistreerde fotogegevens worden toegepast op de adreslijst van het Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF-verwerking Deze functie kan worden gebruikt op de MFP waarop de i-Option LK-102 is geregistreerd. Voert de codering van de PDF op basis van een wachtwoord of een digitale ID uit, voegt een digitale handtekening toe en configureert de instellingen voor de eigenschappen wanneer documenten in PDF-indeling worden verdeeld met de scan- of gebruikersboxfunctie. p. 7-3 Doorzoekbare PDF Deze functie is beschikbaar wanneer i-Option LK-105 is geregistreerd met de MFP. U kunt een op tekst doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maken door transparante tekstgegevens te plakken op het gebied van een document waarin tekens worden herkend via een OCR-proces. U kunt een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maken wanneer u een origineel opslaat of verzendt in PDF-indeling met de scan- of gebruikersboxfuncties. p. 8-3 My Panel (Mijn paneel) Deze functie wordt gebruikt in combinatie met PageScope My Panel Manager. Beschikbaar door het centraal beheren van de omgeving van het bedieningspaneel dat door de gebruiker is aangepast, afhankelijk van de toepassing (My Panel) en vervolgens My Panel te verkrijgen op de MFP die door de gebruiker is geselecteerd. p. 9-3 My Address (Mijn adres) Deze functie wordt gebruikt in combinatie met PageScope My Panel Manager. Beschikbaar door het centraal beheren van het persoonlijke adresboek (My Address Book) door de server en vervolgens My Address Book op te halen op de MFP die door gebruiker is geselecteerd. p. 10-3 3 Toepassingstoetsen toewijzen bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overzicht 3 3 Toepassingstoetsen toewijzen 3.1 Overzicht Het volgende beschrijft de toetsopmaak en de toets [Menu Toepassing] op het bedieningspaneel. 3.1.1 Toetsopmaak nadat de functie is uitgebreid Door de functie Webbrowser, Image Panel of My Panel toe te voegen, kan Box werken als Menu Toepassing, Fax/Scan en Kopie als toepassingstoetsen. Referentie - De functies Webbrowser en Image Panel kunnen worden gebruikt door de i-Option LK-101 v2 te registreren in de MFP. - De functie My Panel wordt gebruikt in combinatie met PageScope My Panel Manager. Nr. Naam Beschrijving 1 Menu Toepassing Druk op deze toets om het [Menu Toepassing] weer te geven. U kunt geen andere functie aan deze toets toewijzen. Als een functie is toegevoegd, moet u de sticker Menu Toepassing sticker (bijgeleverd in de Upgradekit UK-203) om de toetsnaam op het bedieningspaneel te wijzigen. Raadpleeg pagina 3-4 voor meer informatie. 1 2 3 3 Overzicht 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Toepassing] Druk op Menu Toepassing m het [Menu Toepassing] weer te geven Om een functie te gebruiken die niet is toegewezen aan de toets Toepassing 1 of 2, kunt u de functies schakelen naar een gewenste functie in het [Menu Toepassing]. 2 Toets Toepassing 1 De fax/scanfunctie wordt standaard toegewezen. De beheerder kan een andere functie aan deze toets toewijzen. Als de functie die aan de toets is toegewezen, wordt gewijzigd, bevestigt u een sticker met de beschrijving van de nieuwe functie (inbegrepen in de Upgrade Kit UK-203) om de toetsnaam op het bedieningspaneel te wijzigen. Raadpleeg pagina 3-5 voor meer informatie over het toewijzen van een functie. 3 Toets Toepassing 2 De kopieerfunctie is standaard toegewezen. De beheerder kan een andere functie aan deze toets toewijzen. Als de functie die aan de toets is toegewezen, wordt gewijzigd, bevestigt u een sticker met de beschrijving van de nieuwe functie (inbegrepen in de Upgrade Kit UK-203) om de toetsnaam op het bedieningspaneel te wijzigen. Raadpleeg pagina 3-5 voor meer informatie over het toewijzen van een functie. Nr. Naam Beschrijving bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 De toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2 aanpassen 3 3.2 De toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2 aanpassen Om te passen bij de gebruiksstatus, kan de functie die wordt toegewezen aan de toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2, worden gewijzigd. 3.2.1 [Instellingen toep.toetsen] Om een functie toe te wijzen aan de toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2, moet u [Instellingen toepassingstoets] gebruiken. 1 Druk op Hulpprogramma om het scherm [Toepassing] weer te geven. 2 Druk op [Beheerderinstelling]. 3 Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op [Systeeminst.]. 5 Druk in het [Systeeminstellingen] (2/2) op [Instellingen toep.toetsen]. 6 Selecteer een toepassingstoets ([Toets 1] of [Toets 2]) waaraan u een functie toewijst. 3 De toepassingstoetsen 1 en 2 aanpassen 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Selecteer een functie die moet worden toegewezen. 8 Druk op [Sluit]. De functie wordt toegewezen aan de toepassingstoets. 4 Functie Webbrowser bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overzicht 4 4 Functie Webbrowser 4.1 Overzicht Met de functie Webbrowser kunt u inhoud van het internet of intranet afdrukken, weergeven en opslaan door deze te openen via het bedieningspaneel van de MFP die verbonden is met het netwerk. Referentie - Deze functie kan worden gebruikt op de MFP terwijl de i-Option LK-101 v2 is geregistreerd. 4.1.1 Beschikbare bewerkingen met de functie Webbrowser Met de functie Webbrowser kunt u de volgende bewerkingen uitvoeren. - Web-inhoud op het internet of intranet weergeven en afdrukken. - Een documentbestand op het internet of intranet weergeven, afdrukken en opslaan. - Een gescand document of een documentbestand dat werd opgeslagen in een gebruikersbox uploaden naar een server op het internet of intranet. - Documenten delen in de gebruikersbox van MFP's op het netwerk met behulp van PageScope Web Connection. - Wanneer de functie My Panel beschikbaar is, kunt u de gebruikersbedieningsomgeving van de webbrowser aanpassen door de webbrowser te koppelen met My Panel. dReferentie Voor meer informatie over het gebruik van PageScope Web Connection vanaf het bedieningspaneel, raadpleeg pagina 5-3. Meer details over My panel, vindt u op pagina 9-3. 4 Overzicht 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Specificaties Specificaties voor Webbrowser Hieronder vindt u de hoofdspecificaties van de webbrowser die op de MFP is geïnstalleerd. Beperkingen op Flash Player De volgende beperkingen zijn van toepassing op de Flash Player die in Webbrowser is geïnstalleerd. - De functie om een gebeurtenis te genereren door toetsbewerkingen wordt niet ondersteund. - De functies om te plakken of gegevens te verkrijgen, zoals tekenreeksen van het klembord, worden niet ondersteund. - Het contextmenu wordt niet ondersteund. - De afdrukfunctie van Flash wordt niet ondersteund. - De functies om JavaScript uit te voeren vanaf Flash of Flash te bedienen vanaf JavaScript worden niet ondersteund. - Het scherm zonder een venster (pop-up) wordt niet ondersteund. - De favoriete functie van Flash wordt niet ondersteund. - De functie om gegevens in real time uit te wisselen met de Flash-mediaserver wordt niet ondersteund. - De functie voor communicatie op basis van de XMLSocket wordt niet ondersteund. Item Specificaties Browsermotor NetFront Ondersteunde protocollen HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Ondersteunde ML (Markup language) HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basis Ondersteund opmaakmodel Deel van CSS1 en 2 Ondersteunde scripttaal Deel van JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (beperkt tot bereik ondersteund door JavaScript) Ondersteunde DOM Deel van niveau 1 en 2 Ondersteunde indeling JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animatie-GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 en vroeger Ondersteunde SSL/TLS-versies SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Ondersteunde tekencodes Japans (Shift_JIS), Japans (ISO-2022-JP), Japans (EUC-JP), Vereenvoudigd Chinees (GB2312), Traditioneel Chinees (Big5), West-Europees (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Weergavefunctie Normaal, Exacte aanpassing renderen, Intelligente aanpassing renderen PDF-viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Webbrowser weergeven 4 4.2 Webbrowser weergeven Druk in het [Menu Toepassing ] op [Webbrowser]. De pagina die is opgegeven als de startpagina, wordt weergegeven. Referentie - Als een aangemelde gebruiker de webbrowser die aan My Panel is gekoppeld gebruikt en op [Webbrowser] drukt, worden de instelling voor de webbrowser en informatie over de gebruiker naar de MFP gedownload vanaf de server. Als de gebruiker een persoonlijke startpagina heeft opgegeven, wordt die pagina weergegeven. - Wanneer de webbrowser start, kunt u opgeven of de startpagina of laatste pagina die werd bezocht, moet worden weergegeven. Raadpleeg pagina 4-18 voor meer informatie. dReferentie Voor details over het [Menu Toepassing] raadpleegpagina 3-4. Meer details over My panel, vindt u op pagina 9-3. 4 De instellingen configureren om het gebruik van de webbrowser mogelijk te maken 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 De instellingen configureren om het gebruik van de webbrowser mogelijk te maken Als u het gebruik van de webbrowser niet wilt toestaan in de MFP, kunt u het gebruik beperken zonder de licentiekit uit te schakelen. U kunt ook het gebruik van de webbrowser voor elke gebruiker beperken. 4.3.1 Het gebruik van de webbrowser in de MFP beperken Als u het gebruik van de webbrowser niet wilt toestaan, kunt u het gebruik beperken zonder de licentiekit uit te schakelen. [Webbrowser-instelling] 1 Druk op Hulpprogramma om het scherm [Toepassing ] weer te geven. 2 Druk op [Beheerderinstelling]. 3 Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op [Netwerkinstelling]. 5 Druk in [Netwerkinstelling] (2/2) op [Webbrowser-instelling]. 6 Selecteer [Ongeldig] en druk vervolgens op [OK]. Referentie - Als de [Webbrowser-instelling] is ingesteld op [Ongeldig], wordt [Webbrowser] verborgen in het [Menu Toepassing]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 De instellingen configureren om het gebruik van de webbrowser mogelijk te maken 4 4.3.2 Het gebruik van Webbrowser beperken voor elke gebruiker Als er gebruikersbeheer wordt uitgevoerd in de MFP, kunt u het gebruik van de webbrowser voor elke gebruiker beperken. [Functie permissie] 1 Druk op Hulpprogramma om het scherm [Toepassing ] weer te geven. 2 Druk op [Beheerderinstellingen]. 3 Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op [Gebruikersauthenticatie/Gebruikersregistratie]. 5 Druk in [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] op [Gebruikersregistratie]. 6 Selecteer de gebruiker waarvoor u het gebruik van de webbrowser wilt beperken en druk op [Bewerken]. % Als u het gebruik van de webbrowser wilt beperken voor openbare gebruikers, drukt u op [ ] en selecteert u [Openbaar]. 7 Druk op [Functie permissie]. 8 Stel in [Functiemachtiging] (3/3), het item [Webbrowser] in op [Beperk] en druk op [OK]. Referentie - De instelling is niet beschikbaar als [Ongeldig] is opgegeven in [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Netwerkinstelling] ö [Webbrowser-instelling]. - Het configureren van de functiepermissie van de openbare gebruiker is beschikbaar wanneer de openbare gebruikerstoegang is toegestaan in [Beheerderinstellingen] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/ Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Algemene instellingen] ö [Openbare gebruikerstoegang]. - Als gebruikers worden beheerd in de externe server, kunt u de standaardinstellingen voor functiepermissies configureren voor gebruikers die zich voor de eerste keer aanmelden bij de MFP met de externe serverauthenticatie. Om dit te configureren, selecteert u [Beheerderinstellingen] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/ Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] ö [Administratieve instelling] ö [Standaard functiepermissie] ö [Webbrowser]. Meer informatie over [Standaard functiepermissie] vindt u in de [Handleiding Netwerkbeheerder]. 4 De instellingen configureren om het gebruik van de webbrowser mogelijk te maken 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Het gebruik van lokale inhoud beperken Als de webbrowser wordt gebruikt via een toepassing die interactief werkt met de webbrowser, kunt u de bestanden (vooraf geïnstalleerde inhoud, afbeeldingsbestanden, Help-bestanden, enz.) die op de HDD van de MFP zijn opgeslagen, openen vanaf de webbrowser. De beheerder kan het gebruik van bestanden die in de HDD van de MFP zijn opgeslagen, beperken via de browser zoals vereist; Referentie - Neem contact op met uw leverancier voor details over de toepassing die interactief werkt met de webbrowser. [Toegang inhoud webbrowser] 1 Druk op Hulpprogramma om het scherm [Toepassing ] weer te geven. 2 Druk op [Beheerderinstelling]. 3 Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op [Beveiligingsinstelling]. 5 Druk op [Beveiligingsdetails]. 6 Stel in [Beveiligingsdetails ] (4/4) het item [Toegang inhoud webbrowser] in op [Beperk] en druk op [OK]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basisbewerking 4 4.4 Basisbewerking 4.4.1 Schermcomponenten Het scherm Webbrowser heeft de volgende componenten. Referentie - Wanneer de optionele lokale verbindingskit is geïnstalleerd in de MFP, kan het geluid van de webpagina's of flash-inhoud worden uitgevoerd via de luidspreker in de lokale verbindingskit. Het luidsprekervolume kan worden aangepast met het luidsprekerpictogram. Raadpleeg pagina 4-11 voor meer informatie. Nr. Naam Beschrijving 1 Werkbalk Bedient de webbrowser of configureer de instellingen voor Webbrowser. Deze balk wordt altijd weergegeven op het scherm Webbrowser. Raadpleeg pagina 4-12 voor meer informatie. 2 Schuifbalk Verschijnt aan de rechterzijde van het scherm wanneer de beeldscherminhoud niet verticaal op één scherm wordt weergegeven. Verschijnt onderaan van het scherm wanneer de beeldscherminhoud niet horizontaal op één scherm wordt weergegeven. 3 Venster Wanneer meerdere vensters zijn weergegeven, kunt u het venster schakelen via het tabblad dat zich onderaan op het scherm bevindt. Druk op [e] op het actieve tabblad om het venster te sluiten. 4 Icoon Het pictogram dat de verbindingsstatus aangeeft, verschijnt wanneer de inhoud wordt geladen. Als de optionele lokale verbindingskit is geïnstalleerd in de MFP, wordt het luidsprekerpictogram weergegeven. 1 4 3 2 4 Basisbewerking 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Bedieningsinstructies Webbrowser wordt hoofdzakelijk bediend via het tiptoetsscherm. U kunt enkele bewerkingen uitvoeren vanaf de cijfertoetsen op het bedieningspaneel. Referentie - Met de aanraakpen kunt u het tiptoetsscherm gemakkelijker bedienen. Bediening via het tiptoetsscherm Webbrowser wordt hoofdzakelijk bediend via het tiptoetsscherm. - Om een item te selecteren, drukt u op het gewenste item. - Als er een koppeling is voorzien in de inhoud, drukt u op de koppeling om naar die bestemming te gaan. - Druk op het invoerformulier in het dialoogvenster of de inhoud als u tekens moet invoeren. Het toetsenbordscherm verschijnt. Gebruik het toetsenbordscherm om tekens in te voeren. - Druk op [ ], [ ], [ ], of [ ] in de schuifbalk om door het scherm te schuiven. Bediening via de cijfertoetsen U kunt de cijfertoetsen op het bedieningspaneel gebruiken om numerieke waarden in te voeren of om items in de lijst te selecteren. 4.4.3 Tekst invoeren Druk op het invoerformulier in het dialoogvenster of de inhoud als u tekens moet invoeren. Het toetsenbordscherm verschijnt. Tekst invoeren Druk in het toetsenbordscherm op het teken dat u wilt invoeren. - Druk op [Versch.] om hoofdletters of symbolen in te voeren. - U kunt ook cijfers invoeren met de hulp van de cijfertoetsen. Referentie - Om een teken in de ingevoerde tekst te wijzigen, drukt u op [ ] of [ ] om de cursor te verplaatsen naar het teken dat moet worden gewijzigd. Druk vervolgens op [Verwdr.] en voer de gewenste letter of het gewenste cijfer in. - Om alle ingevoerde tekens te verwijderen, drukt u op C (wissen) op het bedieningspaneel. - Om de instellingen ongedaan te maken wanneer het toetsenbord wordt weergegeven, drukt u op [Herstel] - Sommige toetsen worden mogelijk niet weergegeven afhankelijk van de tekens die worden ingevoerd. - Wanneer het invoeren van tekencodes op meerdere lijnen is toegestaan, verschijnt de knop voor nieuwe regels. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basisbewerking 4 4.4.4 Schermweergavemodus Er zijn drie types weergavemodi voor het scherm Webbrowser. [Normaal] Dit is dezelfde weergavemodus als deze voor de normale webbrowser. De inhoud wordt niet aangepast aan de schermgrootte. Schuif het scherm horizontaal en verticaal wanneer u erdoor bladert. (De standaardinstelling is [Normaal]). [Exacte aanpassing renderen] De inhoudsopmaak blijft behouden en een pagina wordt weergegeven door de breedte te beperken zodat de pagina op het scherm past. Schuif het scherm horizontaal en verticaal wanneer u erdoor bladert. [Intelligente aanpassing renderen] De tabel wordt opgesplitst en verticaal opgemaakt om te passen op de breedte van het scherm. Schuif het scherm horizontaal en verticaal wanneer u erdoor bladert. De opmaak kan wijzigen afhankelijk van de pagina die moet worden weergegeven. dReferentie Meer details over het wijzigen van de weergavefunctie vindt u onder pagina 4-17. 4.4.5 Het luidsprekervolume opgeven Wanneer de optionele lokale verbindingskit is geïnstalleerd in de MFP, kan het geluid van de webpagina's of flash-inhoud worden uitgevoerd via de luidspreker in de lokale verbindingskit. Als een luidspreker op de MFP wordt aangesloten, wordt het luidsprekerpictogram onderaan links in de webbrowser weergegeven. Druk op het luidsprekerpictogram om het scherm Volume weer te geven waarin u het luidsprekervolume kunt instellen. - Om het volume één niveau te verhogen, drukt u op [Hoger] of op de toets # op het bedieningspaneel. - Om het volume één niveau te verlagen, drukt u op [Lager], of op de toets * op het bedieningspaneel. - Wanneer u op [Dempen] drukt, wordt er geen geluid uitgevoerd. Daarnaast wijzigt het luidsprekerpictogram naar het pictogram voor het dempen van de luidspreker. 4 Werkbalk 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Werkbalk Via de werkbalk bovenaan op het scherm Webbrowser kunt u verschillende bewerkingen uitvoeren en verschillende instellingen configureren. 4.5.1 Beschrijving van de werkbalk Hieronder vindt u de functies van de knoppen in de werkbalk. Icoon Naam Beschrijving Achter Brengt u terug naar de vorige pagina. Volgende Brengt u naar de volgende pagina. Opnieuw laden/ Afbreken Laadt de momenteel weergegeven pagina opnieuw om de inhoud bij te werken. Als u op deze knop drukt terwijl u een pagina laadt, wordt het laden gestopt. Home Toont de pagina die als de startpagina is geregistreerd. Standaard is "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" geregistreerd. Meer details over het wijzigen van de startpagina vindt u onder pagina 4-16. [Bladwijzer] - [Weergave] Toont de lijst van geregistreerde favorieten. Raadpleeg pagina 4-13 voor meer informatie. [Bladwijzer] - [Toev.] Voegt de URL van de momenteel weergegeven pagina toe aan de favorieten. Voor het toevoegen van een URL aan de favorieten zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. Raadpleeg pagina 4-13 voor meer informatie. [Adres] Brengt u naar het scherm om een URL in te voeren. Raadpleeg pagina 4-14 voor meer informatie. [Hist] Toont de lijst van pagina's die tot nog toe werden weergegeven. Raadpleeg pagina 4-14 voor meer informatie. [Print.] Drukt de momenteel weergegeven inhoud af. Raadpleeg pagina 4-15 voor meer informatie. [Menu] Configureer de Webbrowser-instellingen. Er zijn twee types menu's: één voor de gebruiker en één voor de beheerder. Raadpleeg pagina 4-15 voor meer informatie. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Werkbalk 4 4.5.2 [Bladwijzer] - [Weergave] Druk op [Lijst] om de lijst van de geregistreerde favorieten weer te geven door middel van miniatuurafbeeldingen. Wanneer u een favoriet selecteert, krijgt u toegang tot de overeenkomende URL. Referentie - Als de gebruiker de Webbrowser gekoppeld aan Mijn paneel gebruikt, wordt de lijst van favorieten weergegeven voor de gebruiker die in de server wordt beheerd. Lijst met favorieten Druk op om de lijst met bewerkingen die beschikbaar zijn voor het item, weer te geven. Selecteer de gewenste bewerking in deze lijst. Hieronder vindt u de beschikbare bewerkingen. 4.5.3 [Bladwijzer] - [Toev.] (Voor het toevoegen van een URL aan de favorieten zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig). Wanneer u op [Toev.] drukt, wordt u gevraagd het beheerderwachtwoord in te voeren. Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk op [OK]. Het registratiescherm wordt weergegeven. Controleer de inhoud en druk op [OK]. De URL van de weergegeven pagina wordt toegevoegd aan de favorieten. De MFP kan maximaal 100 favorieten bevatten. - Om de miniatuurafbeeldingen van de pagina die aan de favorieten moet worden toegevoegd te registreren, schakelt u het selectievakje [Miniatuur registreren] op het registratiescherm in. - Dit wordt geregistreerd met de titel die eerder aan de inhoud werd gegeven. Om de titel te wijzigen, drukt u op het invoerformulier voor de titel op het registratiescherm en wijzigt u vervolgens de titel. Referentie - Voor gebruikers die Webbrowser gebruiken door een koppeling te maken met Mijn paneel, zijn er geen beheerdersbevoegdheden vereist. Mijn paneel kan maximaal 20 favorieten bevatten voor elke gebruiker. Item Beschrijving [Lijstweergave]/ [Afbeeld. weergave] Schakelt de weergave van de favorieten tussen de lijstweergave en de afbeeld. weergave. [Adresweergave]/ [Titelweergave] Schakelt de weergave van de favorieten tussen de adresweergave en de titelweergave. [Alles verwijderen] Verwijdert alle geregistreerde favorieten. Voor het verwijderen van favorieten zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. [Sluiten] Sluit de lijst met favorieten. Item Beschrijving [Nieuw venster openen] Opent de geselecteerde favoriet met een nieuw venster. [Bewerken] Bewerkt de titel en het adres van de geselecteerde favoriet. Voor het bewerken van favorieten zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. [Omhoog] Brengt u boven de geselecteerde favoriet. Gebruik deze knop wanneer de lijst met favorieten wordt weergegeven in de lijstweergave. [Omlaag] Brengt u onder de geselecteerde favoriet. Gebruik deze knop wanneer de lijst met favorieten wordt weergegeven in de lijstweergave. [Verwijderen] Verwijdert de geselecteerde favoriet. Voor het verwijderen van favorieten zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. [Sluiten] Sluit dit scherm. 4 Werkbalk 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Adres] Druk op [Adres] om het scherm weer te geven voor het opgeven van het adres. Druk op het invoerformulier om het toetsenbordscherm weer te geven. Voer de URL in van de pagina die moet worden weergegeven en druk op [OK] of [Nieuw venster openen]. Druk op [Invoerhistorie] om de lijst van de invoergeschiedenis weer te geven. U kunt verwijzen naar voorbij ingevoerde gegevens. De MFP kan maximaal 100 records van de invoergeschiedenis bevatten. Referentie - Als u het scherm weergeeft voor het invoeren van het adres, ziet u de URL van de pagina die wordt weergegeven. Om de momenteel weergegeven URL te verwijderen, geeft u het toetsenbordscherm weer en druk op [Verwdr.]. Druk op C (wissen) op het bedieningspaneel om alle gegevens te verwijderen. - Als de gebruiker de Webbrowser gekoppeld aan Mijn paneel gebruikt, wordt de lijst van de records van de invoergeschiedenis weergegeven voor de gebruiker die in de server wordt beheerd. Mijn paneel kan maximaal 20 records van de invoergeschiedenis bevatten voor elke gebruiker. 4.5.5 [Hist] Druk op [Hist] om het scherm met de weergavehistorie weer te geven. Selecteer een pagina die u opnieuw wilt weergeven in de lijst van de weergavehistorie. De MFP kan maximaal 100 records van de weergavegeschiedenis bevatten. Referentie - Als de gebruiker de Webbrowser gekoppeld aan Mijn paneel gebruikt, wordt de lijst van de records van de weergavegeschiedenis weergegeven voor de gebruiker die in de server wordt beheerd. Mijn paneel kan maximaal 20 records van de weergavegeschiedenis bevatten voor elke gebruiker. [Historie weergeven] Druk op om de lijst met bewerkingen die beschikbaar zijn voor het item, weer te geven. Selecteer de gewenste bewerking in deze lijst. Hieronder vindt u de beschikbare bewerkingen. Item Beschrijving [Adresweergave]/ [Titelweergave] Schakelt de weergavehistorie tussen de adresweergave en de titelweergave. [Alles verwijderen] Verwijdert alle geregistreerde gegevens in de weergavehistorie. Voor het verwijderen van de weergavegeschiedenis zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. [Sluiten] Sluit de lijst met de weergavehistorie. Item Beschrijving [Nieuw venster openen] Laadt de geselecteerde weergavehistorie met een nieuw venster. [Verwijderen] Verwijdert de geselecteerde weergavehistorie. Voor het verwijderen van de weergavegeschiedenis zijn beheerdersbevoegdheden nodig. [Sluiten] Sluit dit scherm. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Werkbalk 4 4.5.6 [Print.] Druk op [Print.] om het scherm Afdrukken weer te geven. Configureer de afdrukinstellingen en druk vervolgens op [Start] of op de toets Start op het bedieningspaneel. De weergegeven inhoud wordt afgedrukt. Referentie - Als u probeert een webpagina, een JPEG of een andere afbeelding die een grote hoeveelheid geheugen gebruikt, af te drukken, kan zich een scanfout voordoen en kan het afdrukken worden uitgeschakeld. - De instelwaarde voor [Afwerking] verschilt afhankelijk van de opties die zijn geïnstalleerd. – De nietinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de optionele afwerkingseenheid is geïnstalleerd. – De perforeerinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de perforeereenheid is geïnstalleerd op de optionele afwerkingseenheid. – De functies Vouwen en Midden nieten & vouwen kunnen worden gebruikt wanneer een rugnieteenheid is geïnstalleerd op de optionele afwerkingseenheid. 4.5.7 [Menu] Druk op [Menu] om de instellingen voor de webbrowser te configureren. Er zijn twee types menu's: één voor de gebruiker en één voor de beheerder. Raadpleeg pagina 4-16 voor meer informatie. Item Beschrijving [Papier] Selecteer het formaat van het papier voor het afdrukken. [Enkelz./Dubbelz.] Selecteer of in dubbelzijdige modus moet worden afgedrukt. [Stempelinstellingen] Geef op of de [titel], [URL], [Datum/tijd] en het [Paginanummer] moeten worden afgedrukt. [Afwerking] Configureer de instellingen voor het sorteren, groeperen, verschuiven, nieten, perforeren, vouwen of inbinden. 4 De Webbrowser-instellingen configureren 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 De Webbrowser-instellingen configureren Wanneer u in de werkbalk op [Menu] drukt, wordt het menu voor de gebruiker weergegeven. Gebruikers kunnen alleen de bedieningsinstellingen en informatie van de webbrowser weergeven. De beheerder van de MFP kan, naast de bedieningsinstellingen van de webbrowser, ook de gebruiksomgeving en beveiligingsinstellingen configureren. Om het beheerdersmenu weer te geven, drukt u in het menuscherm op [Beheerder] en voert u het beheerderwachtwoord in. 4.6.1 [Paginabewerking] Configureer de instellingen voor het bewerken van de pagina's op het tabblad [Paginabewerking]. Referentie - Items met een * worden alleen weergegeven voor het beheerdermenu. - [Gebruiken voor startpagina] wordt weergegeven voor gebruikers die de webbrowser gebruiken door een koppeling te maken met Mijn paneel. Item Beschrijving [Gebruiken voor startpagina*] Registreert de weergegeven pagina als de startpagina. [Paginamemo] Toont de pagina die is opgeslagen als een paginamemo. Als u de paginamemo selecteert in de lijst, wordt de overeenkomende pagina weergegeven. Druk op om de lijst met bewerkingen die beschikbaar zijn voor het item, weer te geven. Selecteer de gewenste bewerking in deze lijst. [Opslaan als Paginamemo] Slaat de weergegeven pagina op zoals deze is. [Zoom weergave] Druk op [Zoom weergave] om de toets weer te geven voor het vergrote of verkleinen van de grootte van de paginaweergave. Druk op de toets om de grootte van de paginaweergave aan te passen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 De Webbrowser-instellingen configureren 4 4.6.2 [Weergave] Configureer de instellingen voor het weergeven van inhoud op het tabblad [Weergave]. De beheerder van de MFP kan de instellingen configureren om afbeeldingen en animatie te verbergen/weer te geven, JavaScript in of uit te schakelen, en gedetailleerde instellingen opgeven met betrekking tot de inhoudsweergave. 4.6.3 [Vensters beheren] Bedien het venster via het tabblad [Vensters beheren]. U kunt maximaal vijf vensters openen. Item Beschrijving [Weergavefunctie] Stel de weergavefunctie voor Webbrowser in op [Normaal], [Exacte aanpassing renderen] of [Intelligente aanpassing renderen]. Raadpleeg pagina 4-11 voor meer informatie. [Codering] Geef het coderingstype op dat moet worden gebruikt wanneer de inhoud wordt weergegeven. [Detailinstellingen] Configureer de instellingen voor het weergeven van inhoud. • [Afbeelding]: schakel dit selectievakje in om afbeeldingen weer te geven. • [Animatie]: schakel dit selectievakje in om animatie-GIF weer te geven. • [Tabel]: schakel dit selectievakje in om de tabel te herkennen in HTML en om de opmaak aan te passen. • [JavaScript]: schakel dit selectievakje in om JavaScript in de inhoud in te schakelen. • [CSS]: schakel dit selectievakje in om CSS in de inhoud in te schakelen. • [Tekstterugloop]: schakel dit selectievakje in om tekstterugloop in de inhoud in te schakelen. • [Lijnrand tekencontrole]: schakel dit selectievakje in om de tekencontrole van de lijnrand in de inhoud in te schakelen. • [Snel renderen]: schakel dit selectievakje in om de functie Snel renderen in te schakelen. • [Pop-upvenster]: schakel dit selectievakje in zodat het weergaven van het pop-upvenster wordt toegestaan. • [Offline-machtiging]: Schakel dit selectievakje in om het gebruik van de inhoud offline toe te staan. • [Auto flashweergave]: schakel dit selectievakje in om flash-inhoud automatisch af te spelen. • [Offline-weergave inschakelen]: schakel dit selectievakje in om de weergave van de inhoud offline in te schakelen. Wordt weergegeven wanneer de [Offline-permissie] is toegestaan door de beheerder. [Kleurselectieinstelling] Selecteer een kleur voor het geselecteerde item ([Groen], [Blauw], [Geel] of [Oranje]). Item Beschrijving [Nieuw venster maken] Toont de inhoud van de URL die als startpagina is geregistreerd met een nieuw venster. [Openen in nieuw venster] Toont de pagina met de bestemming van de koppeling met een nieuw venster. [Actief venster sluiten] Sluit het actieve venster. [Andere vensters sluiten] Sluit alle vensters. Dit kan niet worden geselecteerd wanneer er slechts één venster is geopend. 4 De Webbrowser-instellingen configureren 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6.4 [Instellingen] Op het tabblad [Instellingen] kunt u de informatie over de webbrowser controleren en opnieuw instellen. De beheerder van de MFP kan de gebruiksomgeving en beveiligingsinstellingen configureren van de webbrowser. Referentie - Items met een * worden alleen weergegeven voor het beheerdermenu. - De volgende instellingen zijn beschikbaar voor gebruikers die de webbrowser gebruiken door een koppeling te maken met Mijn paneel. – [Opstartinstellingen] – Instelling voor het verwijderen van [Cookies] – Instelling voor het verwijderen van [Authenticatiegegevens] - Mijn paneel kan maximaal 20 items van cookies en authenticatiegegevens bevatten voor elke gebruiker. Item Beschrijving [Opstartinstellingen]* Geef op of u bij het opstarten van Webbrowser de pagina wilt weergegeven die als de startpagina of als laatste pagina werd weergegeven bij het afsluiten van Webbrowser. [Beveiliging]* Configureer de SSL- of TLS-instelling of geef een basiscertificaat of CA-certificaat weer. [Cookies]* Instellingen configureren voor het ontvangen en verwijderen van cookies. Dit menu wordt ook gebruikt om alle cookies die in de MFP zijn opgeslagen, te verwijderen. [Cache]* Configureer de instellingen om caches te gebruiken en te verwijderen. Dit menu wordt ook gebruikt om alle caches die in de MFP zijn opgeslagen, te verwijderen. [Proxy]* Instellingen configureren voor het gebruik van proxy. Om de proxy te gebruiken, moet u het adres en de poort voor de proxyserver registreren. Als de proxy-authenticatie is vereist, registreert u de ID en het wachtwoord die moeten worden gebruikt bij de proxy-authenticatie. [Authenticatiegegevens]* Geef de timing op voor het verwijderen van de authenticatiegegevens die u in de inhoud hebt ingevoerd. Dit menu wordt ook gebruikt om alle authenticatiegegevens die in de MFP zijn opgeslagen, te verwijderen. [Toegangslogboek]* Controleren op toegangsgeschiedenis van alle gebruikers. U kunt [ID], [Gebruikersnaam], [URL] en [Toegang] controleren. [Webbrowserinformatie] Toont informatie webbrowser. [Reset] Start de webbrowser opnieuw op. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan 4 4.7 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan Als er in de weergegeven inhoud een koppeling is voorzien naar een documentbestand, kunt u dit bestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan. - De indelingen PDF en XPS worden ondersteund voor de documentbestanden. - U kunt geen XPS-bestand weergeven. Druk op de koppeling naar het documentbestand in de inhoud om het bovenste scherm van het documentbestand weer te geven. 4.7.1 Een documentbestand afdrukken Druk op [Printen] om het scherm Afdrukken weer te geven. Configureer de afdrukinstellingen en druk vervolgens op [Start] of op de toets Start op het bedieningspaneel. Het documentbestand wordt gedownload en afgedrukt. Item Beschrijving [Papier] Selecteer het formaat van het papier voor het afdrukken. [Enkelz./Dubbelz.] Selecteer of in dubbelzijdige modus moet worden afgedrukt. [Stempelinstellingen] Druk op deze knop om op te geven of een [datum/tijd] en [paginanummer] moeten worden afgedrukt. [Afwerking] Configureer de instellingen voor het sorteren, groeperen, verschuiven, nieten, perforeren, vouwen of inbinden. 4 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 Referentie - Als u probeert een documentbestand dat een grote hoeveelheid geheugen gebruikt, af te drukken, kan zich een scanfout voordoen en kan het afdrukken worden uitgeschakeld. - Als het gedownloade PDF-bestand is gecodeerd, wordt het opgeslagen in de PDF-gebruikersbox zonder te worden afgedrukt. - De instelwaarde voor [Afwerking] verschilt afhankelijk van de opties die zijn geïnstalleerd. – De nietinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de optionele afwerkingseenheid is geïnstalleerd. – De perforeerinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de perforeereenheid is geïnstalleerd op de optionele afwerkingseenheid. – De functies Vouwen en Midden nieten & vouwen kunnen worden gebruikt wanneer een rugnieteenheid is geïnstalleerd op de optionele afwerkingseenheid. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan 4 4.7.2 Een documentbestand weergeven Druk op [Weergeven] om het PDF-bestand op de bestemming van de koppeling weer te geven. Via de werkbalk bovenaan op het scherm kunt u het PDF-bestand vergroten, verkleinen, afdrukken of opslaan. Toets Beschrijving Brengt u terug naar de bovenste pagina. Brengt u terug naar de vorige pagina. Brengt u naar de volgende pagina. Brengt u naar de laatste pagina. Draait het beeld 90 graden rechtsom. Vergroot de zoomfactor. Verkleint de zoomfactor. Wordt weergegeven volgens de breedte van het weergavegebied. Toont de volledige pagina. Selecteer de gebruikersbox om het documentbestand op te slaan. Configureer de afdrukinstellingen en druk het documentbestand af. Toont het splashvenster (wordt tijdelijk weergegeven wanneer de software wordt geactiveerd). Sluit het scherm. 4 Een documentbestand afdrukken, weergeven of opslaan 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.3 Een documentbestand opslaan Druk op [Opslaan]. Het selectiescherm Gebruikersbox wordt weergegeven. Selecteer de gebruikersbox voor het opslaan van het bestand, druk op [OK] en druk vervolgens op [Start] of Start. Het documentbestand wordt vervolgens opgeslagen in de gebruikersbox. Referentie - Om een documentbestand op te slaan in een gebruikersbox, moet u de gebruikersbox vooraf registreren in de MFP. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie. - Wanneer u een documentbestand (full color) wilt afdrukken dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen vanaf de webbrowser, kunt u [Zoom] of [Combineren] niet opgeven. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Een documentbestand uploaden 4 4.8 Een documentbestand uploaden Als er documentbestanden op de server worden gedeeld, kunt u een gescand documentbestand of een documentbestand in een gebruikersbox uploaden naar de server via een webbrowser. In dit gedeelte wordt uitgelegd hoe u een documentbestand moet uploaden met de volgende uploadsite als voorbeeld. Voorbeeld 4.8.1 Beperkingen Om deze functie te gebruiken gelden de volgende beperkingen. - PDF, TIFF of XPS is het type documentbestand dat kan worden geüpload. Een document kan niet worden gesplitst voor het uploaden. - Het is niet mogelijk meerdere documentbestanden tegelijk te uploaden. - De gebruiker kan de tekstbox voor de bestandsnaam niet handmatig bewerken. - Als u een van de volgende bewerkingen uitvoert na het selecteren van een te uploaden documentbestand, wordt de opdracht samen met het geselecteerde documentbestand verwijderd. – De functie Automatische reset systeem is gestart. – De webbrowser is gesloten. – De uploadsite is bijgewerkt via de werkbalk van de webbrowser. – De webbrowser is opnieuw opgestart. – De gebruikers heeft zich afgemeld tijdens de aanmeldingsverwerking. – De subvoedingsschakelaar is uitgeschakeld. – Er werd op Reset gedrukt op het paneel opnieuw in te stellen. 4.8.2 Een gescand documentbestand uploaden Hieronder wordt de procedure voor het uploaden van een gescand documentbestand uitgelegd. Referentie - Deze procedure is niet beschikbaar voor gebruikers die geen toestemming hebben voor het scannen van gegevens. - De bestandsindeling kan niet worden ingesteld op JPEG wanneer een te uploaden origineel wordt gescand. 1 Geef de uploadsite weer via de webbrowser op de MFP. 2 Druk op de knop om een te uploaden documentbestand te selecteren. % Druk in dit voorbeeld op [Browse]. Item Beschrijving [Browse] Druk op deze knop om een te uploaden documentbestand te selecteren. "type" is ingesteld op "file" in de HTML-invoercode. [OK] Druk op deze knop om een documentbestand te uploaden. "type" is ingesteld op "submit" in de HTML-invoercode. 4 Een documentbestand uploaden 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Druk op [Scan]. 4 Leg het origineel dat moet worden geüpload op de MFP. 5 Configureer de scaninstellingen en druk op [Start] of druk op de toets Start. % Als Testkopie is geselecteerd, kunt u de afwerking controleren. Nadat het scannen is voltooid, wordt de bestandsnaam weergegeven in het tekstvak. 6 Druk op de knop om het uploaden te starten. % Druk in dit voorbeeld op [OK]. Daarna wordt het uploaden van een documentbestand gestart. 4.8.3 Een documentbestand in een gebruikersbox uploaden Hieronder wordt de procedure uitgelegd om een documentbestand dat van een gebruikersbox is opgehaald, te uploaden. Referentie - Deze procedure is niet beschikbaar voor gebruikers die geen toegang hebben tot de opgeslagen documenten. - Voordat u een documentbestand uploadt in een gebruikersbox, moet u een gebruikersbox maken waarin het documentbestand moet worden opgeslagen. - Allen de openbare gebruikersbox en persoonlijke gebruikersbox kunnen worden geselecteerd. - De bestandsindeling kan niet worden ingesteld op JPEG wanneer u een documentbestand selecteert dat moet worden geüpload van een gebruikersbox. Wanneer u een JPEG-documentbestand selecteert dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen, wordt de bestandsindeling gewijzigd naar PDF. Geef, indien nodig, de geschikte bestandsindeling op voordat u een documentbestand uploadt. - Wanneer een documentbestand dat in een gebruiksbox is opgeslagen, wordt geüpload terwijl Paginascheiding is ingeschakeld, wordt Paginascheiding geannuleerd en gewijzigd naar Meerdere pagina's. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-25 4.8 Een documentbestand uploaden 4 1 Geef de uploadsite weer via de webbrowser op de MFP. 2 Druk op de knop om een te uploaden documentbestand te selecteren. % Druk in dit voorbeeld op [Browse]. 3 Druk op de toets [Gebruikersbox]. 4 Selecteer een gewenste gebruikersbox en druk vervolgens op [Document gebruiken] 5 Selecteer een te uploaden documentbestand en druk op [Bestandsinstellingen]. % Selecteer meerdere documentbestanden en druk op [Combineren]; ze kunnen worden gecombineerd als één bestand. De combinatievolgorde kan worden gewijzigd zoals vereist. % Selecteer een documentbestand en druk op [Documentdetails] om de datum en tijd waarop het documentbestand werd opgeslagen, te controleren en om een voorbeeld van het beeld te bekijken. 6 Configureer de bestandsinstelling en druk op [Start] of druk op de toets Start. % Druk op [Toepassing] om de afdrukinstelling voor de stempel of het paginanummer te configureren. De bestandsnaam wordt weergegeven in het tekstvak. 7 Druk op de knop om het uploaden te starten. % Druk in dit voorbeeld op [OK]. Daarna wordt het uploaden van een documentbestand gestart. 4 Een documentbestand uploaden 4-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 5 PageScope Web Connection (functie Webbrowser) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 PageScope Web Connection gebruiken 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (functie Webbrowser) 5.1 PageScope Web Connection gebruiken PageScope Web Connection is een gebruikersprogramma voor apparaatbeheer dat wordt ondersteund door de HTTP-server die in deze machine is geïntegreerd. Om dit hulpprogramma te gebruiken, moet u rechtstreeks de MFP starten die met het netwerk is verbonden via Webbrowser. Om dit hulpprogramma te gebruiken met Webbrowser die in de MFP is geïnstalleerd, is alleen de gebruikersboxfunctie beschikbaar. Dit hoofdstuk beschrijft hoe u documenten in de gebruikersbox van de MFP op het netwerk kunt gebruiken door PageScope Web Connection te bedienen door middel van de Webbrowser die in de MFP is geïnstalleerd. Referentie - Deze functie kan worden gebruikt op de MFP terwijl de i-Option LK-101 v2 is geregistreerd. - De i-Option LK-101 v2 moet ook worden geregistreerd in de MFP-toegangsbestemming. - Raadpleeg pagina 4-3 voor details over het gebruik van de Webbrowser die in de MFP is geïnstalleerd - Om PageScope Web Connection te bedienen vanaf een webbrowser van uw computer, kunt u verschillende functies van de MFP gebruiken, zoals de statuscontrole, het wijzigen van de instellingen en de functies voor het instellen van het netwerk. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] voor meer informatie. 5.1.1 Voorafgaande controle De schermen van PageScope Web Connection zullen mogelijk niet de recentste informatie weergeven omdat oudere versies van de pagina's in het cachegeheugen van de webbrowser zijn opgeslagen. Daarnaast kunnen er ook problemen optreden wanneer de cachefunctie wordt gebruikt. Schakel het cachegeheugen voor de webbrowser uit wanneer u PageScope Web Connection gebruikt. Referentie - Het wijzigen van de cacheinstellingen vereist beheerdersbevoegdheden. 1 Druk in de werkbalk van de webbrowser op [Menu]. 2 Druk op [Beheerder]. 3 Voer het beheerderwachtwoord in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op het tabblad [Instellingen] en selecteer [Cache]. 5 Schakel het selectievakje [Cache gebruiken] uit en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 5.1.2 Toegang Start de webbrowser en geeft vervolgens het IP-adres op van de MFP die moet worden gebruikt. 1 Druk in de werkbalk van de webbrowser op [Adres]. 2 Druk op het invoerformulier om het toetsenbordscherm weer te geven. 3 Voer het IP-adres van de te gebruiken MFP in en druk vervolgens op [OK]. 4 Druk op [OK] of [Openen in Nieuw venster]. Het venster PageScope Web Connection wordt geopend. 5 PageScope Web Connection gebruiken 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.1 Referentie - Als u in de instellingen van de webbrowser hebt ingesteld dat u geen cookies wilt ontvangen, verschijnt het scherm van PageScope Web Connection niet. Raadpleeg pagina 4-18 voor meer informatie over het configureren van de cookie-instellingen. - Als u het scherm weergeeft voor het invoeren van het adres, ziet u de URL van de pagina die wordt weergegeven. Om de momenteel weergegeven URL te verwijderen, geeft u het toetsenbordscherm weer en druk op [Verwdr.]. Druk op C (wissen) op het bedieningspaneel om alle URL-gegevens te verwijderen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.2 Schermcomponenten 5 5.2 Schermcomponenten Het scherm van PageScope Web Connection is opgebouwd zoals hieronder weergegeven. Nr. Naam Beschrijving 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Druk op het logo om naar de website van KONICA MINOLTA (http:// www.konicaminolta.com/) te gaan. 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Druk op het logo om de versiegegevens van PageScope Web Connection weer te geven. 3 Aanmeldingsnaam van de gebruiker Toont het pictogram van de huidige modus en de naam van de gebruiker die is aangemeld (Openbare, geregistreerde gebruiker of account). 4 [Logout] Druk op deze knop om u af te melden van de huidige modus. 5 Weergave inhoud Toont de inhoud van PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 5 Aanmelden en afmelden 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.3 5.3 Aanmelden en afmelden Als u hebt ingesteld om de gebruikersauthenticatie of gebruikersregistratie uit te voeren op de MFP, verschijnt het aanmeldingsscherm nadat PageScope Web Connection wordt weergegeven. Referentie - Als de gebruikersauthenticatie of gebruikersregistratie niet wordt uitgevoerd op de MFP, verschijnt het scherm met de melding dat u bent aangemeld als een openbare gebruiker. - Om PageScope Web Connection te gebruiken met de Webbrowser die in de MFP is geïnstalleerd, is de beheerderfunctie niet beschikbaar. 5.3.1 Aanmelden Selecteer of u wilt aanmelden als openbare gebruiker of als geregistreerde gebruiker. Als Externe serverauthenticatie is geselecteerd, kies dan voor een External Authentication Server. Voer de gewenste informatie in en druk op [Login]. Selecteer, indien nodig, een weergavetaal. Referentie - De gebruikersboxen die toegankelijk zijn, verschillen afhankelijk van de aangemelde gebruiker of gebruikersregistratie. 5.3.2 Afmelden Druk bovenaan rechts op het scherm op [Logout] om een scherm weer te geven waarin het afmelden moet worden bevestigd. Druk op [OK]. Het aanmeldingsscherm wordt opnieuw weergegeven. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5 5.4 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken Om PageScope Web Connection te gebruiken via de webbrowser die in de MFP is geïnstalleerd, worden de volgende bewerkingen beschikbaar als Gebruikersboxfuncties. - Documenten bewerken in de gebruikersbox op de MFP die wordt gebruikt of op een andere MFP die met het netwerk is verbonden. - Openbare, Persoonlijke en Groepsgebruikersboxen gebruiken als gebruikersboxtypes. - Een document in de gebruikersbox weergeven, afdrukken en verwijderen. 5.4.1 Gebruikersbox openen Wanneer u aanmeldt met PageScope Web Connection wordt de lijst weergegeven van gebruikersboxen (openbare, persoonlijke en groepsgebruikersboxen) die in de geopende MFP zijn geregistreerd. [Open User Box] Selecteer een gewenste gebruikersboxnaam ([User Box Name]) in de gebruikersboxlijst. U kunt ook rechtstreeks een gebruikersboxnummer ([User Box Number]) en gebruikersboxwachtwoord ([User Box Password]) invoeren en vervolgens op [OK] drukken. Referentie - Wanneer u een gebruikersboxnaam ([User Box Name]) selecteert terwijl een wachtwoord is opgegeven in de [User Box List], verschijnt een scherm voor het invoeren van het wachtwoord. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Beschrijving [User Box Number] Voer het gebruikersboxnummer in dat moet worden geopend. [User Box Password] Als een wachtwoord is ingesteld voor de doelgebruikersbox, moet u het wachtwoord invoeren. Item Beschrijving [Search from Index] Schakel de indexweergave in overeenstemming met de indexen die werden geselecteerd bij het maken van een gebruikersbox. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] Wanneer deze machine 50 of meer gebruikersboxen bevat, moet u de gewenste pagina opgeven om de weergave te wijzigen. User Box List Toont [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] en [Time Stored]. Een sleutelpictogram verschijnt naast de gebruikersboxen waarvoor een wachtwoord is opgegeven. 5 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 [File List] Selecteer een gebruikersbox in [Open User Box]. De basisinformatie van de gebruikersbox wordt weergegeven met een lijst van de documenten die zijn opgeslagen in de gebruikersbox. Item Beschrijving [Thumbnail View] Geef aan of de miniatuurafbeeldingen van het document moeten worden weergegeven. Instellen op [OFF] voor lijstweergave. [Specify operation] Selecteer een bewerking. Raadpleeg pagina 5-9 voor meer informatie. [Changes the display] Druk op deze knop om het selectievakje [Select] weer te geven naast alle documenten waarmee de geselecteerde bewerking kan worden uitgevoerd. [Select] Toont een selectievakje naast alle documenten waarmee de geselecteerde bewerking kan worden uitgevoerd. [Thumbnail] Toont miniatuurafbeeldingen van het document. [Document Name] Toont de naam van het document. [Number of Originals] Toont het aantal originelen in een document. [Edit Name] Druk op deze knop om de documentnaam te wijzigen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5 5.4.2 Documentbewerkingen Een geselecteerd document kan worden afgedrukt of verwijderd. Een document afdrukken 1 Selecteer [Print] onder [Specify operation] en druk vervolgens op [Changes the display]. Naast alle afdrukbare documenten verschijnt een selectievakje. 2 Schakel het selectievakje in voor het document dat moet worden afgedrukt en druk daarna op [Print Setting]. 5 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 3 Configureer de nodige instellingen en druk vervolgens op [OK]. % Selecteer in [Page Range] of alle pagina's van het geselecteerde document moeten worden afgedrukt of als een paginabereik moet worden afgedrukt. % In [Change order] kunt u de afdrukvolgorde wijzigen wanneer u meerdere documenten afdrukt. 4 Druk op [Open File]. 5 Druk op [Printen]. % Als u op [Weergeven] drukt, verschijnt een PDF-bestand. Druk op om het weergegeven PDFbestand af te drukken. 6 Configureer de afdrukinstellingen en druk vervolgens op [Start] of op de toets Start op het bedieningspaneel. Referentie - Als de [Functieversie] van de MFP op de bestemming niet [Versie 3] is, drukt u in Stap 4 op [Bestand openen] om het PDF-bestand op het paneel weer te geven. Druk op om het weergegeven PDFbestand af te drukken. Om de functieversie van de MFP te controleren, selecteert u [Apparaatinformatie] in [Toepassing]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5 Een document verwijderen 1 Selecteer [Delete] onder [Specify operation] en druk vervolgens op [Changes the display]. Een selectievakje verschijnt naast de documenten die kunnen worden verwijderd. 2 Schakel het selectievakje in voor het document dat moet worden verwijderd, en klik daarna op de knop [Delete]. % Schakel het selectievakje [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents)] in om alle documenten te selecteren. 5 De gebruikersboxfunctie gebruiken 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 3 Controleer de naam van het document dat u wilt verwijderen en druk vervolgens op [OK]. Het document is verwijderd. 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Overzicht 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overzicht Image Panel is een nieuwe intuïtieve en gemakkelijk te begrijpen paneelinterface. Referentie - Deze functie kan worden gebruikt op de MFP terwijl de i-Option LK-101 v2 is geregistreerd. - Als [Gebruikersauth./Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Instellingen Scannen naar geautoriseerde map] is ingesteld op [Beperken] in [Beheerderinstelling], kan Image Panel niet worden gebruikt. Functies Image Panel verdeelt de verwerkingsstroom in drie processen: "een document lezen", "een document bewerken" en "een bestemming opgeven". Deze processen kunnen op één scherm worden uitgevoerd. Hiermee kunt u de volledige verwerkingsstroom en de lopende bewerkingen betere begrijpen. Image Panel richt zich op de bediening. Daarom worden de functies die beschikbaar zijn in het Image Panel beperkt in vergelijking met het gebruikelijke paneel. Wanneer de functies My Panel en My Address beschikbaar zijn, kunt u het scherm Image Panel aanpassen als een gebruikersspecifiek scherm. dReferentie Raadpleeg pagina 9-3 voor details over de functie van My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 10-3 voor details over de functie My Address. 6 Het Image Panel weergeven 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Het Image Panel weergeven Druk in het [Menu Toepassing] op [Image Panel] om het eerste scherm van Image Panel weer te geven. dReferentie Voor details over het [Menu Toepassing] raadpleegpagina 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6.3.1 Schermcomponenten Het scherm Image Panel bestaat uit het volgende. Nr. Naam Beschrijving 1 Gebied aanmeldingsinformatie Toont de gebruikersnaam en het pictogram van de gebruiker die momenteel is aangemeld. 2 Gebied voor lezen gegevens Scan een document, haal een document op vanaf een gebruikersbox of extern geheugen, en verzend gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA. 3 Gebied Bureaublad Documenten die in het gebied Gegevens lezen worden gelezen, worden weergegeven in miniatuurweergave of lijstweergave. 4 Schakelen tussen de lijstweergave/ afbeeld. weergave Schakelt de weergave van het bureaubladgebied tussen de lijstweergave en de afbeeld. weergave. 5 Zone voor meldingen Toont een extra bericht zoals gebruiksinstructies. 6 Gebied Status Geeft de datum en huidige tijd weer. Als er een alarm optreedt, verschijnt een alarmpictogram. 7 Gebied bewerkingsgereedschap Bewerk de pagina en combineer en wijzig de instellingen van het document nadat het is gescand. 8 Schakelen tussen de weergave Verzendlade/ Bewerkingsgereedschap Schakelt het display tussen de verzendlade en de weergave van het bewerkingsgereedschap. Zie pagina 6-19 voor details over de verzendlade. 9 Documentbestemmingsgebied Geef een bestemming op van het leesdocument via [Printen] of [Adressenlijst]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 Algemene bediening Het volgende beschrijft de verwerkingsstroom vanaf de verwerking van het lezen van documenten tot het verzenden door bewerkingen van het Image Panel weer te geven in deze volgorde: "een document lezen", "een document bewerken" en "een bestemming opgeven". Referentie - U kunt eerst een bestemming opgeven en vervolgens een document lezen. Lees of haal een document op In het gebied Gegevens lezen. • Om een document te scannen, plaatst u het document en drukt u vervolgens op [Scan]. Configureer de scaninstellingen zoals vereist en start vervolgens met het lezen van het document. Raadpleeg pagina 6-8 voor meer informatie. • Om een document dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen te gebruiken, selecteert u een gebruikersbox in [Lijst documentbronnen] en selecteert u vervolgens het document dat u wilt ophalen. Raadpleeg pagina 6-9 voor meer informatie. • Om een document dat in een extern geheugen is opgeslagen te gebruiken, selecteert u [Extern geheugen] in [Lijst documentbronnen] en selecteert u vervolgens het document dat u wilt ophalen. Raadpleeg pagina 6-10 voor meer informatie. • Om gegevens te gebruiken die op een mobiele telefoon of PDA zijn opgeslagen, selecteert u [Mobiel] in [Lijst documentbronnen]. Raadpleeg pagina 6-11 voor meer informatie. Selecteer [Scan] Selecteer [Lijst documentbronnen]. Bewerk het gelezen document in het gebied Bewerkingsgereedschap. Raadpleeg pagina 6-12 voor meer informatie. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 Geef een bestemming op van het gelezen document in het gebied Documentbestemming. • Druk op [Printen] om af te drukken. Raadpleeg pagina 6-16 voor meer informatie. • Selecteer de bestemming waarnaar het document moet worden verzonden in de [Adressenlijst]. Raadpleeg pagina 6-17 voor meer informatie. • Om gegevens op te slaan in het externe geheugen drukt u op [Extern geheugen] in het scherm Adressenlijst. Raadpleeg pagina 6-18 voor meer informatie. Selecteer [Printen]. Selecteer [Adressenlijst] Als u een adres opgeeft, verschijnt de verzendlade. Raadpleeg pagina 6-19 voor meer informatie. Druk op Start om het document te verzenden. • Om gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA te verzenden, drukt u op Start om een PIN-code weer te geven. Voer de PIN-code in de mobiele telefoon of PDA in om gegevens naar de MFP te verzenden. De gegevens worden verzonden naar de opgegeven bestemming. Raadpleeg pagina 6-21 voor meer informatie. 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Een document lezen Scan een document, haal een document op vanaf een gebruikersbox of extern geheugen, en verzend gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA. Een document scannen Druk op [Scan] om het scherm Scaninstelling weer te geven. Configureer de scaninstellingen zoals vereist en druk vervolgens op [Scan]. Referentie - U kunt slechts één document scannen. Item Beschrijving [Origineeltype] Stel de afbeeldingskwaliteit in op [Tekst], [Tekst/foto], [Foto], [Dot matrix origineel] of [Gekop. papier] in overeenstemming met de inhoud van het origineel dat moet worden gescand. [Enkelz./Dubbelz.] Selecteer om een enkelzijdig of dubbelzijdig origineel te scannen. [Resolutie] Stel de scanresolutie in op [200 e 100dpi (Standaard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fijn)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Superfijn)] en [600 e 600dpi (Ultrafijn)]. [Bestandstype] Selecteer een bestandstype. U hebt de keuze uit [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] en [Compact XPS]. Selecteer of de volledig gescande pagina's als één bestand moeten worden opgeslagen of als een bestand in een opgegeven aantal pagina's moet worden gesplitst om gegevens op te slaan. U kunt [Meerdere pagina's] niet selecteren als [JPEG] is geselecteerd als bestandstype. Om gesplitste bestanden te verzenden door ze aan een e-mail toe te voegen, geeft u [Methode e-mailbijlage] op. Selecteer [Alle best.verzonden één (1) e-mail] om alle gesplitste bestanden aan één e-mail toe te voegen. Selecteer [Eén (1) bestand per e-mail] om een e-mailbericht voor elk gesplitst bestand te verzenden. Wanneer u [Compact PDF] selecteert als bestandstype, kunt u [Omtreklijn PDF] opgeven. Als i-Option LK-102 is geregistreerd in de MFP en u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] selecteert voor het bestandstype, kunt u [Codering] en [PDF-documenteigenschappen] opgeven. Zie pagina 7-3 voor details over de functie. Als i-Option LK-105 is geregistreerd in de MFP en u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] selecteert voor het bestandstype, kunt u [Doorzoekbare PDF] opgeven. Zie pagina 8-3 voor details over de functie. [Densiteit] Pas de densiteit voor het scannen aan. [Kleur] Stel de scankleur in op [Auto kleur], [Full color], [Grijswaarden] of [Zwart]. [Documentnaam] Geef de documentnaam op. [Afzonderl. scan] Druk op deze knop om het scannen van het document in meerdere bewerkingen te splitsen. Dit is handig voor de volgende gevallen. • Wanneer een document teveel pagina's bevat en niet in de ADF kan worden geladen • Wanneer originelen op de glasplaat worden geplaatst • Wanneer enkelzijdige en dubbelzijdige originelen zijn gemengd bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 Ophalen vanaf een gebruikersbox Selecteer een gebruikersbox in [Lijst documentbronnen] om het scherm Document gebruiken weer te geven. Selecteer een document dat moet worden opgehaald en druk vervolgens op [OK]. Referentie - Als er een wachtwoord is opgegeven voor de geselecteerde gebruikersbox, verschijnt het scherm voor de wachtwoordinvoer. Voer het wachtwoord in. - Er kan slechts één gebruikersbox worden geselecteerd. - U kunt maximaal 10 documenten per keer ophalen vanaf een gebruikersbox. - Als een gebruikersbox is opgegeven als een bestemming, kunt u slechts één document ophalen. - U kunt de gebruikersbox waarvan u het document hebt opgehaald, niet opgeven als de bestemming. Item Beschrijving [Naam bewerken] Druk op deze knop om de naam van het geselecteerde document te wijzigen. [Document details] Druk op deze knop om de gedetailleerde informatie te controleren of een voorbeeldafbeelding van het geselecteerde document weer te geven. 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Een document ophalen vanaf een extern geheugen Selecteer [Extern geheugen] in [Lijst documentbronnen] om de lijst met documenten die in het externe geheugen zijn opgeslagen, weer te geven. Selecteer een document dat moet worden opgehaald en druk vervolgens op [OK]. Referentie - Om een document van een extern geheugen op te halen, moet u de volgende instellingen configureren in de MFP, afhankelijk van het doel van het document dat moet worden gebruikt. – Om een opgehaald document af te drukken, stelt u [Document afdrukken] in op ö [AAN] in ö [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Systeeminstellingen], [Gebruikerboxinstellingen], [Extern geheugen Functieinstellingen]. Om daarnaast ook de gebruikersauthenticatie uit te voeren, stelt u via [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] ö [Gebruikersregistratie], het item [Functie permissie] ö [Printen] in op [Toestaan] voor elke gebruiker. – Om een opgehaald document op te slaan in een gebruikersbox, stelt u [Documentscan Extern geheugen] in op ö [AAN ] in ö [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Systeeminstellingen], [Gebruikerboxinstellingen], [Extern geheugen Functie-instellingen]. Om daarnaast ook de gebruikersauthenticatie uit te voeren, stelt u via [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] ö [Gebruikersregistratie], het item [Functie permissie] ö [Documentscan Extern geheugen] in op [Toestaan] voor elke gebruiker. - De beschikbare bestandsindelingen zijn PDF, TIFF, JPEG en XPS. - Er kunnen maximaal 200 documenten worden opgehaald vanaf een extern geheugen. - Om een map te openen, selecteert u de map die u wilt openen en drukt u vervolgens op de knop [Openen]. - U kunt geen JPEG-document samen met een andere indeling opgeven. - Als een document van een extern geheugen is opgehaald, kunt u het document niet lezen via [Scan] of [Lijst documentbronnen]. - U kunt [Printen] of een gebruikersbox alleen opgeven als bestemming van een document dat van het externe geheugen is opgehaald. U kunt ook slechts één gebruikersbox als bestemming opgeven. Om een document in een gebruikersbox op te slaan, moet u een gebruikersbox maken en deze vooraf in het adresboek registreren. - Als een andere optie dan Gebruikersbox is opgegeven als bestemming, kunt u [Extern geheugen] niet selecteren. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 Met gegevens die zijn opgeslagen in een mobiele telefoon of PDA Selecteer [Mobiel] in [Lijst documentbronnen]. Wanneer u [Mobiel/PDA] selecteert en op [OK] drukt, wordt een pictogram van een mobiele telefoon weergegeven op het bureaublad. Referentie - Om de MFP aan te sluiten op een mobiele telefoon of PDA, moet u de optionele Lokale interfacekit EK-605 in de MFP installeren. Configureer daarnaast de volgende instellingen in de MFP. – Stel [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Netwerkinstellingen] ö [Bluetooth-instelling] in op [Inschakelen]. Stel ook [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Systeemconnectie] ö [Mobiele tel./PDA-instelling] in op [Toestaan]. – Om daarnaast ook de gebruikersauthenticatie uit te voeren, stelt u via [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] ö [Gebruikersregistratie], het item [Functie permissie] ö [Mobiele tel./PDA] in op [Toestaan] voor elke gebruiker. - Als [Mobiel/PDA] is geselecteerd, kunt u geen document lezen met [Scan] of [Lijst documentbronnen]. - U kunt alleen [Printen] of een gebruikersbox opgeven als bestemming voor het verzenden van gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA. U kunt ook slechts één gebruikersbox als bestemming opgeven. Om een document in een gebruikersbox op te slaan, moet u een gebruikersbox maken en deze vooraf in het adresboek registreren. - Als een andere optie dan [Printen] of een gebruikersbox is opgegeven als bestemming, kunt u [Mobiel] niet selecteren. - Deze machine ondersteunt RepliGo versie 2.1.0.9. - Om een XHTML-bestand af te drukken, moet u, aangezien een gekoppeld bestand wordt opgehaald met de WebDAV-clientfunctie, de volgende instellingen vooraf configureren in de MFP. – Stel [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Netwerkinstellingen] ö [WebDAV-instellingen] ö [WebDAV clientinstellingen] in op [AAN]. – Om een verbinding te maken via een proxy, registreert u een proxyserver in [Proxy serveradres] van [WebDAV client-instellingen]. Stel daarnaast [Gebruikersinstellingen] ö [Mobiele tel./PDA-instelling] ö [Gebruik van proxyserver ] in op [Ja]. – Geef in [Gebruikersinstellingen] ö [Mobiele tel./PDA-instelling] ö [Melding fout koppeling bestand], de bewerking voor de machine op die moet worden uitgevoerd wanneer het niet mogelijk is het gekoppelde bestand op te halen. Item Specificaties Communicatieprotocol Bluetooth ver. 2.0 + EDR Ondersteunend profiel OPP/BPP/SPP Ondersteunend bestandstype PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Ondersteuning XHTML-bestand Tekencode: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Uitbreiding van koppelingsbestand: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 dReferentie Details over het verzenden van gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA, vindt u op pagina 6-21. De functie om de MFP te verbinden met een mobiele telefoon of PDA is beschikbaar, zelfs als de licentiekit niet is geregistreerd. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Gebruikersboxbewerkingen] en [Afdrukbewerkingen]. 6.3.4 Het document bewerken Het gelezen document bewerken. Referentie - Wanneer u gegevens gebruikt die in een mobiele telefoon of PDA zijn opgeslagen, kunt u de voorbeeldafbeelding niet controleren of de gegevens niet bewerken. [Voorbeeld] Druk op deze knop om de gedetailleerde informatie te controleren of een voorbeeldafbeelding van het geselecteerde document weer te geven. Referentie - De functie [Voorbeeld] is niet beschikbaar voor een document dat wordt opgehaald vanaf een extern geheugen. - Voor een gecombineerd document is de voorbeeldfunctie alleen beschikbaar voor het eerste document. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 [Document/pagina] - [Document bewerken] De pagina's van een geselecteerd document bewerken. U kunt de pagina die in de verkeerde richting is gescand, draaien of u kunt een onnodige pagina verwijderen. Voor een document dat uit meerdere pagina's bestaat kunt u de pagina's verplaatsen om de paginavolgorde te wijzigen. U kunt ook een voorbeeld van de pagina's weergeven om de inhoud van de pagina te controleren. Referentie - Als u meerdere documenten hebt geselecteerd, is de functie voor het bewerken van de paginaniet beschikbaar. - Als u een gecombineerd document hebt geselecteerd, is de functie voor het bewerken van de pagina niet beschikbaar. Item Beschrijving [Oneven pagina] Druk op deze knop om de oneven pagina te selecteren. [Even pagina] Druk op deze knop om de even pagina te selecteren. [Voorbeeld/instellen bereik] Druk op deze knop om een voorbeeld van de pagina weer te geven. [Pagina verwijderen] Druk op deze knop om de geselecteerde pagina te verwijderen. [Pagina draaien] Druk op deze knop om de geselecteerde pagina te draaien. De toegelaten draaihoeken zijn: 90 graden links, 90 graden rechts en 180 graden. [Pagina verplaatsen] Druk op deze knop om de volgorde te wijzigen door de geselecteerde pagina te verplaatsen. Tijdens het controleren van de miniatuurafbeeldingen kunt u de verplaatsingspositie selecteren. 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/pagina] - [Documenten combineren] Combineer geselecteerde meerdere documenten. U kunt [Verplaats] gebruiken om de combinatievolgorde te wijzigen. Referentie - U kunt [Printen] of [Adressenlijst] alleen selecteren als een bestemming van een gecombineerd document. - U kunt maximaal 10 documenten tegelijk combineren. - U kunt geen gescand document combineren met een document dat van een gebruikersbox is opgehaald. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 [Document/pagina] - [Documentinst.] Configureer de instellingen voor het verzenden van het geselecteerde document. U kunt de resolutie, het bestandstype en de kleurinstelling van het document wijzigen. Referentie - Als u meerdere documenten hebt geselecteerd, is de functie voor de documentinstelling niet beschikbaar. - Als u een document hebt geselecteerd dat vanaf een extern geheugen is opgehaald, is de functie voor het instellen van het document niet beschikbaar. [Terug naar Scanbest.] Druk op [Terug naar Scanbest.] om het geselecteerde document te herstellen naar de bronlocatie. - Het gescande document wordt verwijderd van de MFP. - Het document dat van een gebruikersbox is opgehaald, wordt teruggezet in de brongebruikersbox. Item Beschrijving [Resolutie] Stel de scanresolutie in op [Instellingen bij opslaan], [200 e 100dpi (Standaard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fijn)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Superfijn)] en [600 e 600dpi (Ultrafijn)]. [Bestandstype] Stel de bestandsindeling voor het verzenden van gegevens in op [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] en [Compact XPS]. Selecteer of de volledig gescande pagina's als één bestand moeten worden opgeslagen of als een bestand in een opgegeven aantal pagina's moet worden gesplitst om gegevens op te slaan. U kunt [Meerdere pagina's] niet selecteren als [JPEG] is geselecteerd als bestandstype. Om gesplitste bestanden te verzenden door ze aan een e-mail toe te voegen, geeft u [Methode e-mailbijlage] op. Selecteer [Alle best.verzonden één (1) e-mail] om alle gesplitste bestanden aan één e-mail toe te voegen. Selecteer [Eén (1) bestand per e-mail] om een e-mailbericht voor elk gesplitst bestand te verzenden. Wanneer u [Compact PDF] selecteert als bestandstype, kunt u [Omtreklijn PDF] opgeven. Als i-Option LK-102 is geregistreerd in de MFP en u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] selecteert voor het bestandstype, kunt u [Codering] en [PDF-documenteigenschappen] opgeven. Zie pagina 7-3 voor details over de functie. Als i-Option LK-105 is geregistreerd in de MFP en u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] selecteert voor het bestandstype, kunt u [Doorzoekbare PDF] opgeven. Zie pagina 8-3 voor details over de functie. [Kleur] Stel de scankleur voor het verzenden van gegevens in op [Bestaande kleurinstelling gebruiken], [Full color], [Grijswaarden] of [Zwart]. 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.5 Een bestemming opgeven Geef een bestemming op voor het gelezen document. Afdrukken Druk op [Printen] om de gegevens direct vanaf de MFP af te drukken. Configureer de afdrukinstellingen en druk vervolgens op [OK]. Referentie - Als u meerdere documenten hebt gescand, is de functie voor de afdrukinstelling niet beschikbaar. - Wanneer u een gecombineerd document afdrukt, zijn [Combineren] en [Zoom] niet beschikbaar. - Wanneer u een document met een geïntegreerd wachtwoord afdrukt met de functie Wachtwoordkopie, kunt u [Combineren] of [Zoom] niet opgeven. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Kopieerbewerkingen] voor details over de functie Wachtwoordkopie. - Wanneer u een document afdrukt dat vanaf een extern geheugen is opgehaald, zijn de functies [Combineren] en [Zoom] niet beschikbaar. - Wanneer u een document in JPEG-, XPS- of Compact XPS-indeling dat vanaf een extern geheugen is opgehaald, wilt afdrukken, is de functie [2-zijdig] niet beschikbaar. Nieten en Perforeren zijn evenmin beschikbaar voor de instelling [Afwerking]. - Wanneer u gegevens afdrukt die zijn opgeslagen op een mobiele telefoon of PDA, kunt u alleen de afdrukinstellingen controleren. Om de afdrukinstellingen te wijzigen, selecteert u [Gebruikersinstellingen] ö [Mobiele tel./PDA-instelling] ö [Printen]. Item Beschrijving [Kopieën:] Gebruik de cijfertoetsen om het aantal af te drukken kopieën op te geven. [Printen] Selecteer of in dubbelzijdige modus moet worden afgedrukt. [Afwerking] Druk op deze knop om instellingen te configureren voor het sorteren, groeperen, nieten of perforeren. [Combineren] Druk op deze knop om op te geven of pagina's moeten worden gecombineerd. U kunt meerdere pagina's van het document combineren en afdrukken op één enkele pagina. [Zoom] Druk op deze knop om een zoomfactor voor het document op te geven. [Doorlopend afdrukken] Deze functie is beschikbaar wanneer u gecombineerde documenten afdrukt in de 2-zijdige afdrukfunctie. Wanneer u meerdere documenten combineert, worden ze ononderbroken afgedrukt. Wanneer u afdrukt met de 2-zijdige functie en het document eindig op de voorzijde van een vel papier, moet u selecteren of u de afdruk van het volgende document op de rugzijde van het vel wilt starten of op de voorzijde van een nieuw vel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 Referentie - De instelwaarde voor [Afwerking] verschilt afhankelijk van de optie die is geïnstalleerd. – De nietinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de optionele afwerkingseenheid is geïnstalleerd. – De perforeerinstellingen zijn alleen beschikbaar als de perforeereenheid is geïnstalleerd op de optionele afwerkingseenheid. - [Doorlopend afdrukken] wordt weergegeven wanneer meerdere documenten worden gecombineerd met het bewerkingsgereedschap. Daarna wordt [Printen] geselecteerd als bestemming. Bestemmingen opgeven Selecteer in [Adressenlijst] een adres waarnaar u een document wilt verzenden. Druk op het tabblad [Zoeken] om de snelkiesbestemmingen die in de hoofdeenheid zijn geregistreerd, te raadplegen. Druk op het tabblad [Groep] om de groepslijst die in de hoofdeenheid is geregistreerd, te raadplegen. Referentie - Als u meerdere documenten hebt gelezen, is de gebruikersboxfunctie niet beschikbaar. - Als de functie [Mijn adres] beschikbaar is, kunt u op Mijn adres drukken om Mijn adresboek weer te geven. Raadpleeg pagina 10-3 voor details over de functie van My Address. - Als u een adres hebt opgegeven, kunt u de verzendlade controleren door op [Adreslade controleren/ Instelling extern adres] te drukken. - De e-mailadressen waarvoor een certificaat is geregistreerd, worden weergegeven met een sleutelpictogram. - U kunt alleen Gebruikersboxen opgeven als een adresboekbestemming van een document dat is opgehaald van een extern geheugen of van een document dat is opgeslagen op een mobiele telefoon of PDA. 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Een document opslaan in een extern geheugen Selecteer [Extern geheugen] in [Adressenlijst] en druk op [OK]. Referentie - Om gegevens in een extern geheugen op te slaan, [Document opslaan] in op ö [AAN] in ö [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Systeeminstellingen], [Gebruikerboxinstellingen], [Extern geheugen Functie-instellingen]. Om daarnaast ook de gebruikersauthenticatie uit te voeren, stelt u via [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie/Gebruikersregistratie] ö [Gebruikersauthenticatie-instellingen] ö [Gebruikersregistratie], het item [Functie permissie] ö [Opslaan naar extern geheugen] in op [Toestaan] voor elke gebruiker. - Als [Printen] of een bestemming is opgegeven als bestemming, kunt u [Extern geheugen] niet selecteren. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 6.3.6 De verzendlade controleren Verzendlade Als u een adres opgeeft, verschijnt de verzendlade. De verzendlade toont het pictogram van de bestemming die u hebt opgegeven. Nr. Naam Beschrijving 1 Pictogram Best.inst. Druk op het pictogram voor Best.inst. om het scherm Verzenden naar controleren weer te geven waarin u de lijst moet opgegeven bestemmingen kunt controleren. 2 Bestemmingspictogram Toont de pictogrammen voor de bestemmingen. Druk op het pictogram voor de gewenste bestemming om het scherm Verzenden naar controleren weer te geven waar u de gedetailleerde informatie over de bestemming kunt controleren. 1 2 6 Image Panel gebruiken 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [TX-lade controleren] Druk op het pictogram van de verzendlade om het scherm Verzenden naar controleren weer te geven waarin u de lijst moet opgegeven bestemmingen kunt controleren. Als een e-mailadres is opgegeven als een bestemming, kunt u de instellingen opgeven voor de e-mailcodering en voor het toevoegen van een digitale handtekening. Referentie - Om een e-mailbericht te coderen en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen met S/MIME, stelt u [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Netwerkinstelling] ö [E-mailinstellingen] ö [S/MIME communicatieinstellingen] in op [AAN]. - Om een e-mail te coderen, moet een certificaat in het e-mailadres zijn geregistreerd. - Om een digitale handtekening toe te voegen aan een e-mailbericht, moet het apparaatcertificaat in de MFP zijn geregistreerd. Stel ook [Beheerderinstelling] ö [Netwerkinstelling] ö [E-mailinstellingen] ö [S/MIME communicatie-instellingen] ö [Digitale handtekening] in op [Altijd ondertek.] of [Select. bij verz.]. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] voor meer informatie. Item Beschrijving [Externe adresinstellingen] Druk op deze knop om de instellingen te configureren voor de e-mailcodering op basis van S/MIME en een gekoppelde digitale handtekening. Deze instelling is beschikbaar wanneer [AAN] is geselecteerd voor [S/MIMEcommunicatie- instellingen] onder [Beheerderinstellingen] en wanneer E-mail is geselecteerd. [Detail] Druk op deze knop om de gedetailleerde informatie van het adres te controleren. [Verwdr.] Druk op deze knop om het geselecteerde adres te verwijderen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.3 Image Panel gebruiken 6 6.3.7 Gegevens verzenden vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA Wanneer u een bestemming selecteert en op Start drukt, wordt de PIN-code op het bedieningspaneel weergegeven. Geef de gegevens die u wilt gebruiken en de MFP op om gegevens in de mobiele telefoon of PDA te verzenden. Voer de PIN-code in om gegevens te verzenden naar de MFP. Referentie - U kunt alleen [Printen] of een gebruikersbox opgeven als bestemming voor het verzenden van gegevens vanaf een mobiele telefoon of PDA. U kunt ook slechts één gebruikersbox als bestemming opgeven. Om een document in een gebruikersbox op te slaan, moet u een gebruikersbox maken en deze vooraf in het adresboek registreren. – Raadpleeg de [handleiding Boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over het maken van een gebruikersbox. – Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkscan-/fax-/netwerkfaxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over het registreren van een bestemming in het adresboek. - Meer details over het gebruik van een mobiele telefoon of PDA, vindt u in de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon of PDA. - De communicatiesnelheid kan dalen of de communicatie kan worden onderbroken door obstakels, de signaalkwaliteit, magnetische velden of statische elektriciteit. - Documenten en afbeeldingsgegevens worden mogelijk niet correct verzonden, afhankelijk van de beveiligingsinstelling van de mobiele telefoon of PDA. 6 Een foto registreren in het adresboek 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4 Een foto registreren in het adresboek In de Webbrowser van uw computer kunt u PageScope Web Connection gebruiken om fotogegevens toe te voegen aan de geregistreerde snelkiesbestemmingen. De geregistreerde fotogegevens worden toegepast op de [Adressenlijst] van het Image Panel. dReferentie Voor meer informatie over de PageScope Web Connection, raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder]. 6.4.1 Specificaties fotogegevens De specificaties voor registreerbare fotogegevens worden hieronder weergegeven. Referentie - Fotogegevens worden niet vergroot of verkleind tijdens het registreren van fotogegevens. Item Specificaties Bestandstype BMP-indeling, 24-bits kleur, niet gecomprimeerd Afbeeldingsformaat 48 e 48 pixels Grootte 6.966 bytes bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.4 Een foto registreren in het adresboek 6 6.4.2 Fotogegevens registreren Fotogegevens registreren door PageScope Web Connection te bedienen vanaf de webbrowser op uw computer. Referentie - Om fotogegevens toe te voegen aan het adresboek, moet u vooraf snelkiesbestemmingen registreren. - Wanneer de functie My Address beschikbaar is, kunt u fotogegevens toevoegen aan de snelkiesbestemmingen in My Address Book. - Fotogegevens kunnen alleen in My Address Book worden geregistreerd wanneer u zich aanmeldt als een geregistreerde gebruiker. 1 Aanmelden bij de gebruikersfunctie of beheerdersfunctie. 2 Selecteer [Store Address]. 3 Selecteer [Photo/Icon]. 4 Selecteer de snelkiesbestemming waaraan u de fotogegevens wilt toevoegen en klik vervolgens op [Edit]. % Wanneer de fotogegevens zijn geregistreerd, wordt [Photo/Icon] in [Foto] weergegeven. 6 Een foto registreren in het adresboek 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 5 Selecteer [Register Photo]. 6 Klik op [Browse] en geef vervolgens de map op waar de fotogegevens die u wilt toevoegen, zijn opgeslagen. 7 Druk op [OK]. De fotogegevens worden toegevoegd aan de snelkiesbestemming. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-25 6.5 Image Panel aanpassen 6 6.5 Image Panel aanpassen Wanneer de functies My Panel en My Address beschikbaar zijn, kunt u het scherm Image Panel aanpassen als een gebruikersspecifiek scherm. Om het scherm Image Panel aan te passen, is de volgende voorwaarden vereist. - De functies My Panel en My Address zijn beschikbaar op de MFP. - Voer de gebruikersauthenticatie uit en meldt u vervolgens aan als een geregistreerde gebruiker. dReferentie Raadpleeg pagina 9-3 voor details over de functie van My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 10-3 voor details over de functie My Address. 6.5.1 Het gebied Gegevens lezen aanpassen Snelkoppelingspictogrammen voor vaak gebruikte gebruikersboxen kunnen worden geregistreerd in het gebied Gegevens lezen. 1 Druk in [Gegevensbron] op [Lijst documentbronnen]. 2 Druk op [Basisscherm aanpassen]. 3 Selecteer de gebruikersbox die u wilt registreren in het basisscherm en selecteer de locatie in het gebied Gegevens lezen. % Als u een locatie hebt geselecteerd die al in het basisscherm is geregistreerd, worden de gegevens overschreven. % U kunt geen Gebruikersbox die al in het basisscherm is geregistreerd, registreren op een andere locatie in het basisscherm. 6 Image Panel aanpassen 6-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Druk op [OK]. Er wordt een snelkoppelingspictogram geregistreerd. 6.5.2 Het gebied Documentbestemming aanpassen Snelkoppelingspictogrammen voor vaak gebruikte bestemmingen kunnen worden geregistreerd in het gebied Documentbestemming. 1 Druk op [Adressenlijst] in het gebied [Gegevensbest.]. 2 Druk op [Basisscherm aanpassen]. 3 Selecteer de bestemming die u wilt registreren in het basisscherm en selecteer de locatie in het gebied Documentbestemming. % Als u een locatie hebt geselecteerd die al in het basisscherm is geregistreerd, worden de gegevens overschreven. % U kunt geen bestemming die al in het basisscherm is geregistreerd, registreren op een andere locatie in het basisscherm. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-27 6.5 Image Panel aanpassen 6 4 Druk op [OK]. Er wordt een snelkoppelingspictogram geregistreerd. 6.5.3 Een geregistreerd snelkoppelingspictogram verwijderen 1 Druk op [Basisscherm aanpassen]. 2 Selecteer een pictogram dat u wilt verwijderen. 3 Druk op [Verwijderen]. 4 Druk op [OK]. Het snelkoppelingspictogram wordt verwijderd. 6 Image Panel aanpassen 6-28 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 7 PDF-verwerkingsfunctie bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Overzicht 7 7 PDF-verwerkingsfunctie 7.1 Overzicht Met de PDF-verwerkingsfunctie kunt u het beveiligingsniveau opgeven voor het distribueren van het gescande document en een document dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen, zoals door het coderen van een document of door het toevoegen van een digitale handtekening zoals vereist. Referentie - Deze functie kan worden gebruikt op de MFP waarop de i-Option LK-102 is geregistreerd. Beschikbare bewerkingen met de PDF-verwerkingsfunctie Met de PDF-verwerkingsfunctie kunt u de volgende bewerkingen uitvoeren. - De instellingen van de eigenschappen voor het PDF-document configureren wanneer het wordt gedistribueerd met de scanfunctie of gebruikersboxfunctie (p. 7-4). - Een PDF-document coderen met een wachtwoord of digitale ID (openbare sleutel) wanneer het wordt gedistribueerd met de scanfunctie of gebruikersboxfunctie (p. 7-5). - Een digitale handtekening toevoegen wanneer een gecodeerd PDF-document wordt gedistribueerd (p. 7-5). - Een AES-gecodeerd PDF-document kan worden afgedrukt met de directe afdrukfunctie (p. 7-8). dReferentie Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkscan/fax/netwerkfaxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over de scanfunctie. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over de gebruikersboxfuncties. 7 PDF-documenteigenschappen 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 PDF-documenteigenschappen Wanneer u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] selecteert als een bestandstype wanneer u een gescand document of een document dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen, distribueert kunt u de instellingen voor de PDFdocumenteigenschappen configureren. Referentie - Wanneer u een document opslaat in een gebruikersbox met [Document opslaan] van de Gebruikersboxfunctie, kunt u geen instellingen voor de PDF-documenteigenschappen opgeven. - Wanneer u een document in een gebruikersbox in PDF-indeling verzendt naar een ander apparaat met PageScope Web Connection, kunt u de instellingen voor de PDF-documenteigenschappen configureren. Item Beschrijving [Titel] Als [Nee] is geselecteerd voor [Bestandsnaam toep.] geeft u de titel van het PDF-document op (tot 64 tekens). [Bestandsnaam toep.] Geef op of de bestandsnaam moet worden toegepast als de naam van het PDF-document. [Auteur] Voer de auteur in van het PDF-document (tot 64 tekens). Wanneer de gebruikersauthenticatie wordt uitgevoerd, wordt de aanmeldingsnaam ingevoerd als de naam van de auteur. [Onderwerp] Voer de subtitel in van het PDF-document (tot 64 tekens). [Trefwoorden] Voer de trefwoorden in van het PDF-document (tot 64 tekens). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 PDF-document coderen en digitale handtekening toevoegen 7 7.3 PDF-document coderen en digitale handtekening toevoegen Wanneer u [PDF] of [Compact PDF] of selecteert als een bestandstype wanneer u een gescand document of een document dat in een gebruikersbox is opgeslagen, distribueert kunt u de beveiliging van het PDFdocument verhogen door het te coderen met een wachtwoord of de digitale ID van een gebruiker (openbare sleutel). Wanneer een apparaatcertificaat is geregistreerd in de MFP, kan een PDF-document worden gedistribueerd terwijl een digitale handtekening wordt toegevoegd. Het toevoegen van een digitale handtekening certificeert de auteur (MFP) van het verzonden document en garandeert dat het document niet werd gewijzigd na het ondertekenen. Referentie - Wanneer u PageScope Web Connection gebruikt, kunt u de codering uitvoeren en een digitale handtekening toevoegen om een document in een gebruikersbox in PDF-indeling te verzenden naar een ander apparaat. - Om een digitale handtekening toe te voegen, is het nodig het PDF-document te coderen met een wachtwoord of digitale ID. 7.3.1 Op wachtwoord gebaseerde codering Om een document te coderen met een wachtwoord, moet u de volgende instellingen opgeven. Item Beschrijving [Coderingsdoel] Selecteer een coderingsdoel. Wanneer u [Andere dan metageg.] selecteert, wordt het item dat is opgegeven in [PDF-documenteigenschappen] uitgesloten van het coderingsdoel. Wanneer u [Andere dan metageg.] selecteert, mag u [Laag] niet selecteren als coderingsniveau. [Coderingstype] Selecteer [Wachtwoord]. [Handtekening] Wanneer een apparaatcertificaat is geregistreerd in de MFP, moet u opgeven of een digitale handtekening moet worden toegevoegd. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] voor meer informatie over het registreren van een apparaatcertificaat in de MFP. [Coderingsniveau] Selecteer een coderingsniveau. • [Laag]: RC4-coderingsmethode (40-bits sleutellengte), ondersteund door Acrobat 3.0 of later • [Hoog niveau 1]: RC4-coderingsmethode (128-bits sleutellengte), ondersteund door Acrobat 5.0 of later • [Hoog niveau 2]: AES-coderingsmethode (128-bits sleutellengte), ondersteund door Acrobat 7.0 of later [Wachtwoord] Voer het wachtwoord in dat vereist is om een PDF-document te openen. Voer ter bevestiging het wachtwoord tweemaal in. [Documentmachtigingen] Voer het wachtwoord in dat vereist is om de documentbevoegdheden te wijzigen. Voer ter bevestiging het wachtwoord tweemaal in. Het is niet mogelijk hetzelfde wachtwoord te gebruiken als het wachtwoord dat is opgegeven in [Wachtwoord]. Nadat u de documentmachtigingen hebt geconfigureerd, drukt u op [Detailinstellingen] om de gedetailleerde permissie-instellingen te configureren. De instelwaarden verschillen afhankelijk van het coderingsniveau. 7 PDF-document coderen en digitale handtekening toevoegen 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Detailinstellingen] 7.3.2 Op digitale ID gebaseerde codering Om een document te coderen met een digitale ID van een gebruiker, moet u de volgende instellingen configureren. Item Beschrijving [Afdrukken toegestaan] Geef op of het afdrukken van een PDF-document wordt toegestaan. [Lage resolutie] is selecteerbaar wanneer [Hoog niveau 1] of [Hoog niveau 2] is geselecteerd voor Coderingsniveau. [Kopiëren van tekst, afb. en overig mogelijk] Geef op of het kopiëren van tekst, afbeeldingen en overige inhoud al dan niet wordt ingeschakeld. [Wijzigen toegestaan] Geef het machtigingsniveau op dat betrekking heeft op het aanbrengen van wijzigingen aan een PDF-document. • Selecteer [Pagina's invoegen/verw./draaien] om de pagina in te voegen, te verwijderen of te draaien. Configureer deze instelling voor het coderen op een hoger beveiligingsniveau. • Selecteer [Invullen van formuliervelden en ondertekening] om informatie in het formulier in te vullen en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen. Configureer deze instelling voor het coderen op een hoger beveiligingsniveau. • Selecteer [Annotaties maken, tekst in formuliervelden en ondertekenen] om opmerkingen toe te voegen, informatie in het formulier in te voeren en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen. • Selecteer [Pagina-opmaak, tekst in formuliervelden en ondertekenen] om de pagina in te voegen, te verwijderen of te draaien, informatie in het formulier in te voeren en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen. Configureer deze instelling voor het coderen op een lager beveiligingsniveau. • Selecteer [Alles behalve extractie pagina's] om een document te bewerken, het formulierveld maken en informatie in dit veld invoeren, opmerkingen toevoegen en een digitale handtekening toevoegen. Item Beschrijving [Coderingsdoel] Selecteer een coderingsdoel. Wanneer u [Andere dan metageg.] selecteert, wordt het item dat is opgegeven in [PDF-documenteigenschappen] uitgesloten van het coderingsdoel. [Coderingstype] Selecteer [Digitale ID]. Selecteer [Digitale ID] om het scherm voor het selecteren van bestemmingen weer te geven. Het scherm voor het selecteren van een adres tont een lijst met e-mailadressen met geregistreerde digitale ID's voor S/MIME-verzendingen. Geef een digitale ID op die moet worden gebruikt voor de codering door een e-mailadres te selecteren. Wanneer u [Idem als bestemming] selecteert, wordt de digitale ID van het adres gebruikt. Op dit scherm hoeft u geen digitale ID op te geven. De specificatie van de digitale ID is onafhankelijk van de specificatie van een adres. U moet daarom afzonderlijk een adres opgeven. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 PDF-document coderen en digitale handtekening toevoegen 7 [Detailinstellingen] Referentie - De codering op basis van digitale ID vereist het vooraf registreren van het certificaat van een gebruiker in een e-mailadres. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] voor meer informatie over het registreren van het certificaat van een gebruiker in een e-mailadres. - U kunt maximaal 100 digitale ID's opgeven. - De digitale ID die kan worden opgegeven, is afhankelijk van het toepassingsniveau van een gebruiker. - Wanneer u een PDF-document in een gebruikersbox opslaat, kunt u dit niet coderen door middel van een digitale ID. - Wanneer u een PDF-document codeert en tegelijk een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt, zijn de volgende instellingen niet beschikbaar wanneer [Rotatie aanpassen] is ingesteld op [Aanpassen] in de instelling Doorzoekbare PDF. [Rotatie aanpassen] wordt standaard ingesteld op [Aanpassen]. Wijzig de instelling zoals nodig. – [Coderingstype]: [Digitale ID] – [Coderingsniveau]: [Hoog niveau 2] – [Coderingsdoel]: [Andere dan metageg.] – [Handtekening]: [Ja] - Raadpleeg pagina 8-3 voor details over de doorzoekbare PDF-functie. [Handtekening] Wanneer een apparaatcertificaat is geregistreerd in de MFP, moet u opgeven of een digitale handtekening moet worden toegevoegd. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkbeheerder] voor meer informatie over het registreren van een apparaatcertificaat in de MFP. [Coderingsniveau] Selecteer een coderingsniveau. Om een document met een digitale ID te coderen, kunt u [Laag] niet selecteren als coderingsniveau. • [Hoog niveau 1]: RC4-coderingsmethode (128-bits sleutellengte), ondersteund door Acrobat 5.0 of later • [Hoog niveau 2]: AES-coderingsmethode (128-bits sleutellengte), ondersteund door Acrobat 7.0 of later Item Beschrijving [Afdrukken toegestaan] Geef op of het afdrukken van een PDF-document wordt toegestaan. [Kopiëren van tekst, afb. en overig mogelijk] Geef op of het kopiëren van tekst, afbeeldingen en overige inhoud al dan niet wordt ingeschakeld. [Wijzigen toegestaan] Geef het machtigingsniveau op dat betrekking heeft op het aanbrengen van wijzigingen aan een PDF-document. • Selecteer [Pagina's invoegen/verw./draaien] om de pagina in te voegen, te verwijderen of te draaien. Configureer deze instelling voor het coderen op een hoger beveiligingsniveau. • Selecteer [Invullen van formuliervelden en ondertekening] om informatie in het formulier in te vullen en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen. Configureer deze instelling voor het coderen op een hoger beveiligingsniveau. • Selecteer [Annotaties maken, tekst in formuliervelden en ondertekenen] om opmerkingen toe te voegen, informatie in het formulier in te voeren en een digitale handtekening toe te voegen. • Selecteer [Alles behalve extractie pagina's] om een document te bewerken, het formulierveld maken en informatie in dit veld invoeren, opmerkingen toevoegen en een digitale handtekening toevoegen. Item Beschrijving 7 Direct print 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Direct print Een AES-gecodeerd PDF-document kan worden afgedrukt in de directe afdrukfunctie. Gebruik PageScope Web Connection om documenten af te drukken in de directe afdrukfunctie. Meld u aan als openbare gebruiker of als geregistreerde gebruiker en selecteer vervolgens [Direct Print]. Klik op [Browse] om het bestand te zoeken en klik daarna op [OK]. dReferentie Voor meer informatie over PageScope Web Connection, raadpleeg de [handleiding Afdrukbewerkingen]. 8 Doorzoekbare PDF-functie bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Overzicht 8 8 Doorzoekbare PDF-functie 8.1 Overzicht Doorzoekbare PDF verwijst naar een functie die een op tekst doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt door transparante tekstgegevens te plakken op het gebied van een document waarin tekens worden herkend via een OCR-proces. U kunt een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maken wanneer u een origineel opslaat of verzendt in PDF-indeling of compact PDF-indeling met de scan- of gebruikersboxfuncties. De functie Doorzoekbare PDF-functie ondersteunt meerdere talen. Wanneer u een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt, moet u een geschikte taal selecteren op basis van het origineel voor een juist OCR-verwerking. U kunt de nauwkeurigheid van de OCRverwerking ook verbeteren door de paginarichting automatisch te corrigeren. Als u documenten op papier wilt beheren in elektronisch formaat, is het handig om de functie Doorzoekbare PDF te gebruiken om documenten te converteren naar op tekst doorzoekbare PDF-bestanden. Referentie - Deze functie is beschikbaar wanneer i-Option LK-105 is geregistreerd met de MFP. - Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkscan/fax/netwerkfaxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over de scanfunctie. - Raadpleeg de [handleiding Boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over de gebruikersboxfuncties. Voorzorgsmaatregelen bij het maken van doorzoekbare PDF-bestanden Afhankelijk van de originele voorwaarden, kunnen er enkele problemen ontstaan bij het herkennen van tekst, de tekst kan vervormd worden of er kunnen andere problemen optreden. Voorbeeld - De tekens die de MFP niet ondersteunt, worden niet correct herkend. - Als bij het maken van een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand een andere taal wordt geselecteerd, dan de taal die in het origineel wordt gebruikt, zal de tekst niet correct worden herkend. - Als de paginarichting niet is ingesteld om automatisch te worden gecorrigeerd, en als de richting van het opgegeven origineel niet overeenkomt met de richting van de tekst, wordt de tekst niet correct herkend. dReferentie Meer details over de instelling voor het automatisch corrigeren van de paginarichting, vindt u op pagina 8-5. Herkenbare tekengrootte Referentie - Wanneer u een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt, kan er geen resolutie van meer dan 300 dpi worden opgegeven voor het scannen. Japans Europese taal Aziatische taal Resolutie 200 dpi 12 pt tot 142 pt 9 pt tot 142 pt 20 pt tot 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt tot 96 pt 6 pt tot 96 pt 12 pt tot 96 pt 8 De OCR-bewerkingsinstellingen configureren 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 De OCR-bewerkingsinstellingen configureren Voordat u een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt, kunt u opgeven of er prioriteit moet worden gegeven aan nauwkeurigheid of aan snelheid voor de OCR-verwerking. [OCR-bewerkingsinstelling] 1 Druk op Hulpprogramma. 2 Druk op [Gebruikersinst.]. 3 Druk op [Scan/faxinstellingen]. 4 Druk in [Scan/faxinstellingen] (2/2) op [OCR-bewerkingsinstelling]. 5 Selecteer de OCR-bewerking en druk op [OK]. % [Prioriteit kwaliteit]: geef prioriteit aan de herkenningsnauwkeurigheid van een originele tekst. Ook de helling van het origineel wordt automatisch aangepast. % [Prioriteit snelheid]: geef prioriteit aan de OCR-verwerkingssnelheid. De helling van het origineel wordt niet aangepast. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 De doorzoekbare PDF-instelling configureren 8 8.3 De doorzoekbare PDF-instelling configureren U kunt een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maken door [PDF] of [Compact PDF] te selecteren voor het bestandstype wanneer een origineel in PDF-indeling wordt opgeslagen of verzonden met de functies Scan en Gebruikersbox. dReferentie Raadpleeg de [handleiding Netwerkscan-/fax-/netwerkfaxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over het opgeven van het bestandstype wanneer de scanfunctie wordt gebruikt. Raadpleeg de [handleiding Boxbewerkingen] voor meer informatie over het opgeven van het bestandstype wanneer de gebruikersboxfunctie wordt gebruikt. Referentie - Als [Compact PDF] is geselecteerd voor [Bestandstype] om een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand te maken, kan de OCR-verwerkingssnelheid sneller zijn dan wanneer [PDF] is geselecteerd. - Wanneer u een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand maakt, kan [Resolutie] niet worden ingesteld op [400 e 400dpi (Superfijn)] of [600 e 600dpi (Ultrafijn)]. - Om een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand te maken en tegelijk een PDF-bestand te coderen, wanneer een of meer van de volgende instellingen zijn opgegeven, kan [Rotatie aanpassen] niet worden ingesteld op [Aanpassen] in de PDF-coderingsinstelling. – [Coderingstype]: [Digitale ID] – [Coderingsniveau]: [Hoog niveau 2] – [Coderingsdoel]: [Andere dan metageg.] – [Handtekening]: [Ja] - Raadpleeg pagina 7-5 voor meer informatie over het coderen van een PDF-bestand. - Voor [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] en [Taiwanese], wordt de tekstrichting (verticaal of horizontaal schrift) automatisch herkend. Voor [Chinese], [Korean] en [Taiwanese], waarbij zowel de verticale als horizontale tekstrichting op één pagina worden gebruikt, wordt het origineel verwerkt op basis van één van de richtingen. - Door het downloaden of verzenden van een document dat is geconfigureerd als een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand en opgeslagen in een gebruikersbox met PageScope Web Connection, wordt de instelling voor de doorzoekbare PDF geannuleerd en wordt zoeken op tekst uitgeschakeld. Item Beschrijving [Taalselectie] Selecteer een taal om een doorzoekbaar PDF-bestand te maken. Tekst zal niet correct worden herkend, tenzij een geschikte taal is geselecteerd volgens het origineel. [Rotatie aanpassen] Geef op of elke pagina automatisch moet worden gedraaid om de pagina te corrigeren volgens de tekstrichting die is gedetecteerd via een OCR-proces. Als de paginarichting niet automatisch wordt gecorrigeerd, en als de richting van het opgegeven origineel niet overeenkomt met de richting van de tekst, wordt de tekst niet correct herkend. 8 De doorzoekbare PDF-instelling configureren 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 Functie My Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overzicht 9 9 Functie My Panel 9.1 Overzicht Met de functie My Panel kan de gebruiker de omgeving van het bedieningspaneel dat is aangepast door de gebruiker op basis van de toepassing (My Panel), centraal beheren en My Panel ophalen op de MFP die door de gebruiker is geselecteerd. Het gebruik van My Panel biedt dezelfde operationaliteit op meerdere MFP's in een netwerkomgeving. dReferentie Deze functie wordt gebruikt in combinatie met PageScope My Panel Manager. Raadpleeg de handleiding van PageScope My Panel Manager voor meer informatie over het inschakelen van de functie. U kunt de instellingen voor My Panel ook configureren met PageScope My Panel Manager. Raadpleeg de handleiding PageScope My Panel Manager voor meer informatie. 9.1.1 Beschikbare bewerkingen met Mijn paneel Met Mijn paneel kunt u het bedieningspaneel aanpassen, zodat vaak gebruikte functies als voorkeur worden weergegeven. Als de webbrowser of Image panel beschikbaar is, kunt u ook de Webbrowser-instellingen en informatie voor elke gebruiker beheren door een verbinding te maken met PageScope My Panel Manager en kunt u het scherm Image Panel aanpassen. Aanpasbare items Met My Panel kunt u de volgende items aanpassen. - Specificatie van een taal die op het bedieningspaneel wordt weergegeven - Specificatie van een meeteenheid die moet worden weergegeven wanneer u cijfers invoert - Eerste weergaveinstellingen voor het basisscherm van de functie Kopiëren, de registratie van de sneltoetsen en het instellen van waardetoetsen die in het basisscherm moeten worden geschikt - Eerste weergave-instellingen voor het basisscherm van de fax/scanfunctie en registratie van de sneltoetsen - Eerste weergave-instellingen voor het basisscherm van de gebruikersboxfunctie en registratie van de sneltoetsen - Specificatie van de kleur van geselecteerde knoppen op het bedieningspaneel - Weergave van het hoofdmenu van My Panel - Weergave van het beginscherm van het Bedieningspaneel Functies die beschikbaar zijn door te verbinden met de webbrowser U kunt de gebruiksomgeving van de Webbrowser aanpassen door de Webbrowser te koppelen aan Mijn paneel. Met Mijn paneel kunt u de volgende instellingen en informatie voor elke gebruiker beheren. - Startpagina - Favorieten - De geschiedenis van de inhoud weergeven - URL-invoergeschiedenis - Cookie - Authentication Information dReferentie Een startpagina en favorieten registreren met de webbrowser. De weergavegeschiedenis, invoergeschiedenis, cookies en authenticatiegegevens worden automatisch opgeslagen in de server als de gebruiker de webbrowser gebruikt. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie over het gebruik van de webbrowser pagina 4-3. U kunt de registratie-informatie van een startpagina en favorieten bewerken met PageScope My Panel Manager. Raadpleeg de handleiding PageScope My Panel Manager voor meer informatie. 9 Overzicht 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Functies die beschikbaar zijn met het Image Panel Door het Image Panel te koppelen aan Mijn paneel of Mijn adresboek, kunt u sneltoetsen registreren voor de documentbron en de bestemming in het basisscherm van Image panel om de gebruiksomgeving van Image Panel aan te passen. U kunt ook Mijn adresboek raadplegen om een bestemming voor het verzenden van de gegevens op te geven. dReferentie Raadpleeg pagina 6-25 voor meer informatie over het aanpassen van het scherm Image Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 10-3 voor details over de functie My Address. 9.1.2 Procedure voor het ophalen van My Panel Voer de gebruikersauthenticatie uit op de geselecteerde MFP. Als de gebruikersauthenticatie is gelukt, maakt de MFP automatisch een verbinding met de server om My Panel op te halen van de gebruiker die is aangemeld. De gebruiker kan My Panel gebruiken wanneer hij bij de MFP is aangemeld. My Panel is niet beschikbaar nadat de gebruiker wordt afgemeld. Mijn paneel is beschikbaar Mijn paneel is beschikbaar Server (beheert Mijn paneel) (3) Mijn paneel ophalen (2) De server openen (1) Voer de authenticatie uit Mijn paneel is niet beschikbaar • Authenticatie mislukt • Afmelden • Kan Mijn paneel niet verkrijgen, enz. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.1 Overzicht 9 9.1.3 Beperkingen op het gebruik van de functie My Panel Hieronder vindt u de beperkingen over het gebruik van My Panel. - Het registreren, bewerken en verwijderen van Mijn paneel is alleen beschikbaar voor de gebruiker die eigenaar is van Mijn paneel. De beheerder van de MFP kan My Panel niet bedienen. - Wanneer u Mijn paneel voor de eerste keer opent, voldoen de taal, de meeteenheid en de kleurselectieinstellingen aan de instellingen in de MFP. - Wanneer u Mijn paneel voor de eerste keer opent, wordt het hoofdmenu van Mijn paneel weergegeven in het beginscherm. - Alleen het instelgeheugen (kopieerprogramma en fax/scanprogramma) dat is geregistreerd op de MFP die u gebruikt, is beschikbaar. - Afhankelijk van de functies of de status van de geïnstalleerde opties op de MFP waarop My Panel wordt gebruikt, zal de gebruiksomgeving die is opgegeven als My Panel, mogelijk niet beschikbaar zijn. - Als u My Panel registreert, bewerkt of verwijdert, kan dit een fout veroorzaken afhankelijk van de verbindingsstatus met de server. Als er een fout optreedt, moet u de netwerkverbinding controleren. 9 My Panel weergeven 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.2 9.2 My Panel weergeven 9.2.1 Hoofdmenu Wanneer u My Panel weergeeft, wordt eerst het scherm Hoofdmenu weergegeven. In het hoofdmenu kunt u vaak gebruikte functies en sneltoetsen voor het instelgeheugen vrij opmaken. Er kunnen twaalf typen sneltoetsen worden geregistreerd in het Hoofdmenu. Raadpleeg pagina 9-15 voor details over het configureren van de instellingen voor het hoofdmenu. 9.2.2 Het hoofdmenu weergeven Wanneer u de functie My Panel gebruikt, kunt u het beginscherm dat moet worden weergegeven nadat de gebruikersauthenticatie is gelukt, wijzigen. Om het hoofdmenu weer te geven voor My Panel vanaf een ander beginscherm, moet u het [Menu Toepassing] gebruiken. Druk in het [Menu Toepassing] op [Mijn paneel] om het hoofdmenu weer te geven in My Panel. dReferentie Het beginscherm dat wordt weergegeven nadat de gebruikersauthenticatie is gelukt, kan worden gewijzigd via [Instellingen Mijn paneel]. Raadpleeg pagina 9-17 voor meer informatie. Voor details over het [Menu Toepassing] raadpleegpagina 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 My Panel aanpassen 9 9.3 My Panel aanpassen Pas My Panel aan in [Instellingen Mijn paneel] van [Toepassing]. 9.3.1 [Instellingen Mijn paneel] Dit zijn de aanpasbare items. Item Beschrijving [Taalselectie] Selecteer een taal die moet worden gebruikt op My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 9-9 voor meer informatie. [Meeteenheid instelling] Selecteer een maateenheid die moet worden gebruikt wanneer u waarden weergeeft op My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 9-9 voor meer informatie. [Kop.app.inst.] Geef de eerste weergaveinstellingen op voor het basisscherm van de functie Kopiëren, de registratie van de sneltoetsen en de instelling van waardetoetsen die in het basisscherm moeten worden geschikt. Raadpleeg pagina 9-10 voor meer informatie. [Scan/fax instellingen] Eerste weergave-instellingen voor het basisscherm van de fax/scanfunctie en registratie van de sneltoetsen Raadpleeg pagina 9-12 voor meer informatie. [Gebruikersboxinstellingen] Configureer de eerste weergave-instellingen voor het basisscherm van de gebruikersboxfunctie en registreer de sneltoetsen. Raadpleeg pagina 9-14 voor meer informatie. [Kleurselectie instellingen] Selecteer een kleur voor de geselecteerde knoppen op My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 9-15 voor meer informatie. [Hoofdmenuinstellingen] Registreer de knoppen van het hoofdmenu in het scherm Hoofdmenu van My Panel. Raadpleeg pagina 9-15 voor meer informatie. [Basisscherminstellingen] Geef het beginscherm op dat moet worden weergegeven nadat de gebruikersauthenticatie is gelukt. Raadpleeg pagina 9-17 voor meer informatie. 9 My Panel aanpassen 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.2 [Instellingen Mijn paneel] weergeven Wanneer de functie My Panel beschikbaar is, verschijnt de optie [Instellingen Mijn paneel] in [Toepassing]. 1 Meld u aan als een geregistreerde gebruiker. 2 Druk op Hulpprogramma. 3 Druk op [Instellingen Mijn paneel]. Het scherm Instellingen Mijn paneel verschijnt. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 My Panel aanpassen 9 9.3.3 [Taalselectie] Selecteer een taal die moet worden gebruikt op My Panel uit de talen die beschikbaar zijn op de MFP. 9.3.4 [Meeteenheid instelling] Selecteer een lengte-eenheid die moet worden gebruikt op My Panel. 9 My Panel aanpassen 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.5 [Kop.app.inst.] Geef de eerste weergaveinstellingen op voor het basisscherm van de functie Kopiëren, de registratie van de sneltoetsen en de instelling van waardetoetsen die in het basiss